Suzuki Automobile 99011 66J22 03E User Manual

2008  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
Keep With Vehicle At All Times.  
Contains Important Information  
On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.  
Part No. 99011-66J22-03E  
July, 2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great value  
that will give you years of driving pleasure.  
This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learn  
about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.  
Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.  
Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.  
In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend you  
read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.  
When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-  
tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE STATION GUIDE  
1. Fuel (see section 1)  
2. Engine hood (see section 5)  
3. Tire changing tools (see section 5)  
4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow>  
(see section 9)  
5. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick  
<Red> (see section 9)  
1
6. Engine coolant (see section 9)  
7. Windshield washer fluid  
(see section 9)  
8
6
8. Battery (see section 9)  
10  
4
5
9. Tire pressure (see tire information  
label on driver’s door lock pillar)  
10. Spare tire (see section 9)  
2
3
2
7
9
66J190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
BEFORE DRIVING  
1
California Proposition 65 Warning  
2
WARNING  
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
3
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-  
ents, and certain product compo-  
nents contain or emit chemicals  
known to the State of California to  
cause cancer and birth defects or  
other reproductive harm.  
4
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
DRIVING TIPS  
5
6
7
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
APPEARANCE CARE  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
SPECIFICATIONS  
INDEX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOCATION OF WARNING  
MESSAGES  
6
Read and follow all of the warnings (labels  
etc.) on your vehicle. Make sure you  
understand all of them. Keep them on the  
vehicle. Do not remove the messages for  
any reason. If a label comes off or the  
messages become difficult to be read,  
have it corrected by your SUZUKI dealer.  
16  
4
5
14  
15  
13  
1. Air bag warning labels  
(on both sun visors)  
2. Rollover warning label  
14  
14  
3. Passenger seat belt warning label  
4. Jacking warning label  
13  
13  
13  
13  
5. Jacking warning label  
6. Fuel filler cap message  
7. Transfer switch warning label  
8. Brake fluid cap message  
9. Engine cooling fan warning label  
10. Radiator cap warning label  
11. Air conditioner warning label  
12. Battery label  
1
Driver  
Passenger  
3
2
12  
7
13. Side air bag warning label  
14. Rear outboard seat belt warning label  
15. Rear center seat belt warning label  
16. Luggage compartment cover warning  
label  
8
9
11  
10  
66J251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUZUKI  
MOTOR  
CORPORATION  
IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITH  
YOUR SUZUKI:  
FOREWORD  
believes in conservation and protection of  
Earth’s natural resources.  
Your SUZUKI multipurpose vehicle is  
designed and built to be capable of per-  
forming both on pavement and off road.  
You should therefore remember that your  
vehicle is distinctly different from ordinary  
passenger cars in handling as well as in  
structure. As with other vehicles of this  
type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-  
rectly may result in loss of control or an  
accident. Be sure to read “Important Vehi-  
cle Design Features to Know” and the “on-  
pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines  
which follow. It is very important to familiar-  
ize yourself with the proper operation of  
this vehicle before you start driving.  
Please review the New Vehicle Warranty  
Information booklet supplied with your  
SUZUKI. Should you have a question or  
problem regarding the warranty or service  
of your vehicle, please take the following  
action:  
To that end, we encourage every vehicle  
owner to recycle, trade in, or properly dis-  
pose of, as appropriate, used motor oil,  
coolant, and other fluids, batteries and  
tires.  
Consult the Service Manager and the  
Owner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer-  
ship. Explain your problem and ask for  
their assistance in resolving your problem.  
The Owner of the dealership is in the very  
best position to assist you as he or she is  
vitally concerned with your continued satis-  
faction.  
If you are still in need of additional informa-  
tion, or if you are dissatisfied, request that  
your dealer arrange a meeting with your  
District Service Manager.  
All information in this manual is based  
on the latest product information avail-  
able at the time of publication. Due to  
improvements or other changes, there  
may be discrepancies between informa-  
tion in this manual and your vehicle.  
If, after doing so, you still require further  
assistance, and you purchased your  
SUZUKI in the continental United States,  
please contact the American Suzuki Cus-  
tomer Relations Department by telephone  
at 1-800-934-0934 or in writing at:  
SUZUKI  
MOTOR  
CORPORATION  
reserves the right to make production  
changes at any time, without notice and  
without incurring any obligation to  
make the same or similar changes to  
vehicles previously built or sold.  
American Suzuki Motor Corporation  
Automotive Customer Relations  
3251 East Imperial Highway  
Brea, CA 92821-6795  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-1  
If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada  
please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-  
tomer Relations Department by telephone  
at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in  
writing at:  
IMPORTANT  
WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE  
Please read this manual and follow its  
instructions carefully. To emphasize spe-  
cial information, the symbol  
words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE  
have special meanings. Pay special atten-  
tion to the messages highlighted by these  
signal words:  
and the  
Suzuki Canada Inc.  
Customer Relations  
100 East Beaver Creek Road  
Richmond Hill, On  
L4B 1J6  
In the event you require assistance related  
to your SUZUKI, while temporarily travel-  
ling in either the United States or Canada,  
you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus-  
tomer Relations Department directly of the  
country in which you are temporarily oper-  
ating your vehicle.  
WARNING  
Indicates  
a
potential hazard that  
could result in death or injury.  
75F135  
The circle with a slash in this manual  
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-  
pen”.  
CAUTION  
Indicates  
a
potential hazard that  
could result in vehicle damage.  
Please be certain to provide us with the fol-  
lowing information: the model, Vehicle  
Identification Number, mileage, accesso-  
ries involved, event dates, your concern,  
and any other comments which you may  
have. When we receive your correspon-  
dence, we will be pleased to contact the  
Owner of your dealership and assist in  
resolving your concern.  
NOTE:  
Indicates special information to make  
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.  
For owners outside the continental United  
States, please refer to the distributor’s  
address listed in your Warranty Information  
booklet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-2  
MODIFICATION WARNING LEAK DETECTION PUMP  
NOTE:  
WARNING  
Your vehicle has a pump to regularly check  
the vehicle’s evaporative emission control  
system for leaks. This check is performed  
approximately five hours after the engine is  
turned off. During this leak check, you may  
hear a sound coming from the vehicle for  
several minutes. This sound is normal and  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica-  
tion could adversely affect safety,  
handling, performance or durability  
and may violate governmental regula-  
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-  
mance problems resulting from  
modification may not be covered  
under warranty.  
CAUTION  
Improper installation of mobile com-  
munication equipment such as cellu-  
lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)  
radios may cause electronic interfer-  
ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-  
tem, resulting in vehicle performance  
problems. Consult your SUZUKI  
dealer or qualified service technician  
for advice on installing such mobile  
communication equipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-3  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0-4  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
1
Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1  
65D394  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
Gasoline Containing MTBE  
Fuel Pump Labeling  
Fuel Recommendation  
Unleaded gasoline containing MTBE  
(methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used in  
your vehicle if the MTBE content is not  
greater than 15%. This oxygenated fuel  
does not contain alcohol.  
In some states, pumps that dispense oxy-  
genated fuels are required to be labeled for  
the type and percentage of oxygenate and  
whether important additives are present.  
Such labels may provide enough informa-  
tion for you to determine if a particular  
blend of fuel meets the requirements listed  
above. In other areas, pumps may not be  
clearly labeled as to the content or type of  
oxygenate and additives. If you are not  
sure that the fuel you intend to use meets  
these requirements, check with the service  
station operator or the fuel supplier.  
Gasoline/Ethanol blends  
Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol  
(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol,  
may be used in your vehicle if the ethanol  
content is not greater than 10%.  
Gasoline/Methanol blends  
Fuels containing 5% or less methanol  
(wood alcohol) may be suitable for use in  
your vehicle if they contain cosolvents and  
corrosion inhibitors. Do NOT USE fuels  
containing more than 5% methanol under  
any circumstances. Fuel system damage  
or vehicle performance problems resulting  
from the use of such fuels are not the  
responsibility of SUZUKI and may not be  
covered under the New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty.  
NOTE:  
60A004  
To help clean the air, SUZUKI recom-  
mends you use the oxygenated fuels.  
However, if you are not satisfied with the  
driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle  
when you are using an oxygenated fuel,  
switch back to the regular unleaded gaso-  
line.  
Your vehicle requires regular unleaded  
gasoline with a minimum rating of 87 pump  
octane ((R + M)/2 method). In some areas,  
the only fuels that are available are oxy-  
genated fuels.  
Oxygenated fuels which meet the mini-  
mum octane requirement and the require-  
ments described below may be used in  
your vehicle without jeopardizing the New  
Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to spill fuel containing  
alcohol while refueling. If fuel is  
spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up  
immediately. Fuels containing alco-  
hol can cause paint damage, which is  
not covered under the New Vehicle  
Limited Warranty.  
NOTE:  
Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain  
oxygen-carrying additives such as MTBE  
or alcohol.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1  
           
BEFORE DRIVING  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1  
Spare Tire Nut Lock (if equipped) ...................................... 2-1  
Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2  
Windows .............................................................................. 2-14  
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-16  
Seat Adjustment .................................................................. 2-17  
Head Restraints ................................................................... 2-19  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-20  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-37  
2
60G404  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
Ignition Key Reminder  
Keys  
Spare Tire Nut Lock  
(if equipped)  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the  
ignition switch when the driver’s door is  
opened.  
EXAMPLE  
To UNLOCK  
To LOCK  
54G489  
Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical  
keys. Keep the spare key in a safe place.  
One key can open all of the locks on the  
vehicle.  
64J172  
A nut lock is used for the spare tire. To  
unlock the spare tire nut, insert the ignition  
key into the lock as far as the key will go  
and remove the lock with the key in. To lock  
the spare tire nut, put the lock on the nut  
and push the lock in.  
The key identification number is stamped  
on a metal tag provided with the keys.  
Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose  
your keys, you will need this number to  
have new keys made. Write the number  
below for your future reference.  
KEY NUMBER:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
         
BEFORE DRIVING  
To unlock a front door from outside the  
vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of  
the key toward the rear of the vehicle.  
Power Door Locking System  
(if equipped)  
Door Locks  
WARNING  
UNLOCK  
Always lock all doors when driving.  
Locking the doors helps to prevent  
occupants from being thrown from  
the vehicle in the event of an acci-  
dent. It also helps prevent unin-  
tended opening of the doors.  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
LOCK  
Rear  
Side Door Locks  
Front  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
64J003  
64J002  
You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-  
ing the tailgate) simultaneously by:  
Turning the key in the driver’s door lock,  
or  
To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn  
the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob  
rearward to unlock the door.  
Rear  
• Pushing the power door locking switch  
located on the door panel of either front  
door.  
To lock a rear side door from outside the  
vehicle, turn the lock knob forward and  
close the door.  
Front  
(when using the key)  
60A009  
To lock all doors simultaneously, insert the  
key in the driver’s door lock, and turn the  
key to the LOCK side.  
To lock a front door from outside the vehi-  
cle:  
• Insert the key and turn the top of the key  
toward the front of the vehicle, or  
Turn the lock knob forward and close the  
door.  
To unlock all doors simultaneously, insert  
the key in the driver’s door lock and turn  
the key to the UNLOCK side twice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
Driver’s side  
EXAMPLE  
(when using the power door locking  
switch)  
To lock or unlock all the doors simulta-  
neously, depress the front or rear of the  
switch respectively.  
Keyless Start System Remote  
Controller/Keyless Entry System  
Transmitter  
Type A  
Type B  
NOTE:  
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-  
less entry system, you can also lock or  
unlock all doors by operating the trans-  
mitter. Refer to “Keyless Start System  
Remote Controller/Keyless Entry Sys-  
tem Transmitter” in this section.  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
• If your vehicle is equipped with the key-  
less start system, you can also lock or  
unlock all doors by pushing the request  
switch on the door handle. Refer to “Key-  
less Start System Remote Controller/  
Keyless Entry System Transmitter” in  
this section.  
64J004  
Front passenger’s side  
66J111  
LOCK  
UNLOCK  
Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-  
less start system remote controller (Type  
A) or a keyless entry system transmitter  
(Type B). The remote controller has a key-  
less entry system and a keyless start sys-  
tem. The transmitter has only a keyless  
entry system. For details, refer to the fol-  
lowing explanations.  
Keyless Start System Remote  
Controller (Type A)  
The remote controller enables the following  
operations:  
66J012  
You can lock or unlock the doors by  
operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons  
on the remote controller. Refer to the  
explanation in this section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
You can lock or unlock the doors by  
pushing the request switch on the door  
handle. For details, refer to the explana-  
tion in this section.  
You can start the engine without using  
an ignition key. For details, refer to “Igni-  
tion Switch” in the “STEERING COL-  
UMN CONTROLS” section and “Starting  
the Engine” in the “OPERATING YOUR  
VEHICLE” section.  
To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-  
ton (1).  
To unlock the driver’s door, push the  
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.  
To unlock other doors, wait a second or  
two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)  
a second time. If you “double-click” too  
fast, the doors will not unlock.  
ignition key is inserted in the ignition  
switch.  
If any door is open, you cannnot lock the  
door by operating the remote controller,  
however unlock the door.  
You cannot lock the door unless all of  
the doors are closed completely.  
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,  
ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-  
sible for a replacement. Be sure to have  
your dealer program the new remote  
controller code in your vehicle’s memory  
so that the old code is erased, or per-  
form the programming procedure your-  
self according to the instructions in this  
section.  
When the doors are locked, the turn signal  
lights will flash once.  
When the doors are unlocked:  
• The turn signal lights will flash twice.  
• If the interior light switch is in the middle  
position, the interior light will turn on for  
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If  
you push in the ignition switch or insert  
the key during this time, the light will  
start to fade out immediately.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
PANIC” button (3) function  
This function is to get the attention of oth-  
ers.  
Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than  
1 second. The headlights and taillights will  
blink for about 30 seconds. Also, the horn  
will sound intermittently for about 30 sec-  
onds at the same time.  
Be sure the doors are locked after you  
operate the “LOCK” button. If no door is  
opened within about 30 seconds after the  
“UNLOCK” button is operated, the doors  
will automatically lock again.  
66J114  
To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press any  
button (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on the  
remote controller. You can also insert the  
key in the ignition switch and turn to the  
“ON” position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.  
(1) “LOCK” button  
(2) “UNLOCK” button  
(3) “PANIC” button  
NOTE:  
• The maximum operating distance of the  
remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),  
but this can vary depending on the sur-  
roundings, especially near other trans-  
mitting devices such as radio towers or  
CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.  
“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button  
(2) function  
You can lock or unlock all doors (including  
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating  
the remote controller near the vehicle.  
NOTE:  
The “PANIC” button function will not acti-  
vate when the key is in the ignition switch.  
• The door locks can not be operated with  
the remote controller if the ignition switch  
is in a position other than “LOCK”, or the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Keyless unlocking/locking using the  
request switches  
When the doors are unlocked:  
EXAMPLE  
• The turn signal lights will flash twice.  
• If the interior light switch is in the middle  
position, the interior light will turn on for  
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If  
you push in the ignition switch or insert  
the key during this time, the light will  
start to fade out immediately.  
(1)  
(1)  
Be sure the doors are locked after you  
operate the request switch to lock the  
doors.  
(1)  
NOTE:  
(1)  
66J163  
• The door locks can not be operated by  
the request switch under the following  
conditions:  
EXAMPLE  
(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)  
64J006  
– If any door is open or is not completely  
closed.  
– If the ignition switch is in a position  
other than “LOCK”.  
– If the ignition key is inserted in the igni-  
tion switch.  
• If no doors are opened within about 30  
seconds after unlocking the doors by  
pushing the request switch, the doors  
will be locked again automatically.  
When the remote controller is within the  
operating range described in this section,  
you can lock or unlock the doors by push-  
ing the request switch (1) on the door han-  
dle of the driver’s door, front passenger’s  
door or tailgate.  
When the remote controller is within  
approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a  
front door handle or the tailgate switch, you  
can lock or unlock the doors by pushing  
the request switch.  
NOTE:  
To lock all doors when all doors are  
unlocked:  
• Push the request switch on one of the  
door handles once.  
• If the remote controller is outside the  
request  
switch  
operating  
range  
described above, you will not be able to  
operate the request switch.  
• If the battery of the remote controller  
runs down or there are strong radio  
waves or noise, the request switch oper-  
ating range may be reduced or the  
remote controller may be inoperative.  
• If the remote controller is too close to the  
door glass, the request switches may not  
operate.  
The turn signal lights will flash once when  
the doors are locked.  
To unlock a door or all doors:  
• Push the request switch on the door  
handle once to unlock only one door.  
• Push the request switch on the door  
handle twice to unlock all doors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
BEFORE DRIVING  
• If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-  
cle, the request switches may not oper-  
ate normally.  
• When the remote controller is in contact  
with or covered by a metal object.  
• When a radio wave type remote keyless  
entry is used nearby.  
• When the remote controller is placed  
near an electronic device such as per-  
sonal computer.  
Some additional precautions you should  
take and information you should be aware  
of are:  
• Make sure the ignition key is stowed in  
the remote controller. If the remote con-  
troller becomes unreliable, you will not  
be able to lock or unlock the doors or  
start the engine.  
• The remote controller will only operate a  
request switch if it is within the switch’s  
operating range. For example, if the  
remote controller is within the operating  
range of the driver’s door request switch  
but not the front passenger’s door  
request switch or the tailgate request  
switch, the driver’s door switch can be  
operated but the front passenger’s door  
switch or tailgate switch can not be oper-  
ated.  
63J281  
To stow the ignition key into the remote  
controller, push the key in the remote con-  
troller until you hear a click.  
• Be sure that the driver always carries the  
remote controller.  
CAUTION  
The remote controller is a sensitive  
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-  
aging the remote controller:  
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-  
ture or high temperature such as  
by leaving it on the dashboard  
under direct sunlight.  
• Keep the remote controller away  
from magnetic objects such as a  
television.  
• If you lose one of the remote controllers,  
ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-  
sible for a replacement. Be sure to have  
your dealer program the new remote  
controller code in your vehicle’s memory  
so that the old code is erased, or per-  
form the programming procedure your-  
self according to the instructions in this  
section.  
You can use up to four remote controllers  
and ignition keys for your vehicle. Ask  
your SUZUKI dealer for details.  
• The battery life of the remote controller  
is about two years, but it can vary  
depending on usage conditions.  
(A)  
63J282  
To remove the key from the remote control-  
ler, push the button (A) in the direction of  
the arrow and pull the key out from the  
remote controller.  
NOTE:  
The keyless start system may not function  
correctly in certain environments or under  
certain operating conditions such as the  
following:  
• When there are strong signals coming  
from a television, power station or a cel-  
lular phone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Reminder function  
• If you open the driver’s door and lock the  
door by turning the lock knob forward or  
pushing the power door locking switch,  
the driver’s door will be automatically  
unlocked.  
• If you open a door other than the driver’s  
door and lock the front passenger’s door  
by turning the lock knob forward or push-  
ing the power door locking switch, the  
front passenger’s door will be automati-  
cally unlocked.  
Replacement of the battery  
If the remote controller becomes unreli-  
able, replace the battery.  
To replace the battery of the remote con-  
troller:  
NOTE:  
• The reminder will not operate when the  
remote controller is on the instrument  
panel, in the glove box, in the door  
pocket, in the sun visor or on the floor  
etc.  
• Be sure that the driver always carries the  
remote controller.  
EXAMPLE  
66J022  
If the remote controller is not in the vehicle  
under the following conditions, a buzzer  
sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds  
and the keyless start system indicator light  
on the instrument cluster blinks in red:  
• When the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h  
(6 mph).  
66J016  
• Do not leave the remote controller in the  
vehicle when leaving the vehicle.  
1) Insert a flat blade screw driver covered  
with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote  
controller and pry it open.  
• When one or more doors are opened  
and all of the doors are later closed with  
the ignition switch in a position other  
than “LOCK”.  
The red indicator light will turn off within  
several seconds after the remote controller  
is returned to an area of the vehicle other  
than the rear luggage area.  
If the remote controller is left in the vehicle  
and you lock the driver’s door or front pas-  
senger’s door as described below, the door  
will be automatically unlocked.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Programming/erasing the remote con-  
troller code yourself  
CAUTION  
Your new vehicle was originally equipped  
with two remote controllers.  
The transmitter/remote controller is a  
sensitive electronic instrument. To  
avoid damaging it, do not expose it to  
dust or moisture or tamper with inter-  
nal parts.  
If you have lost one of the remote control-  
lers, you should change the remote con-  
troller code in your vehicle’s memory as  
soon as possible for security. If you pur-  
chase additional remote controllers, the  
new remote controllers need to be pro-  
grammed into your vehicle’s memory. You  
can perform this yourself by using the fol-  
lowing procedure:  
(1)  
66J017  
NOTE:  
2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc  
type CR2032 or equivalent) so its + ter-  
minal faces the bottom of the case as  
shown in the illustration.  
3) Close the remote controller firmly.  
4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-  
ated with the remote controller.  
5) Dispose of the used battery properly  
according to applicable rules or regula-  
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-  
ies with ordinary household trash.  
You can program up to four remote con-  
troller codes into your vehicle’s memory.  
The four codes may be the same or dif-  
ferent.  
• If you try to program a fifth code, the four  
remote controller codes that are pro-  
grammed will be cleared automatically.  
• If you program a new remote controller  
code, all of the old remote controller  
codes that are in your vehicle’s memory  
will be erased automatically. When you  
program a new remote controller, you  
should reprogram any additional remote  
controllers at the same time.  
WARNING  
Swallowing a lithium battery may  
cause serious internal injury. Do not  
allow anyone to swallow a lithium  
battery. Keep lithium batteries away  
from children and pets. If swallowed,  
contact a physician immediately.  
To purchase new remote controllers, see  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
• Before you begin programming, have all  
of your remote controllers available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To program a new remote controller  
1) Close all the doors of the vehicle.  
2) Sit in the driver’s seat and confirm that  
the driver’s door is unlocked.  
3) Insert the key into the ignition switch.  
4) Complete steps 1 through 6 described  
below within 25 seconds after step 3).  
7. Proceed to step 5) within 60 seconds  
after the engine has started.  
7) To complete programming, remove the  
key from the ignition switch or turn the  
ignition switch to the “ON” position.  
8) Make sure that the keyless start system  
and keyless entry system operate prop-  
erly by operating each remote control-  
ler.  
NOTE:  
You cannot program the remote controller  
if you don’t complete steps 1 through 6  
within 25 seconds.  
You cannot program the remote controller  
if you do not proceed to step 5) within 60  
seconds after the engine has started.  
If you cannot operate the keyless start sys-  
tem and/or keyless entry system, repeat  
this programming procedure again.  
If you still cannot operate the systems, see  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”  
position.  
A buzzer will sound twice and the door  
lock switch will be activated from the  
lock position to the unlock position  
automatically.  
To change the old remote controller  
codes in your vehicle’s memory  
If you have lost one of the remote control-  
lers, you should change the remote con-  
troller codes in your vehicle’s memory as  
soon as possible for security.  
To erase the remote controller code(s) in  
your vehicle’s memory, you should pro-  
gram the new remote controller code. The  
old codes in your vehicle’s memory will be  
erased automatically. If you have more  
remote controller(s), you must program all  
of the remote controller codes at the same  
time. You cannot operate the keyless start  
system and keyless entry system using  
any remote controller that is not pro-  
grammed at the same time.  
UNLOCK  
(2)  
LOCK  
(1)  
6) Press the “LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or  
PANIC” button on the remote control-  
ler.  
A buzzer will sound twice and the door  
lock switch will be activated from the  
lock position to the unlock position  
automatically.  
If you want to program an additional  
remote controller, repeat the procedure  
of step 6) using the additional remote  
controller.  
64J004  
1. Push the power door locking switch  
of the driver’s door to the lock posi-  
tion and then push it to the unlock  
position.  
2. Repeat step 1 two more times.  
3. Push the power door locking switch  
of the driver’s door to the lock posi-  
tion.  
4. Remove the key from the ignition  
switch and then insert it again.  
5. Repeat step 4 three more times.  
6. To start the engine, turn the ignition  
switch to the “START” position.  
Wait for 3 seconds.  
NOTE:  
Complete step 6) within 30 seconds.  
You can program up to four remote control-  
lers.  
For details on how to program, refer to the  
programming procedure in this section.  
When you complete programming, make  
sure that the keyless start system and key-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
BEFORE DRIVING  
less entry system operate properly by  
operating each remote controller.  
Keyless Entry System Transmitter  
(Type B)  
When the doors are locked, the turn signal  
lights will flash once.  
1. For USA  
When the doors are unlocked:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-  
lowing two conditions:  
• The turn signal lights will flash twice.  
• If the interior light switch is in the middle  
position, the interior light will turn on for  
about 15 seconds and then fade out. If  
you insert the key into the ignition switch  
during this time, the light will start to fade  
out immediately.  
(1)  
(2)  
1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
Be sure the doors are locked after you  
operate the “LOCK” button. If no door is  
opened within about 30 seconds after the  
“UNLOCK” button is operated, the doors  
will automatically lock again.  
(3)  
NOTE:  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for com-  
pliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
52D209  
NOTE:  
(1) “LOCK” button  
(2) “UNLOCK” button  
(3) “PANIC” button  
• The maximum operating distance of the  
keyless entry system transmitter is about  
5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending  
on the surroundings, especially near  
other transmitting devices such as radio  
towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.  
• The door locks can not be operated with  
the transmitter, if the ignition key is  
inserted in the ignition switch.  
2. For Canada  
This device complies with Industry Canada  
Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1) This device may not cause interference,  
and  
“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button  
(2) function  
You can lock or unlock all doors (including  
the tailgate) simultaneously by operating  
the transmitter near the vehicle.  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the  
device.  
To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-  
ton (1).  
To unlock the driver’s door, push the  
“UNLOCK” button (2) once.  
To unlock other doors, wait a second or  
two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)  
a second time. If you “double-click” too  
fast, the doors will not unlock.  
• If you lose one of the transmitters, ask  
your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible  
for a replacement. Be sure to have your  
dealer program the new transmitter code  
in your vehicle’s memory so that the old  
code is erased, or perform the program-  
ming procedure yourself according to the  
instructions in this section.  
The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-  
istration number only signifies that the  
Industry Canada technical specifications  
were met.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Replacement of the battery  
If the transmitter becomes unreliable,  
replace the battery.  
CAUTION  
The transmitter is a sensitive elec-  
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging  
the transmitter:  
To replace the battery of the transmitter:  
(1)  
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-  
ture or high temperature such as  
by leaving it on the dashboard  
under direct sunlight.  
• Keep the transmitter away from  
magnetic objects such as a televi-  
sion.  
PANIC” button (3) function  
52D211  
This function is to get the attention of oth-  
ers.  
2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc-  
type CR2025 or equivalent) so its + ter-  
minal faces the “+” mark of the transmit-  
ter.  
Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than  
1 second. The headlights and taillights will  
blink for about 30 seconds. Also, the horn  
will sound intermittently for about 30 sec-  
onds at the same time.  
To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press any  
button (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on the  
transmitter. You can also insert the key in  
the ignition switch and turn to the “ON”  
position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.  
52D210  
3) Close the transmitter firmly.  
1) Put the edge of a coin or a flat blade  
screw driver in the slot of the transmitter  
and pry it open.  
4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-  
ated with the transmitter.  
5) Dispose of the used battery properly  
according to applicable rules or regula-  
tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-  
ies with ordinary household trash.  
WARNING  
NOTE:  
The “PANIC” button function will not acti-  
vate when the key is in the ignition switch.  
Swallowing a lithium battery may  
cause serious internal injury. Do not  
allow anyone to swallow a lithium  
battery. Keep lithium batteries away  
from children and pets. If swallowed,  
contact a physician immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To program a new transmitter  
1) Confirm that all the doors are closed  
and the ignition key is out of the ignition  
switch.  
CAUTION  
The transmitter/remote controller is a  
sensitive electronic instrument. To  
avoid damaging it, do not expose it to  
dust or moisture or tamper with inter-  
nal parts.  
(2)  
2) Open the driver’s door.  
3) Insert the key, turn the ignition switch to  
the “ON” position, turn the ignition  
switch to the “LOCK” position and  
remove the key within 10 seconds.  
Programming/removing  
code yourself  
Your new vehicle was originally equipped  
with two transmitters.  
a
transmitter  
If you have lost one of the transmitters, you  
should change the transmitter code in your  
vehicle’s memory as soon as possible for  
security. If you purchase additional trans-  
mitters, the new transmitters need to be  
programmed into your vehicle’s memory.  
You can perform this yourself by using the  
following procedure:  
52D212  
6) Press the “UNLOCK” button (2) on the  
transmitter one time within 20 seconds  
(after step 5). All the doors will lock/  
unlock to confirm that the procedure  
has been completed and the transmitter  
has been programmed.  
7) If you want to program an additional  
transmitter, repeat the procedure from  
step 1) through step 6).  
(1)  
NOTE:  
66J018  
You can program up to three transmitter  
codes into your vehicle’s memory. The  
three codes may be the same or differ-  
ent.  
4) Push and release the driver’s door  
switch (1) 3 times, insert the key, and  
turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-  
tion within 20 seconds.  
5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”  
position and remove the key within 10  
seconds. All doors will lock/unlock to  
confirm that this procedure has been  
properly completed.  
8) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-  
tem operates properly by operating  
each transmitter.  
• If you try to program a fourth code, the  
oldest code will be cleared automatically.  
To purchase new transmitters, see your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
• Before you begin programming, have all  
of your transmitters available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To change the old transmitter codes in  
your vehicle’s memory  
If you have lost one of the transmitters, you  
should change the transmitter codes in  
your vehicle’s memory as soon as possible  
for security.  
1. For USA  
Child Lock System (rear doors)  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-  
lowing two conditions:  
1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and  
To remove one of the transmitter codes  
from your vehicle’s memory, first replace all  
three of the transmitter codes in your vehi-  
cle’s memory, then program additional  
transmitters as follows:  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
(2)  
(1)  
NOTE:  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for com-  
pliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
1) Program one of your transmitters three  
times, by repeating the programming  
procedure shown in this section. This  
will replace all the old transmitter codes  
in the vehicle’s memory with the code  
for the transmitter you are using.  
2) If you want to program up to two addi-  
tional transmitters, repeat the program-  
ming procedure shown in this section.  
3) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-  
tem operates properly by operating  
each transmitter.  
64J009  
2. For Canada  
Each of the rear doors is equipped with a  
child lock which can be used to help pre-  
vent unwanted opening of the door from  
inside the vehicle. When the lock lever is in  
the “LOCK” position (1), the rear door can  
only be opened from outside. When the  
lock lever is in the “RELEASE” position (2),  
the rear door can be opened from inside or  
outside.  
This device complies with Industry Canada  
Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1) This device may not cause interference,  
and  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the  
device.  
The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-  
istration number only signifies that the  
Industry Canada technical specifications  
were met.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Tailgate  
Windows  
If you can not unlock the tailgate due to a  
discharged battery or malfunction, follow  
the procedures below to unlock the tailgate  
from inside the vehicle.  
Power Window Controls  
(if equipped)  
(2)  
Driver’s side  
1) Remove the luggage compartment  
cover.  
2) Fold the rear seat forward for easier  
access. Refer to the “Folding Rear  
Seats” section for details on how to fold  
the rear seat forward.  
(1)  
(4)  
(2)  
64J203  
5) Push down on the emergency lever (2)  
using a jack handle or a flat blade screw  
driver. To lock the tailgate, push up on  
the emergency lever (2).  
(5)  
64J011  
WARNING  
(1)  
The power windows can only be operated  
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
To avoid injury, do not use your fin-  
ger to push the emergency lever.  
The driver’s door has switches (1), (2), (4),  
(5), to operate the driver’s window, the  
front passenger’s window, the rear left win-  
dow and right window, respectively.  
64J202  
After using the emergency lever, be sure to  
see your SUZUKI dealer.  
3) Remove the cap (1) by hand.  
4) Break the vinyl using a jack handle or a  
flat blade screw driver to access the  
emergency lever (2).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
Passenger’s door  
EXAMPLE  
Lock switch  
EXAMPLE  
CLOSE  
(3)  
OPEN  
81A009  
66J164  
64J013  
To open a window, push the top part of the  
switch and to close the window lift up the  
top part of the switch.  
The passenger’s door has a switch (3) to  
operate the passenger’s window.  
The driver’s door also has a lock switch for  
the passenger’s window(s). When you  
push in the lock switch, the passenger’s  
window(s) can not be raised or lowered by  
operating either of the switches (2), (3), (4)  
or (5). To restore normal operation, release  
the lock switch by pushing again.  
The driver’s window has an “auto-down”  
feature for added convenience (at toll  
booths or drive-through restaurants, for  
example). This means you can open the  
window without holding the window switch  
in the “Down” position. Press the driver’s  
window switch completely down and  
release it. To stop the window before it  
reaches the bottom, pull the switch up  
briefly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
Mirrors  
WARNING  
Inside Rearview Mirror  
You should always lock the passen-  
ger’s window operation when there  
are children in the vehicle. Children  
can be seriously injured if they get  
part of their body caught by the  
window during operation.  
• To avoid injuring an occupant by  
window entrapment, be sure no  
part of the occupant’s body such  
as hands or head is in the path of  
the electric windows when closing  
them.  
• Always adjust the mirror with the  
selector set to the day position.  
• Only use the night position if it is  
necessary to reduce glare from the  
headlights of vehicles behind you.  
Be aware that in this position you  
may not be able to see some  
objects that could be seen in the  
day position.  
65D410  
• Always remove the ignition key  
when leaving the vehicle even if a  
short time. Also do not leave chil-  
dren alone in a parked vehicle.  
Unattended children could use the  
electric window switches and get  
trapped by the window.  
(1)  
Night driving  
Day driving  
65D409  
You can adjust the inside rearview mirror  
by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-  
cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set  
the selector tab (1) to the day position,  
then move the mirror up, down or sideways  
by hand to obtain the best view.  
NOTE:  
If you drive with one of the rear windows  
open, you may hear a loud sound caused  
by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open  
the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or  
narrow the rear window opening.  
When driving at night, you can move the  
selector tab to the night position to reduce  
glare from the headlights of vehicles  
behind you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Power Mirror Control (if equipped)  
Seat Adjustment  
WARNING  
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s  
seat or seatback while driving. The  
seat or seatback could move unex-  
pectedly, causing loss of control.  
Make sure that the driver’s seat and  
seatback are properly adjusted  
before you start driving.  
(1)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(4)  
WARNING  
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,  
which reduces the effectiveness of  
the seat belts as a safety device,  
make sure that the seats are adjusted  
before the seat belts are fastened.  
64J014  
64J015  
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you  
can just see the side of your vehicle in the  
mirrors.  
The switch to control the power rearview  
mirrors is located on the driver’s door  
panel. You can adjust the mirrors when the  
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-  
tion. To adjust the mirrors:  
The passenger’s side mirror is a convex  
(curved surface) mirror. Objects seen in  
this mirror will look smaller and appear far-  
ther away than when seen in a flat mirror.  
1) Move the selector switch to the left or  
right to select the mirror you wish to  
adjust.  
2) Press the outer part of the switch that  
corresponds to the direction in which  
you wish to move the mirror.  
3) Return the selector switch to the center  
position to help prevent unintended  
adjustment.  
WARNING  
Be careful when judging the size or  
distance of a vehicle or other object  
seen in the side convex mirror. Be  
aware that objects look smaller and  
appear farther away than when seen  
in a flat mirror.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-17  
       
BEFORE DRIVING  
Adjusting Seatbacks  
Adjusting Seat Position  
Front seat  
WARNING  
All seatbacks should always be in an  
upright position when driving, or seat  
belt effectiveness may be reduced.  
Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-  
mum protection when seatbacks are  
in the upright position.  
Front seat  
64J017  
If the driver’s seat is equipped with a seat  
height adjuster lever on the outboard side  
of the seat, raise or lower the seat by pull-  
ing up or down the adjuster lever.  
64J016  
The adjustment lever for each front seat is  
located under the front of the seat. To  
adjust the seat position, pull up on the  
adjustment lever and slide the seat forward  
or rearward. After adjustment, try to move  
the seat forward and rearward to ensure  
that it is securely latched.  
64J018  
To adjust the seatback angle of front seat,  
pull up the lever on the outboard side of  
the seat, move the seatback to the desired  
position, and release the lever to lock the  
seatback in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-18  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
Rear seat  
Front  
Head Restraints  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
64J019  
63J256  
To adjust the seatback angle of the rear  
seats:  
1) Pull up the lever on the top of a split  
folding seat.  
2) Move the seatback to one of the lock  
positions. The number of the lock posi-  
tions depends on the vehicle specifica-  
tion.  
3) Release the lever to lock the seatback  
in position. After adjustment, try moving  
the seatback to make sure it is securely  
locked.  
Head restraints are designed to help  
reduce the risk of neck injuries in case of  
an accident. Adjust the head restraint to  
the position which places the center of the  
head restraint closest to the top of your  
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-  
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high  
as possible.  
(2)  
PUSH  
WARNING  
• Never drive the vehicle with the  
head restraints removed.  
• Do not attempt to adjust the head  
restraint while driving.  
66J150  
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on  
the restraint until it clicks. To lower the  
restraint, push down on the restraint while  
holding in the release knob (1). If a head  
restraint must be removed (for cleaning,  
replacement, etc.), use the following pro-  
cedure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-19  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
1) Insert a sharp-pointed tool into the  
small hole (2). Push the tip into the hole  
(2) and hold it while pushing in the  
release knob (1).  
Rear  
EXAMPLE  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint  
Systems  
2) Pull the head restraint all the way out  
while pushing the release knob (1) and  
holding the tip in the hole (2).  
NOTE:  
It may be necessary to recline the seat-  
back to provide enough overhead clear-  
ance to remove the head restraint.  
64J023  
To raise the rear head restraint, pull  
upward on the restraint until it clicks. To  
lower the restraint, push down on the  
restraint while holding in the release knob.  
If a head restraint must be removed (for  
cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in the  
release knob and pull the head restraint all  
the way out.  
65D231S  
WARNING  
An air bag supplements, or adds to,  
the frontal crash protection offered  
by seat belts. The driver and all pas-  
sengers must be properly restrained  
by wearing seat belts at all times,  
whether or not an air bag is mounted  
at their seating position, to minimize  
the risk of severe injury or death in  
the event of a crash.  
When installing a child restraint system,  
raise the head restraint to the most upper  
position.  
(2)  
66J161  
To reinstall the head restraint, insert the  
head restraint bars into the holes (2) and  
push the head restraint down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-20  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
as low as possible  
across the hips  
Across the pelvis  
Above the pelvis  
65D606  
65D201  
65D199  
WARNING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
• Never allow persons to ride in the  
cargo area of a vehicle. In the event  
of an accident, there is a much  
greater risk of injury for persons  
who are not riding in a seat with  
their seat belt securely fastened.  
• Seat belts should always be  
adjusted as follows:  
– the lap portion of the belt should  
be worn low across the pelvis,  
not across the waist.  
– the shoulder straps should be  
worn on the outside shoulder  
only, and never under the arm.  
– the shoulder straps should be  
away from your face and neck,  
but not falling off your shoulder.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Seat belts should never be worn  
with the straps twisted and should  
be adjusted as tightly as is com-  
fortable to provide the protection  
for which they have been designed.  
A slack belt will provide less pro-  
tection than one which is snug.  
(Continued)  
• Pregnant women should use seat  
belts, although specific recommen-  
dations about driving should be  
made by the woman’s medical advi-  
sor. Remember that the lap portion  
of the belt should be worn as low  
as possible across the hips, as  
shown in the diagram.  
• Make sure that each seat belt  
buckle is inserted into the proper  
buckle catch. It is possible to cross  
the buckles in the rear seat.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-21  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)  
The lap-shoulder seat belt has an emer-  
gency locking retractor (ELR), which is  
designed to lock the seat belt only during a  
sudden stop or impact. It also may lock if  
you pull the belt across your body very  
quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back  
to unlock it, then pull the belt across your  
body more slowly.  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Do not wear your seat belt over  
hard or breakable objects in your  
pockets or on your clothing. If an  
accident occurs, objects such as  
glasses, pens, etc. under the seat  
belt can cause injury.  
• Never use the same seat belt on  
more than one occupant and never  
attach a seat belt over an infant or  
child being held on an occupant’s  
lap. Such seat belt use could cause  
serious injury in the event of an  
accident.  
• Periodically inspect seat belt  
assemblies for excessive wear and  
damage. Seat belts should be  
replaced if webbing becomes  
frayed, contaminated, or damaged  
in any way. It is essential to replace  
the entire seat belt assembly after it  
has been worn in a severe impact,  
even if damage to the assembly is  
not obvious.  
• Infants and small children should  
never be transported unless they  
are properly restrained. Restraint  
systems for infants and small chil-  
dren can be purchased commer-  
cially and should be used. Make  
sure that the system you purchase  
meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. Read and follow all the  
directions provided by the manu-  
facturer.  
• Avoid contamination of seat belt  
webbing by polishes, oils, chemi-  
cals and particularly battery acid.  
Cleaning may safely be carried out  
using mild soap and water.  
• For children, if the shoulder belt  
irritates the neck or face, move the  
child closer to the center of the  
vehicle.  
• All seatbacks should always be in  
an upright position when driving,  
or seat belt effectiveness may be  
reduced. Seat belts are designed to  
offer maximum protection when  
seatbacks are in the upright posi-  
tion.  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
The front passenger’s seat belt and the  
rear seat belts have emergency locking  
retractors (ELRs) that can be temporarily  
converted to function as automatic locking  
retractors (ALRs). The ALR mode should  
be used if you need to secure a child  
restraint system in the seat. Refer to the  
“Child Restraint Systems” section for  
details.  
• Children age 12 and under should  
ride properly restrained in the rear  
seat, if equipped.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-22  
     
BEFORE DRIVING  
Safety reminder  
by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt  
upward through the latch plate. The length  
of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself  
to allow freedom of movement.  
Sit up straight and  
fully back  
Low on hips  
60A036  
60A038  
To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and  
well back in the seat, pull the latch plate  
attached to the seat belt across your body  
and press it into the buckle until you hear a  
“click”.  
Low on hips  
60A040  
To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt  
during a collision, position the lap portion  
of the belt across your lap as low on your  
hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-23  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Seat Belt Reminder  
Driver’s seat belt reminder light  
EXAMPLE  
52D249  
60A039  
NOTE:  
To unfasten the belt, push the red  
“PRESS” button on the buckle and allow  
the belt to retract.  
66J019  
The word “CENTER” is molded into the  
buckle for the rear seat center belt. The  
buckles are designed so a latch plate can  
not be inserted into the wrong buckle.  
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
light  
66J243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-24  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
When the driver and front passenger don’t  
buckle their seat belts, the driver’s seat  
belt reminder light in the instrument cluster  
and the front passenger’s seat belt  
reminder light in the center of the instru-  
ment panel will come on and a buzzer will  
sound as a reminder to the driver and front  
passenger to buckle their seat belts.  
Flow chart  
Ignition Switch “ON”  
Seat belt is  
unbuckled  
Seat belt is  
buckled  
No reminder  
Seat belt is  
unbuckled  
Reminder 1  
WARNING  
30 sec.  
It is absolutely essential that the  
driver and passengers wear their seat  
belts at all times. Persons who are  
not wearing seat belts have a much  
greater risk of injury if an accident  
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-  
ling your seat belt before putting the  
key in the ignition.  
Vehicle speed:  
below 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
over 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
below 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
over 8 km/h  
Vehicle speed:  
increase to 8 km/h  
Reminder 2  
3 min.  
The seat belt reminder functions as shown  
in the figure below. There are some differ-  
ences between the driver’s seat belt  
reminder and the front passenger’s seat  
belt reminder. For more details, refer to the  
explanation below.  
Reminder 3  
No reminder  
52D219  
Reminder 1 – 3  
For each reminder 1 – 3, the reminder light comes on for about 20 seconds, then blinks  
for about 55 seconds. When the reminder light first comes on, a buzzer sounds intermit-  
tently for about 6 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-25  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Driver’s seat belt reminder  
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
The front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
will activate only when there is a passen-  
ger sitting in the front seat. In some situa-  
tions, however, such as when you place  
heavy objects in the front seat, the seat  
belt reminder can be activated as if there  
were a passenger present. The front pas-  
senger’s seat belt reminder works in the  
same manner as the driver’s seat belt  
reminder, except that it is not activated  
until 10 seconds after the ignition switch is  
turned to the “ON” position.  
Shoulder anchor height adjuster  
(if equipped)  
If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled  
with the ignition key in the “ON” position,  
the driver’s seat belt reminder works as fol-  
lows:  
EXAMPLE  
1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will  
come on for about 20 seconds when  
the ignition key is turned to the “ON”  
position then will blink for about 55 sec-  
onds. When the light comes on, a  
buzzer will also sound intermittently for  
about 6 seconds (Reminder 1).  
2) If the vehicle is driven (vehicle speed >  
8 km/h), Reminder 2 will operate about  
30 seconds after Reminder 1 has fin-  
ished.  
64J198  
If the vehicle is not driven (vehicle  
speed < 8 km/h), Reminder 2 will oper-  
ate when driving starts (vehicle speed >  
8 km/h).  
Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that  
the shoulder belt rides on the center of the  
outside shoulder. To adjust the shoulder  
anchor height, slide the anchor up simply  
or slide the anchor down while pulling the  
lock knob out. After adjustment, make sure  
that the anchor is securely locked.  
3) Reminder 3 will operate about 3 min-  
utes after Reminder 2 has finished.  
4) Even if the driver’s seat belt remains  
unbuckled after Reminder 3, there will  
be no further reminders.  
WARNING  
If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt  
and later unbuckles the seat belt, the  
reminder system will be activated from  
Reminder 1 or Reminder 2 according to  
the vehicle speed. (Refer to the flow chart.)  
Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi-  
tioned on the center of the outside  
shoulder. The belt should be away  
from your face and neck, but not fall-  
ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment  
of the belt could reduce the effective-  
ness of the safety belt in a crash.  
The driver’s seat belt reminder will be auto-  
matically canceled when the driver’s seat  
belt is buckled or the ignition switch is  
turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-26  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Seat Belt Inspection  
EXAMPLE  
Child Restraint Systems  
WARNING  
Be sure to inspect all seat belt  
assemblies after any collision. Any  
seat belt assembly which was in use  
during a collision (other than a very  
minor one) should be replaced, even  
if damage to the assembly is not  
obvious. Any seat belt assembly  
which was not in use during a colli-  
sion should be replaced if it does not  
function properly, it is damaged in  
any way or the seat belt pretension-  
ers were activated (that is, if the front  
air bags were activated).  
65D209  
60G332  
Periodically inspect the seat belts to make  
sure they work properly and are not dam-  
aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch  
plates, retractors, anchorages and guide  
loops. Replace any seat belts which do not  
work properly or are damaged.  
Infant restraint - rear seat only  
EXAMPLE  
65D202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-27  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
WARNING  
Infant restraint - rear seat only  
SUZUKI highly recommends that you use  
a child restraint system to restrain infants  
and small children. Many different types of  
child restraint systems are available; make  
sure that the restraint system you select  
meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-  
dards.  
Children could be endangered in a  
crash if their child restraints are not  
properly secured in the vehicle.  
When installing a child restraint sys-  
tem, be sure to follow the instruc-  
tions below. Be sure to secure the  
child in the restraint system accord-  
ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions.  
All child restraint systems are designed to  
be secured in vehicle seats by either seat  
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-  
shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower  
anchor bars built into the seats. Whenever  
possible, SUZUKI recommends that child  
restraint systems be installed on the rear  
seat. According to accident statistics, chil-  
dren are safer when properly restrained in  
rear seating positions than in front seating  
positions.  
WARNING  
65D584  
In an accident or sudden stop, the  
rear seat armrest (if equipped) could  
fall forward. If there is a child in a  
rear-facing child restraint in the cen-  
ter seating position, the falling arm-  
rest could injure the child. Make sure  
the armrest is back in the seat and  
locked when not in use.  
Booster seat  
EXAMPLE  
If you must use a front-facing child restraint  
in the front passenger’s seat, be sure to  
move the front passenger’s seat as far  
back as possible.  
65D203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-28  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat  
Belts (Child Restraint with No Top  
Strap)  
NOTE:  
There are two types of lap-shoulder belts  
depending on the vehicle’s specification,  
A-ELR (Automatic-Emergency Locking  
Retractor) type and ELR (Emergency  
Locking Retractor) type.  
The A-ELR type belts have emergency  
locking retractors (ELRs) that can be tem-  
porarily converted to function as automatic  
locking retractors (ALRs).  
The ELR type belts have ELRs that can  
not be converted to function as ALRs.  
65D607  
65D608  
WARNING  
To identify the belt is the A-ELR type or the  
ELR type, slowly pull all of the shoulder  
webbing out of the retractor. Then let the  
webbing retract a little and pull it out, and  
repeat this a few times. If the belt is locked  
each time you pull the belt, the belt is the  
A-ELR type. If the belt is not locked, the  
belt is the ELR type.  
Do not install a rear-facing child  
restraint in the front passenger’s  
seat. If the passenger’s air bag  
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child  
restraint could be seriously injured.  
The back of  
a
rear-facing child  
restraint would be too close to the  
inflating air bag.  
Mostly, rear outboard lap-shoulder belts  
are the A-ELR type.  
Please note that the methods to secure the  
child restraint system with the ELR lap-  
shoulder belt and with the A-ELR lap-  
shoulder belt are different.  
65D609  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-29  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
A-ELR type belt  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
CAUTION  
Before installing a child restraint sys-  
tem in the rear seat, raise the head  
restraint to the most upper position.  
ELR type belt  
EXAMPLE  
83E035  
83E031  
1) Pull all of the remaining webbing out of  
the retractor. You will hear a click, which  
means that the emergency locking  
retractor (ELR) has converted to func-  
tion as an automatic locking retractor  
(ALR).  
Install your child restraint system accord-  
ing to the instructions provided by the child  
restraint system manufacturer. If you install  
the child restraint system in the front seat,  
be sure to slide the seat to the rearmost  
position. After making sure that the seat  
belt is securely latched:  
65D233  
Install your child restraint system accord-  
ing to the instructions provided by the child  
restraint system manufacturer.  
Make sure that the seat belt is securely  
latched.  
Try to move the child restraint system in all  
directions, to make sure it is securely  
installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-30  
BEFORE DRIVING  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
Move to check  
83E032  
83E036  
65D234  
2) Allow the extra webbing to retract, and  
pull the webbing toward the retractor to  
take up any slack. Make sure that the  
lap portion of the belt is tight around the  
child restraint system and the shoulder  
portion of the belt is positioned so that it  
can not interfere with the child’s head or  
neck.  
3) Make sure that the retractor has con-  
verted to the ALR mode by trying to pull  
webbing out of the retractor. If the  
retractor is in the ALR mode, the belt  
will be locked.  
A-ELR type  
EXAMPLE  
Pull to tighten  
WARNING  
If the retractor is not in the ALR  
mode, the child restraint system can  
move or tip over when your vehicle  
turns or stops abruptly.  
65D235  
4) Try moving the child restraint system in  
all directions, to make sure it is securely  
installed. If you need to tighten the belt,  
pull more webbing toward the retractor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-31  
BEFORE DRIVING  
To revert from ALR to ELR  
EXAMPLE  
and Tethers for Children.) The anchors are  
located where the rear of the seat cushion  
meets the bottom of the seatback.  
Installation with the LATCH System  
Install a LATCH-type child restraint system  
according to the instructions provided by  
the child restraint system manufacturer.  
After installing the child restraint system,  
try moving it in all directions, especially for-  
ward, to make sure the flexible straps or  
rigid connecting bars are securely latched  
to the anchors.  
NOTE:  
Rigid lower connecting  
bar type  
Flexible lower connecting  
strap type  
Although there are three second row seat-  
ing positions, you cannot install three  
LATCH type child restraints in the rear  
seat. You can install one or two LATCH  
restraint(s). Be sure to install the LATCH  
type child restraint(s) in the outboard seat-  
ing positions.  
65D267  
66J162  
When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow  
it to retract to a certain length, the retractor  
will automatically revert back to the normal  
ELR mode.  
Rear seat  
If your LATCH restraint has flexible lower  
connecting straps, these general instruc-  
tions apply:  
1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward  
for easier installation.  
2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat.  
64J027  
Your vehicle is equipped with lower  
anchors for securing up to two standard  
LATCH-type child restraints in the rear  
seats. (LATCH stands for Lower Anchors  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-32  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
EXAMPLE  
owner’s manual. Attach the top tether  
strap, if applicable.  
If your LATCH restraint has rigid lower con-  
necting bars, these general instructions  
apply:  
1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward  
for easier installation.  
EXAMPLE  
2) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,  
inserting the connecting bars through  
the slots in the seat cushion or the slots  
in the seatback bottom.  
EXAMPLE  
65D340  
3) Snap the strap hooks to the anchors.  
Take care not to pinch your fingers.  
65D342  
5) Make sure the child restraint is securely  
fastened by trying to move the child  
restraint system in all directions, espe-  
cially forward.  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
54G183  
The seatback should always be  
securely latched in a fairly upright  
position when any type of child seat  
is installed. An unlatched or reclined  
seatback will reduce the intended  
effectiveness of the child restraint  
system.  
3) Use your hands to carefully align the  
connecting bar tips with the anchors.  
Take care not to pinch your fingers.  
65D341  
4) Return the seatback to the normal,  
upright position. Tighten the lower  
straps as described in the child restraint  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-33  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Installation-Child Restraint with Top  
Strap  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
Rear seat  
EXAMPLE  
54G184  
54G185  
4) Push the child restraint toward the  
anchors so that the connecting bar tips  
are partially hooked to the anchors.  
Use your hands to confirm the position.  
5) Grasp the front of the child restraint and  
push the child restraint forcefully to  
latch the connecting bars. Make sure  
they are securely latched by trying to  
move the child restraint system in all  
directions, especially forward.  
64J029  
Some child restraint systems require the  
use of a top strap. Top strap anchor brack-  
ets are located on the back of the rear seat  
as shown in the illustration. Install the child  
restraint system as follows:  
6) Return the seatback if folded. Attach  
the top tether strap, if applicable.  
1) Remove the luggage compartment  
cover.  
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear  
seat using the procedure described  
above for securing a restraint system  
that does not require a top strap.  
3) Hook the top strap to the anchor  
bracket and tighten the top strap  
according to the instructions provided  
by the child restraint system manufac-  
turer. Be sure to attach the top strap to  
the corresponding anchor located  
directly behind the child restraint. Do  
WARNING  
The seatback should always be  
securely latched in a fairly upright  
position when any type of child seat  
is installed. An unlatched or reclined  
seatback will reduce the intended  
effectiveness of the child restraint  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-34  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
not attach the top strap to the luggage  
restraint loops (if equipped).  
how to raise or lower the head  
restraint.)  
5) Make sure that cargo does not interfere  
with routing of the top strap.  
other adjustable seats should be adjusted  
as far back as possible), your dealer can  
select the appropriate seat belt extender.  
WARNING  
• A seat belt extender should only be used  
for the person, vehicle and seating loca-  
tion it was provided for.  
Do not attach the child restraint top  
strap to the luggage restraint loops  
(if equipped). Incorrectly attached top  
strap will reduce the intended effec-  
tiveness of the child restraint system.  
Seat Belt Extender  
• When using the extender, ensure that  
both ends are latched securely. Do not  
use the extender if the open end of the  
extender’s buckle is within 152 mm (6  
inches) of the center of the occupant’s  
body (See diagram). Use of the extender  
when the buckle is too close to the cen-  
ter of the body could increase the risk of  
abdominal injury in the event of an acci-  
dent, and could cause the shoulder belt  
to be positioned incorrectly.  
Type 1  
• Make sure to use the correct buckle cor-  
responding to your seating position.  
• Seat belt extenders are not intended for  
use by pregnant women, and should  
only be used upon approval by their  
medical advisors.  
65D613  
(1) Center of body  
(2) Less than 152 mm (6 inches)  
(3) Open end of extender buckle  
Type 2  
• Remove and stow the extender when it  
is not being used.  
If a seat belt cannot be fastened securely  
because it is not long enough, see your  
authorized SUZUKI dealer for a seat belt  
extender. Seat belt extenders are available  
for each seating position except for the  
rear center position. After inspecting the  
relationship between the seat belt length,  
the occupant’s body size, and the seat  
adjustment (the driver’s seat should always  
be adjusted as far back as possible while  
still maintaining control of the vehicle, and  
86G032  
4) When routing the top strap, be sure to  
pass it between the head restraint and  
the rear seatback as shown. (Refer to  
“Head Restraints” section for details on  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-35  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
sensors and the electronic controller of the  
air bag system also control the seat belt  
pretensioners. The pretensioners are trig-  
gered only when the air bags are triggered  
and the seat belts are fastened. If the seat  
belts are not fastened, the respective pre-  
tensioner system will not be activated. For  
precautions and general information  
including servicing the pretensioner sys-  
tem, refer to the “Supplemental Restraint  
System (air bags)” section in addition to  
this “Seat Belt Pretensioner System” sec-  
tion, and follow all those precautions.  
Seat Belt Pretensioner System  
(for front seat belt only)  
WARNING  
Failure to follow these instructions  
may increase the risk of injury in a  
crash.  
• Only use an extender for the per-  
son, vehicle and seating position it  
was provided for.  
• Do not use if open end of  
extender’s buckle is within 152 mm  
(6 inches) of center of occupant’s  
body (See diagram).  
• Remove and stow the extender  
when it is not being used.  
The pretensioner is located in each front  
seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-  
ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-  
pant’s body more snugly in the event of a  
frontal crash. The retractors will remain  
locked after the pretensioners are acti-  
vated. Upon activation, some noise will  
occur and some smoke may be released.  
These conditions are not harmful and do  
not indicate a fire in the vehicle.  
52D011  
WARNING  
This section of the owner’s manual  
describes your SUZUKI’s SEAT BELT  
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please  
read and follow ALL these instruc-  
tions carefully to minimize your risk  
of severe injury or death.  
The driver and all passengers must be  
properly restrained by wearing seat belts  
at all times, whether or not a pretensioner  
is equipped at their seating position, to  
minimize the risk of severe injury or death  
in the event of a crash. Sit fully back in the  
seat; sit up straight; do not lean forward or  
sideways. Adjust the belt so the lap portion  
of the belt is worn low across the pelvis,  
not across the waist. Please refer to the  
“Seat Adjustment” section and the instruc-  
tions and precautions about the seat belts  
Your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt  
pretensioner system at the front seating  
positions. You can use the pretensioner  
seat belts in the same manner as ordinary  
seat belts.  
The seat belt pretensioner system works  
with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM (advanced air bags). The crash  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-36  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
in this “Seat Belts and Child Restraint Sys-  
tems” section for details on proper seat  
and seat belt adjustments.  
tery is disconnected and the ignition switch  
has been in the “LOCK” position for at least  
90 seconds before performing any electri-  
cal service work on your SUZUKI. Do not  
touch pretensioner system components or  
wiring. The wires are wrapped with yellow  
tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are  
yellow. When scrapping your SUZUKI, ask  
your SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop or  
scrap yard for assistance.  
Supplemental Restraint  
System (air bags)  
Please note that the pretensioners along  
with the front air bags will activate only in  
severe frontal collisions. They are not  
designed to activate in rear impacts, side  
impacts, rollovers or minor frontal colli-  
sions. The pretensioners can be activated  
only once. If the pretensioners are acti-  
vated (that is, if the front air bags are acti-  
vated), have the pretensioner system  
serviced by an authorized SUZUKI dealer  
as soon as possible.  
EXAMPLE  
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument  
cluster does not blink or come on briefly  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, stays on for more than 10  
seconds, or comes on while driving, the  
pretensioner system or the air bag system  
may not work properly. Have both systems  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer  
as soon as possible.  
54G022  
WARNING  
This section of the owner’s manual  
describes the protection provided by  
your  
SUZUKI’s  
SUPPLEMENTAL  
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).  
Please read and follow ALL these  
instructions carefully to minimize  
your risk of severe injury or death in  
the event of a collision.  
Service on or around the pretensioner sys-  
tem components or wiring must be per-  
formed only by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer who is specially trained. Improper  
service could result in unintended activa-  
tion of pretensioners or could render the  
pretensioner inoperative. Either of these  
two conditions may result in personal  
injury.  
Your vehicle has advanced front air bags  
and side air bags for the driver and right  
front passenger. Your vehicle also has side  
curtain air bags.  
To prevent damage or unintended activa-  
tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-37  
   
BEFORE DRIVING  
9
7
1
2
11  
8
3
10  
4
66J132  
6
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-  
mental Restraint System consisting of the  
following components in addition to a lap-  
shoulder belt at each front seating position.  
8
5
3
1. Driver’s front air bag  
2. Front passenger’s front air bag  
3. Seat belt pretensioners  
4. Air bag controller  
10  
5. Occupant classification module  
6. “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator  
7. Forward crash sensor  
8. Side air bags  
66J126  
9. Side curtain air bags  
10. Side crash sensor  
11. Front passenger’s sensor mat  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-38  
BEFORE DRIVING  
air bag. The front passenger’s front air bag  
is located behind the passenger’s side of  
the dashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG”  
are molded into the air bag cover to identify  
the location of the air bag.  
Front Air Bags  
EXAMPLE  
Frontal collision range  
63J030  
If the “AIR BAG” light on the instrument  
cluster does not blink when the ignition  
switch is first turned to the “ON” position,  
or the “AIR BAG” light stays on, or comes  
on while driving, the air bag system (or the  
seat belt pretensioner system) may not  
work properly. Have the air bag system  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer  
as soon as possible.  
63J259  
EXAMPLE  
60G032  
Front air bags are designed to inflate only  
in severe frontal collisions.  
64J032  
The driver’s front air bag is located behind  
the center pad of the steering wheel. The  
words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the  
air bag cover to identify the location of the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-39  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
Front air bags will not inflate  
They are not designed to inflate in rear  
impacts, side impacts, rollovers or minor  
frontal collisions, since they would offer no  
protection in those types of accidents.  
Remember, since air bags deploy only one  
time during an accident, seat belts are  
needed to restrain occupants from further  
movements during the accident.  
Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air  
Bags  
EXAMPLE  
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute  
for seat belts. To maximize your protection,  
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be  
aware that no system can prevent all pos-  
sible injuries that may occur in an accident.  
65D236  
WARNING  
Front air bags will probably not inflate  
62J114  
An air bag supplements, or adds to,  
the crash protection offered by seat  
belts. The driver and all passengers  
must be properly restrained by wear-  
ing seat belts at all times, whether or  
not air bags are mounted at their  
seating position, to minimize the risk  
of severe injury or death in the event  
of a crash.  
Your vehicle has “dual stage” front air  
bags, which adjust the air bag inflation  
force according to crash severity. Also,  
your vehicle has a front passenger sensing  
system, which turns off the front passen-  
ger’s air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
under certain conditions.  
65D237  
64J033  
Side air bags are located in the part of the  
front seatbacks closest to the doors. The  
words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-40  
 
BEFORE DRIVING  
side air bag cover to identify the location of  
the side air bags.  
Side collision range  
Side air bags and side curtain air bags  
will probably not inflate  
64J036  
54G028  
Side air bags and side curtain air bags  
will not inflate  
64J034  
Side air bags and side curtain air bags are  
designed to inflate only in severe side  
impact collisions. They are not designed to  
inflate in frontal or rear collisions, rollovers  
or minor side collisions, since they would  
offer no protection in those types of acci-  
dents. Only the side air bag and side cur-  
tain air bag on the side of the vehicle that  
is struck will inflate. Remember, since an  
air bag deploys only one time during an  
accident, seat belts are needed to restrain  
occupants from further movements during  
the accident.  
Side curtain air bags are located in the roof  
lining. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are  
molded into the pillar to identify the loca-  
tion of the side curtain air bags.  
Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute  
for seat belts. To maximize your protection,  
ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be  
aware that no system can prevent all pos-  
sible injuries that may occur in an accident.  
54G027  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-41  
BEFORE DRIVING  
let you know the system is working. When  
the front passenger sensing system has  
turned off the front passenger’s front air  
bag including the seat belt pretensioner,  
the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will  
come on and stay on to remind you that  
the front passenger’s front air bag is off.  
Front Passenger Sensing System  
The front passenger sensing system will  
turn off the front passenger’s front air bag  
and seat belt pretensioner under certain  
conditions. This system works using a sen-  
sor mat that is part of the front passenger’s  
seat. The front passenger sensing system  
is designed to detect whether an occupant  
is present in the seat and, if an occupant is  
present, to determine whether the front  
passenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-  
tensioner should be enabled or disabled  
(turned off).  
WARNING  
An air bag supplements, or adds to,  
the crash protection offered by seat  
belts. The driver and all passengers  
must be properly restrained by wear-  
ing seat belts at all times, whether or  
not air bags are mounted at their  
seating position, to minimize the risk  
of severe injury or death in the event  
of a crash.  
The front passenger sensing system uses  
front seat pressure measurements and  
pressure locations to determine whether to  
activate or deactivate the front passenger’s  
front air bag. The front passenger sensing  
system may or may not turn off the front air  
bag, depending on the front passenger’s  
seating posture and body build. The air  
bag should be turned off in the following  
situations:  
• There is no occupant in the front pas-  
senger seat.  
• The occupant of the front passenger  
seat lifts his or her weight off of the seat  
for a period of time.  
WARNING  
NOTE:  
If the “AIR BAG” light in the instru-  
ment cluster ever comes on and  
stays on, it means that something  
may be wrong with the air bag sys-  
tem. If this ever happens, have the  
The front passenger’s side air bag and the  
side curtain air bag are not controlled by  
the front passenger sensing system.  
vehicle  
serviced  
immediately,  
because the air bags may not offer  
the protection for which they were  
designed.  
• The occupant of the front passenger  
seat is an infant or small child in a child  
restraint system or a small child in a  
booster seat.  
• A smaller person, such as a child who  
has outgrown child restraints or a very  
small adolescent is seated in the front  
passenger seat.  
NOTE:  
66J244  
If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,  
the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will not  
come on but the front passenger’s front air  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”  
indicator comes on for several seconds to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-42  
BEFORE DRIVING  
bag will not deploy and the seat belt pre-  
tensioner will not operate.  
front air bag when the system senses a  
properly-seated adult in the front passen-  
ger’s seat. When the passenger sensing  
system has allowed the air bag to be  
enabled, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indica-  
tor will remain off to remind you that the air  
bag is active.  
If you have secured a child in the front pas-  
senger seat in a forward-facing child  
restraint system or booster seat and the  
PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not  
on, turn the vehicle off, remove the child  
restraint or booster seat from the vehicle  
and reinstall it following the child restraint  
or booster seat manufacturer’s directions.  
Also refer to “Seat Belts and Child  
Restraint Systems” in this section. If, after  
reinstalling the child restraint and restart-  
ing the vehicle, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”  
indicator is still not lit, check to make sure  
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing  
the child restraint into the seat cushion. If  
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s  
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if  
possible. Also make sure the child restraint  
is not trapped under the vehicle head  
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head  
restraint. If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indi-  
cator is still not on, secure the child in the  
child restraint or booster seat in a rear seat  
position in the vehicle and check with your  
dealer.  
If a person of adult size is sitting in the  
front passenger’s seat and the “PASS AIR  
BAG OFF” indicator comes on, it could be  
because that person isn’t sitting properly in  
the seat. If this happens, unfasten the seat  
belts, sit upright in the center of the seat  
with the seatback nearly vertical and your  
legs outstretched, and refasten the seat  
belt.  
65D607  
WARNING  
Do not install a rear-facing child  
restraint in the front passenger’s  
seat. If the passenger’s front air bag  
inflates, a child in a rear-facing child  
restraint could be seriously injured.  
rear-facing child  
restraint would be too close to the  
inflating air bag.  
The back of  
a
According to accident statistics, children  
are safer when properly restrained in rear  
seating positions than in front seating posi-  
tions. Whenever possible, SUZUKI recom-  
mends you install child restraints in the  
rear seat.  
52D258  
When seated as shown in the above illus-  
tration, the front passenger sensing sys-  
tem senses a properly-seated occupant  
and enables the air bag.  
The front passenger sensing system is  
designed to enable the front passenger’s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-43  
BEFORE DRIVING  
How the System Works  
When using a seat belt extender, follow the  
instructions in the “Seat Belt Extender”  
section.  
In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will  
detect rapid deceleration and send a signal  
to the controller. If the controller judges  
that the deceleration represents a severe  
frontal crash, the controller will trigger the  
inflators. The controller also judges:  
• Whether the front air bags should deploy  
at reduced power or at full power accord-  
ing to crash severity.  
WARNING  
• Do not spill any liquids on the seat.  
Liquids can damage the sensors  
under the front seat.  
• Have front passenger’s sensor mat  
inspected by your dealer after a  
collision.  
• Do not replace the front seats. If  
you replace them, the air bags and  
front passenger sensing system  
may not work properly.  
• Do not use a seat cover. If you use  
a seat cover, the front passenger  
sensing system may not work prop-  
erly.  
WARNING  
Do not place any heavy objects on  
the front passenger’s seat. The pres-  
sure sensors in the sensor mat could  
be damaged and the front passenger  
sensing system may not work prop-  
erly.  
• Whether the front passenger’s front air  
bag should deploy or not based on clas-  
sification of the occupant of the front  
passenger’s seat.  
WARNING  
Since your vehicle is equipped with side air  
bags, and side curtain air bags, crash sen-  
sors will detect a side collision, and if the  
controller judges that the side collision is  
severe enough, it will trigger the side air  
bag and side curtain air bag inflators.  
The front passenger sensing system  
may not work properly in the follow-  
ing situations:  
• The occupant is sitting near the  
dashboard or is not sitting in the  
proper position.  
• Objects placed under the seat are  
pushing up on the seat cushion.  
The inflators inflate the appropriate air  
bags with nitrogen or argon gas. The  
inflated air bags provide a cushion for your  
head (front air bags and side curtain air  
bags only) and upper body. The air bag  
inflates and deflates so quickly that you  
may not even realize that it has activated.  
The air bag will neither hinder your view  
nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.  
WARNING  
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator  
on the instrument panel turns on  
even though there is no occupant or  
an adult occupant in the front pas-  
senger’s seat, it means that some-  
thing may be wrong with the  
passenger sensing system. Have the  
system inspected by an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully  
in order to reduce the chance of serious or  
fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable  
consequence of the quick inflation is that  
the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-44  
BEFORE DRIVING  
the facial area against a front air bag. Also,  
upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and  
some powder and smoke will be released.  
These conditions are not harmful and do  
not indicate a fire in the car. Be aware,  
however, that some air bag components  
may be hot for a while after inflation.  
WARNING  
• The driver should not lean over the  
steering wheel. The front passen-  
ger should not rest his or her body  
against the dashboard, or other-  
wise get too close to the dash-  
board. For vehicles with side air  
bags and side curtain air bags,  
occupants should not lean on or  
sleep against the door. In these sit-  
uations, the out-of-position occu-  
pant would be too close to an  
inflating air bag, and may suffer  
severe injury.  
• Do not attach any objects to, or  
place any objects over, the steering  
wheel or dashboard. Do not place  
any objects between the air bag  
and the driver or front passenger.  
These objects may interfere with air  
bag operation or may be propelled  
by the air bag in the event of a  
crash. Either of these conditions  
may cause severe injury.  
A seat belt helps keep you in the proper  
position for maximum protection when an  
air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far  
back as possible while still maintaining  
control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your  
seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the  
steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-  
pants should not lean on or sleep against  
the door. Please refer to the “Seat Adjust-  
ment” section and the “Seat Belts and  
Child Restraint Systems” section in the  
“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details on  
proper seat and seat belt adjustments.  
65D610  
(Continued)  
54G582  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-45  
BEFORE DRIVING  
Scrapping a car that has an undeployed air  
bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,  
body repair shop or scrap yard for help  
with disposal.  
Servicing the Air Bag System  
If the air bags inflate, have the air bags and  
related components replaced by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
• For vehicles with side air bags, do  
not place seat covers on the front  
seats, because seat covers could  
restrict the air bag’s inflation. Also,  
do not place any cup holders or  
other objects on the door, as these  
objects could be propelled by the  
air bag in the event of a crash.  
Either of these conditions may  
cause severe injury.  
If it is necessary to modify the advanced  
front air bag system to accommodate a  
person with disabilities, owners in the con-  
tinental United States can call American  
Suzuki toll-free at 1-800-934-0934, or write  
to:  
If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and  
the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag  
controller could be damaged. If this hap-  
pens, have the air bag system inspected  
by the SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.  
Special procedures are required for servic-  
ing or replacing an air bag. For that reason,  
only an authorized SUZUKI dealer should  
be allowed to service or replace your air  
bags. Please remind anyone who services  
your SUZUKI that it has air bags.  
American Suzuki Motor Corporation  
Automotive Customer Relations  
3251 East Imperial Highway  
Brea, CA 92821-6795  
Note that even though your vehicle may be  
moderately damaged in a collision, the col-  
lision may not have been severe enough to  
trigger the front, side, or side curtain air  
bags to inflate. If your car sustains ANY  
front-end or side damage, have the air bag  
system inspected by an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in proper  
working order.  
If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada  
please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-  
tomer Relations Department by telephone  
at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in  
writing at:  
Service on or around air bag components  
or wiring must be performed only by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-  
vice could result in unintended air bag  
deployment or could render the air bags  
inoperative. Either of these two conditions  
may result in severe injury.  
Suzuki Canada Inc.  
Customer Relations  
100 East Beaver Creek Road  
Richmond Hill, On  
L4B 1J6  
To prevent damage or unintended inflation  
of the air bag system, be sure the battery  
is disconnected and the ignition switch has  
been in the “LOCK” position for at least 90  
seconds before performing any electrical  
service work on your SUZUKI. Do not  
touch air bag system components or wires.  
The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or  
yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow  
for easy identification.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic  
module which records information about  
the air bag system if the air bags deploy in  
a crash. The module records information  
about overall system status, which sensors  
activated the deployment, and whether the  
front seat belts were in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-46  
BEFORE DRIVING  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-47  
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
Ignition Switch ..................................................................... 3-1  
Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever ................................... 3-5  
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 3-8  
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch .................................. 3-9  
Tilt Steering Lock Lever ..................................................... 3-10  
Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-10  
Remote Audio Controls (if equipped) ............................... 3-12  
Horn ...................................................................................... 3-12  
3
60G405  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
Manual transmission  
Ignition Switch  
Vehicle Without Keyless Start Sys-  
tem  
EXAMPLE  
Push  
Turn to “LOCK”  
65D611  
60A055  
Manual transmission vehicles  
WARNING  
You must push in the key to turn it to the  
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and  
prevents normal use of the steering  
wheel after the key is removed.  
To avoid possible injury, do not oper-  
ate controls by reaching through the  
steering wheel.  
60B041  
The ignition switch has the following four  
positions:  
Automatic transmission vehicles  
The gearshift lever must be in the “P”  
(Park) position to turn the key to the  
“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and  
prevents normal use of the steering  
wheel and gearshift lever.  
LOCK  
This is the normal parking position. It is the  
only position in which the key can be  
removed.  
It locks the ignition, and prevents normal  
use of the steering wheel after the key is  
removed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1  
     
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
ACC  
Vehicle With Keyless Start System  
Accessories such as the radio can oper-  
ate, but the engine is off.  
(3)  
ON  
(4)  
(2)  
This is the normal operating position. All  
electrical systems are on.  
START  
This is the position for starting the engine  
using the starter motor. The key should be  
released from this position as soon as the  
engine starts.  
(1)  
EXAMPLE  
66J022  
Ignition key reminder (if equipped)  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the  
ignition switch when the driver’s door is  
opened.  
63J270  
If the keyless start system blue indicator  
light illuminates on the instrument cluster,  
you can turn the ignition switch. If the red  
indicator light illuminates, you can not turn  
the ignition switch.  
The ignition switch can be operated with-  
out using an ignition key when the remote  
controller is in an area of the vehicle other  
than the rear luggage area. To turn the  
ignition switch, first push in the switch.  
NOTE:  
• The ignition switch can be turned to the  
“ACC” position when the keyless start  
system blue indicator light illuminates.  
The blue indicator light will illuminate for  
several seconds when you push in the  
ignition switch and then will turn off to  
protect the system. In this case, you  
must release the ignition switch and  
push it in again to illuminate the blue  
indicator light.  
NOTE:  
You must push in the ignition switch to turn  
it from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”  
position. To return to the “LOCK” position  
from the “ACC” position, turn the ignition  
switch counterclockwise while pushing in  
the switch.  
• If the keyless start system red indicator  
light illuminates, the remote controller  
may not be in the vehicle or the battery  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2  
 
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
of the remote controller may be unreli-  
able.  
The ignition switch has the following four  
positions:  
START (4)  
This is the position for starting the engine  
using the starter motor. The switch should  
be released from this position as soon as  
the engine starts.  
NOTE:  
LOCK (1)  
• If the battery of the remote controller  
runs down or there are strong radio  
waves or noise, the operating range may  
be narrower or the remote controller may  
be inoperative.  
This is the normal parking position. It is the  
only position in which the key can be  
removed. It locks the ignition, and prevents  
normal use of the steering wheel.  
Ignition switch reminder  
(When using the keyless start system)  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to return the ignition switch to the  
“LOCK” position if it is in the “ACC” position  
when the driver’s door is opened.  
For vehicles with an automatic transmis-  
sion, the gearshift lever must be in the “P”  
(Park) position to turn the key to the  
“LOCK” position.  
• If the remote controller is too close to the  
door glass, it may not operate.  
• The ignition switch may not turn when  
the remote controller is on the instru-  
ment panel, in the glove box, in the door  
Ignition key reminder  
To release the steering lock, turn the igni-  
tion switch clockwise to one of the other  
positions. If you have trouble turning the  
ignition switch to unlock the steering, try  
turning the steering wheel slightly to the  
right or left while turning the switch.  
(When using the ignition key)  
A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind  
you to remove the ignition key if it is in the  
ignition switch when the driver’s door is  
opened.  
CAUTION  
The remote controller is a sensitive  
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-  
aging the remote controller:  
• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-  
ture or high temperature such as by  
leaving it on the dashboard under  
direct sunlight.  
• Keep the remote controller away  
from magnetic objects such as a  
television.  
NOTE:  
You must push the ignition switch in to turn  
it to the “ACC” position. Also you must  
push the ignition switch in to return it to the  
“LOCK” position.  
ACC (2)  
Accessories such as the radio can oper-  
ate, but the engine is off.  
You can also turn the ignition switch by  
inserting the ignition key into the slot.  
ON (3)  
This is the normal operating position. All  
electrical systems are on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
(1)  
• For manual transmission vehicles,  
never return the ignition switch to  
the “LOCK” position and remove  
the ignition key while the vehicle is  
moving. The steering wheel will  
lock and you will not be able to  
steer the vehicle.  
• Always carry the ignition key and  
the remote controller (if equipped)  
when leaving the vehicle even if for  
a short time. Also do not leave chil-  
dren or pets alone in a parked vehi-  
cle. Unattended children could  
cause accidental movement of the  
vehicle or could tamper with power  
windows or a power sunroof. Chil-  
dren or pets could also suffer from  
heatstroke in warm or hot weather,  
which could result in severe injury  
or even death.  
• Do not turn the starter motor for  
more than 15 seconds at a time. If  
the engine does not start, wait 15  
seconds before trying again. If the  
engine does not start after several  
attempts, check the fuel and igni-  
tion systems or consult your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
• Do not leave the ignition switch in  
the “ON” position if the engine is  
not running or the battery will dis-  
charge.  
64J216  
If the gearshift lever can not be shifted out  
of “P” (Park) in the normal way, removing  
the cover (1) and pushing the release but-  
ton using a key or some other flat end  
object with the key in the “ON” or “ACC”  
position will permit movement of the gear-  
shift lever out of “P” (see “If You Can Not  
Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift  
Lever Out of “P” (PARK)” in the INDEX).  
The gearshift lever can be moved back to  
“P” without pushing the release button.  
To release the steering lock, insert the key  
or use the keyless start system and turn  
the ignition switch clockwise to one of the  
other positions. If you have trouble turning  
the key to unlock the steering, try turning  
the steering wheel slightly to the right or  
left while turning the key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
E/G: Engine  
Lighting/Turn Signal Control  
Lever  
IG: Ignition switch  
ON: Lights ON  
LIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).  
DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).  
(4)  
IG OFF  
IG ON  
E/G RUNNING  
LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK  
(3)  
Lighting  
Main lights to  
be operated  
switch  
E/G OFF  
E/G OFF  
position  
D.R.L.  
ON  
ON  
Parking lights,  
Tail lights  
(1) OFF  
(1)  
(2)  
Head lights  
D.R.L.  
ON  
ON  
66J023  
Parking lights,  
Tail lights  
(2) Middle  
(3) Third  
(4) AUTO  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Head lights  
D.R.L.  
Parking lights,  
Tail lights  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
52D166  
Head lights  
D.R.L.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlled  
by three main systems: the Lighting switch,  
the Auto-On Headlight System (when the  
lighting switch is in the “AUTO” position)  
and the Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)  
system.  
Parking lights,  
Tail lights  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Head lights  
The three systems work together to oper-  
ate your lights as shown in the following  
chart:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
   
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
Auto-On Headlight System  
Lighting Operation  
HIGH  
LOW  
(4)  
(3)  
(5)  
PASS  
(2)  
(1)  
66J025  
66J024  
66J026  
With the headlights on, push the lever for-  
ward to switch to the high beams or pull  
the lever toward you to switch to the low  
beams. When the high beams are on, a  
light on the instrument panel will come on.  
To momentarily activate the high beams as  
a passing signal, pull the lever slightly  
toward you and release it when you have  
completed the signal.  
This control lever is located on the out-  
board side of the steering column. Operate  
the lever as described below.  
The Auto-on headlight system automati-  
cally turns on all lights that are operated by  
the lighting control lever on the steering  
column, when the following four conditions  
are all met.  
To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob  
on the end of the lever. There are four posi-  
tions: in the “OFF” (1) position all lights are  
off; in the second (2) position the front  
parking lights, tail-lights, license plate light  
and instrument lights are on, but the head-  
lights are off; in the third (3) position the  
headlights come on in addition to the other  
lights; in the “AUTO” (4) position, refer to  
“Auto-On Headlight System” for details.  
Conditions for Auto-on headlight system  
operation:  
1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).  
2) The lighting control lever in the “AUTO”  
position.  
3) The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
4) The parking brake is released.  
This system is operated by the signal from  
the light sensor (5) on the right end of the  
instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor  
(5). If you do, the system will not work cor-  
rectly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
   
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
WARNING  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)  
System  
Turn Signal Operation  
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-  
tion, move the lever up or down to activate  
the right or left turn signals.  
The headlights light, but are dimmer than  
the low beam, when the following three  
conditions are all met. Also, the D.R.L. indi-  
cator light on the instrument panel comes  
on.  
It takes about 5 seconds for the light  
sensor to react to a change in light-  
ing conditions. To help avoid an acci-  
dent due to reduced visibility, turn on  
your headlights before driving into a  
tunnel, parking structure or the like.  
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation:  
1) The engine is running.  
2) The parking brake is released.  
3) The lighting switch is in either the “OFF”  
or the “Second” position: or The lighting  
switch is in the “AUTO” position and it is  
light around the light sensor.  
NOTE:  
This system does not react to all types of  
ambient light. As the sensor is infrared  
type, it will not work correctly with ambient  
lights that do not contain infrared rays.  
NOTE:  
Be sure to turn the lighting switch to the  
third position at night or at any time of the  
day when driving or weather conditions  
require the headlights to operate at full  
brightness and the taillights to be on.  
66J027  
Normal turn signal  
Move the lever all the way up to signal a  
right turn or all the way down to signal a  
left turn. When the turn is completed, the  
signal will cancel and the lever will return to  
its normal position.  
Lights “On” reminder  
A buzzer sounds to remind you to turn off  
the lights if they are left on when the igni-  
tion key is removed and the driver’s door is  
opened.  
Lane change signal  
In some turns, such as changing lanes, the  
steering wheel is not turned far enough to  
cancel the turn signal. For convenience,  
you can flash the turn signal by moving the  
lever part way and holding it there. The  
lever will return to its normal position when  
you release it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
     
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
Windshield Washer  
EXAMPLE  
Windshield Wiper and Washer  
Lever  
EXAMPLE  
Windshield Wipers  
EXAMPLE  
MIST  
OFF  
INT  
LO  
63J284  
63J285  
If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME”  
control, turn the control forward or rear-  
ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera-  
tion to the desired interval.  
HI  
To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the  
lever toward you. The windshield wipers  
will automatically turn on at low speed if  
they are not already on and if the “INT”  
position is equipped.  
63J283  
To turn the windshield wipers on, move the  
lever up and down to one of the four oper-  
ating positions. In the “INT” position (if  
equipped), the wipers operate intermit-  
tently. The “INT” position is very convenient  
for driving in mist or light rain. In the “LO”  
position, the wipers operate at a steady  
low speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers  
operate at a steady high speed. To turn off  
the wipers, move the lever back to the  
“OFF” position.  
WARNING  
• To prevent windshield icing in cold  
weather, turn on the defroster to  
heat the windshield before and dur-  
ing windshield washer use.  
• Do not use radiator antifreeze in  
the windshield washer reservoir. It  
can severely impair visibility when  
sprayed on the windshield, and can  
also damage your vehicle’s paint.  
Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”  
position, the windshield wipers will turn on  
continuously at low speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8  
   
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
CAUTION  
Rear Window Wiper/Washer  
Switch  
CAUTION  
To help prevent damage to wind-  
shield wiper and washer system  
components, you should take the fol-  
lowing precautions:  
• Do not continue to hold in the lever  
when there is no windshield  
washer fluid being sprayed or the  
washer motor can be damaged.  
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from  
a dry windshield with the wipers or  
you can damage the windshield  
and the wiper blades. Always wet  
the windshield with washer fluid  
before operating the wipers.  
Clear ice or snow from the rear win-  
dow and rear wiper blade before  
using the rear wiper. Accumulated ice  
or snow could prevent the wiper  
blade from moving, causing damage  
to the wiper motor.  
EXAMPLE  
Washer  
Wiper  
Intermittent wiper  
• Clear ice or packed snow from the  
wiper blades before using the wip-  
ers.  
• Check the washer fluid level regu-  
larly. Check it often when the  
weather is bad.  
• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir  
3/4 full during cold weather to allow  
room for expansion if the tempera-  
ture falls low enough to freeze the  
solution.  
63J286  
To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear  
wiper switch on the end of the lever for-  
ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle is  
equipped the “INT” position, the rear wiper  
operates intermittently when you twist the  
switch forward to the “INT” position. To turn  
the rear wiper off, twist the switch rearward  
to the “OFF” position.  
With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,  
twist the switch rearward and hold it there  
to spray window washer fluid.  
With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,  
turn the switch forward and hold it there to  
spray window washer fluid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
   
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
Tilt Steering Lock Lever  
Cruise Control (if equipped)  
UNLOCK  
LOCK  
52D113  
When you push the “ON/OFF” switch, the  
system is on and a “CRUISE” indicator  
light on the instrument cluster will be on.  
EXAMPLE  
64J037  
66J192  
The release lever is located under the  
steering column. To adjust the steering  
wheel height:  
The cruise control system allows you to  
maintain a steady speed without keeping  
your foot on the accelerator pedal. The  
controls for operating the cruise control  
system are on the steering wheel. You can  
use the cruise control system at speeds of  
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.  
65D474  
When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by  
the cruise control system, a “SET” indica-  
tor light on the instrument cluster will be  
on.  
1) Pull up the lock lever to unlock the  
steering column.  
2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired  
height and lock the steering column by  
pulling down the lock lever.  
3) Try moving the steering wheel up and  
down to make sure it is securely locked  
in position.  
WARNING  
To help avoid loss of vehicle control,  
do not use the cruise control system  
when driving in heavy traffic, on slip-  
pery or winding roads, or on steep  
downgrades.  
WARNING  
Never attempt to adjust the steering  
wheel height while the vehicle is  
moving or you could lose control of  
the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10  
       
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
To reset the cruise control to a faster  
speed, use either of the following proce-  
dures:  
To “Resume” a Previously Set  
Speed  
After canceling cruise control operation  
without turning off the “ON/OFF” switch  
(1), you can “resume” a previously set  
speed, by holding the “RES/ACC” switch  
(4) for about one second. When you  
release the switch, the vehicle will acceler-  
ate to and maintain the previously set  
speed.  
• Hold in the “RES/ACC” switch (4). Vehi-  
cle speed will steadily increase. When  
you release the switch, the new speed  
will be maintained.  
• Accelerate to the desired speed using  
the accelerator pedal and push the  
“SET/COAST” switch (3). The new  
speed will be maintained.  
(4)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
NOTE:  
If the “ON/OFF” switch (1) is turned off, the  
set speed in the memory is cleared and  
you can not use the Resume feature. In  
this case, reset your CRUISE speed.  
To Cancel  
To cancel cruise control operation, use one  
of the following procedures:  
66J193  
To Set Cruising Speed  
• Slightly depress the brake pedal or  
clutch pedal, or push the “CANCEL”  
switch (2). Cruise control operation will  
be canceled until you reset a cruising  
speed by pushing the “SET/COAST”  
switch (3) or “RES/ACC” switch (4).  
• Push the “ON/OFF” switch (1). Cruise  
control operation will be canceled until  
you turn on the system by pushing the  
“ON/OFF” switch (1) again and reset a  
cruising speed by pushing the “SET/  
COAST” switch (3).  
Turn on the cruise control system by push-  
ing the “ON/OFF” switch (1). Accelerate to  
the desired speed and push the “SET/  
COAST” switch (3). Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal and the set speed will be  
maintained.  
With the cruise control on, you can  
increase speed for passing by using the  
accelerator pedal. When you take your foot  
off the pedal, your vehicle will return to the  
set speed.  
Cruise control operation will also be can-  
celed any time the vehicle speed falls  
below 40 km/h (25 mph).  
To Change Cruising Speed  
To reset the cruise control to a slower  
speed, hold in the “SET/COAST” switch (3)  
until the vehicle has slowed to the desired  
speed, then release the switch. The new  
speed will be maintained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
You can control basic functions of the  
audio system with the switches on the  
steering wheel. For details, refer to “Audio  
Systems” in the “INSTRUMENT PANEL”  
section.  
Remote Audio Controls  
(if equipped)  
Horn  
EXAMPLE  
64J040  
Press the horn pad on the steering wheel  
to sound the horn. The horn will sound with  
the ignition switch in any position.  
66J127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12  
       
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Instrument Panel ................................................................. 4-1  
Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 4-2  
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 4-3  
A/T Selector Position Indicator (if equipped) ................... 4-11  
Speedometer/Odometer/Tripmeter/Brightness  
4
Control ................................................................................. 4-11  
Tachometer .......................................................................... 4-13  
Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 4-13  
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 4-14  
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” Indicator ........................................ 4-14  
Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 4-15  
Rear Window Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Defroster (if equipped) Switch ........................................... 4-15  
Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 4-16  
“ESP OFF” Switch ............................................................... 4-16  
Transfer Switch (if equipped) ............................................. 4-17  
Glove Box ............................................................................ 4-17  
Information Display ............................................................. 4-17  
Theft Deterrent Light ........................................................... 4-21  
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System  
60G406  
(Climate Control) ................................................................. 4-21  
Audio Systems .................................................................... 4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Instrument Panel  
EXAMPLE  
1. Instrument cluster  
2. Ignition switch  
3. Lighting switch/Turn signal and dim-  
mer switch  
4. Windshield wiper and washer switch/  
Rear window wiper and washer  
switch  
11  
3 12  
1
4
8
9
10  
14  
12 11  
5. Hazard warning switch  
6. Other switches (if equipped)  
7. Heater control panel/Climate control  
panel  
8. Audio system (if equipped)  
9. Information display  
10. Center ventilator  
11. Side ventilator  
12. Side defroster  
13. Glove box  
14. Passenger’s air bag  
15. Fuse box  
16. Hood release  
6 15 16  
2
7
17 19 18  
5
13  
17. Transfer switch (if equipped)  
18. “ESP OFF” switch  
19. “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator/Front  
passenger’s seat belt reminder light  
66J245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
   
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Instrument Cluster  
1. Speedometer  
EXAMPLE  
2. Odometer/Tripmeter  
3. Odometer/Tripmeter selector and  
meter illumination cancel knob  
4. Tachometer  
4
1
5
5. Fuel gauge  
6. Temperature gauge  
7. Warning and indicator lights  
7
2
3
7
6
66J212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2  
   
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
For details about the seat belt reminder,  
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint  
Systems” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sec-  
tion.  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light  
Warning and Indicator Lights  
Front Passenger’s Seat Belt  
Reminder Light  
WARNING  
It is absolutely essential that the  
driver and passengers wear their seat  
belts at all times. Persons who are  
not wearing seat belts have a much  
greater risk of injury if an accident  
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-  
ling your seat belt before putting the  
key in the ignition.  
52D305  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle  
has been equipped with a tire pressure  
monitoring system (TPMS) that uses a low  
tire pressure warning light to inform you  
when one or more of your tires is signifi-  
cantly under-inflated.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-  
ing light comes on briefly so you can check  
that the light is working.  
66J246  
The front passenger’s seat belt reminder  
light is located in the center of the instru-  
ment panel. If there is a passenger in the  
front seat and the front passenger’s seat  
belt is unbuckled about 10 seconds after  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position, this light will come on and then  
blink. When the light comes on, a buzzer  
will also sound intermittently for about 6  
seconds. The reminder will repeat several  
times under certain conditions until the  
front passenger’s seat belt is buckled. After  
repeating several times, the reminder will  
be canceled even if the front passenger’s  
seat belt remains unbuckled.  
When the low tire pressure warning light is  
lit, one or more of your tires is significantly  
under-inflated. You should stop and check  
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate  
them to the proper pressure as indicated  
on the vehicle’s tire information placard.  
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire  
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to  
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces  
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may  
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping  
ability. Each tire, including the spare,  
should be checked at least once a month  
when cold and set to the recommended  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
WARNING  
inflation pressure as specified in the vehi-  
cle placard and owner’s manual.  
WARNING  
The low tire pressure warning light is also  
used to inform you of a TPMS malfunction.  
When the system detects a malfunction,  
this light will flash for approximately one  
minute and then remain continuously illu-  
minated. This sequence will be repeated  
approximately ten minutes after subse-  
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-  
function exists.  
The load rating of your tires is  
reduced at lower inflation pressures.  
If your tires become even moderately  
under-inflated, the vehicle load may  
exceed the load rating of the tires,  
which can lead to tire failure. The low  
tire pressure warning light will not  
alert you of this condition. The warn-  
ing light will only come on when one  
or more of your tires become signifi-  
cantly under-inflated. Check and  
adjust your tire inflation pressure at  
least once a month. Refer to “Tires”  
in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-  
NANCE” section.  
(Continued)  
• If one or more of your tires is  
under-inflated, adjust the inflation  
pressure in all of your tires to the  
recommended inflation pressure as  
soon as possible.  
Be aware that driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire can cause  
the tire to overheat and can lead to  
tire failure, and may affect steering  
control and brake effectiveness. This  
could lead to an accident, resulting in  
severe injury or death.  
NOTE:  
The low tire pressure warning light may not  
come on immediately if you have a sudden  
loss of air pressure.  
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”  
in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion for additional details on the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system. Refer to “Tires” in  
the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for information on maintaining  
proper tire pressure.  
WARNING  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
does not come on when the ignition  
is turned to the “ON” position, or  
comes on and blinks while driving  
there may be a problem with the tire  
pressure monitoring system. Have  
your vehicle inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the light  
turns off after blinking, indicating  
that the monitoring system has  
recovered, make sure to have an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer check the  
system.  
WARNING  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
comes on and stays on, reduce your  
speed and avoid abrupt steering and  
braking. Stop in a safe place as soon  
as possible and check your tires.  
• If you have a flat tire, replace it with  
the spare tire. Refer to “Jacking  
Instructions” in the “EMERGENCY  
SERVICE”  
section.  
Refer  
to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”  
for instructions on how to restore  
normal operation of the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system after you  
have had a flat tire.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
3) If you determine that it is safe, drive  
cautiously at low speed to the nearest  
dealer for repairs,  
Brake System Warning Light  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
Warning Light  
or  
4) Have the vehicle towed to the nearest  
dealer for repairs.  
WARNING  
65D477  
If any of the following conditions  
occur, you should immediately ask  
your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the  
brake system.  
65D529  
This light comes on briefly when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.  
The light also comes on under the follow-  
ing conditions: 1) when the parking brake  
is engaged, and 2) when the fluid in the  
brake fluid reservoir falls below the speci-  
fied level. The light should go out after fully  
releasing the parking brake, if the fluid  
level in the brake fluid reservoir is ade-  
quate.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working. If  
the light stays on, or comes on when driv-  
ing, there may be something wrong with  
the ABS.  
• If the brake system warning light  
does not go out after the parking  
brake has been fully released.  
• If the brake system warning light  
does not come on when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the “ON”  
position.  
• If the brake system warning light  
comes on at any time during vehi-  
cle operation.  
If the ABS light and the brake system  
warning light stay on, or come on simulta-  
neously when driving, then there may be  
something wrong with both the rear brake  
proportioning valve function and anti-lock  
function of the ABS system.  
If the brake system warning light comes on  
while you are driving the vehicle, it may  
mean that there is something wrong with  
the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,  
you should:  
NOTE:  
If one of these happens, have the system  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. If the  
ABS becomes inoperative, the brake sys-  
tem will function as an ordinary brake sys-  
tem that has no ABS.  
Because the disc brake system is self-  
adjusting, the fluid level will drop as the  
brake pads become worn.  
1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.  
Replenishing the brake fluid reservoir is  
considered normal periodic maintenance.  
WARNING  
Remember that stopping distance  
may be longer, you may have to push  
harder on the pedal, and the pedal  
may go down farther than normal.  
For details of the ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock  
Brake system (ABS)” in the “OPERATING  
YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and  
stopping on the shoulder of the road.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
   
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light  
®
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
SLIP Indicator Light  
®
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
WARNING  
®
The ESP systems cannot prevent  
accidents. Always drive carefully.  
66J033  
66J032  
®
ESP  
is  
a
registered trademark of  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working.  
“ESP” (Electronic Stability  
Program) Warning Ligh  
DaimlerChrysler AG.  
When the “ESP OFF” switch is pushed to  
This light blinks 5 times per second when  
®
turn off the ESP systems (other than  
®
one of the ESP systems other than ABS  
ABS), the “ESP OFF” light comes on and  
stays on.  
is activated. If this light blinks, drive care-  
fully.  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working. If  
the light stays on, or comes on when driv-  
ing and remains on, there may be some-  
NOTE:  
66J031  
• If the vehicle speed is greater than  
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so  
you can check that the light is working. If  
the light stays on, or comes on when driv-  
ing, there may be something wrong with  
the ESP systems (other than ABS). You  
should have the system inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will turn  
on automatically and the light will go out.  
• When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
®
thing wrong with the ESP systems (other  
than ABS). You should have the system  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
®
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
canceled automatically. The light will  
come on and stay on.  
NOTE:  
®
• If the ESP systems operate continu-  
®
When you disconnect and re-connect the  
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
ously such as when driving on slippery  
roads, the traction control functions of  
®
®
battery, ESP system functions other than  
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-  
tor light will blink 1 time per second. For  
®
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
the ESP systems may be canceled  
temporarily to avoid overheating the  
brake pads, and the light will come on.  
®
details on how to reactive the ESP sys-  
tems, refer to “SLIP Indicator Light” in the  
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
®
After a short period of time, the ESP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6  
     
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
systems (other than ABS) will turn on  
automatically and the light will go out.  
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light  
CAUTION  
• If you operate the engine with this  
light on, severe engine damage can  
result.  
• Do not rely on the Oil Pressure  
Light to indicate the need to add  
oil. Be sure to periodically check  
the engine oil level.  
®
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
®
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
Oil Pressure Light  
60G049  
If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled when  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position, this light will come on and then  
blink. When the light comes on, a buzzer  
will also sound intermittently for about 6  
seconds. The reminder will repeat several  
times under certain conditions until the  
driver’s seat belt is buckled. After repeating  
several times, the reminder will be can-  
celed even if the driver’s seat belt remains  
unbuckled.  
Charging Light  
50G051  
This light comes on when the ignition  
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and  
goes out when the engine is started. The  
light will come on and remain on if there is  
insufficient oil pressure. If the light comes  
on when driving, pull off the road as soon  
as you can and stop the engine. Check the  
oil level and add oil if necessary. If there is  
enough oil, the lubrication system should  
be inspected by your SUZUKI dealer  
before you drive the vehicle again.  
50G052  
This light comes on when the ignition  
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and  
goes out when the engine is started. The  
light will come on and remain on if there is  
something wrong with the battery charging  
system. If the light comes on when the  
engine is running, the charging system  
should be inspected immediately by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
For details about the seat belt reminder,  
refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint  
Systems” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sec-  
tion.  
WARNING  
It is absolutely essential that the  
driver and passengers wear their seat  
belts at all times. Persons who are  
not wearing seat belts have a much  
greater risk of injury if an accident  
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-  
ling your seat belt before putting the  
key in the ignition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
     
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
NOTE:  
“AIR BAG” Light  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
If the fuel filler cap is not installed fully, the  
electrical system gets wet (such as by driv-  
ing through a deep puddle of water) or the  
fuel tank gets nearly empty, the malfunc-  
tion indicator lamp may come on. If so, the  
lamp will go off after driving a few times  
after the fuel filler cap is installed fully, the  
electrical system dries out or the fuel tank  
is filled.  
63J030  
65D530  
This light monitors inflators, crash sensors,  
seat belt pretensioners, the front passen-  
ger sensing system, and corresponding  
electrical circuits.  
This light blinks for several seconds when  
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position so you can check if the light is  
working. The light will come on and stay on  
if there is a problem in the air bag system  
or the seat belt pretensioner system.  
Your vehicle has a computer-controlled  
emission control system. A malfunction  
indicator light is provided on the instrument  
panel to indicate when it is necessary to  
have the emission control system serviced.  
The malfunction indicator light comes on  
when the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position to let you know the light is  
working and goes out when the engine is  
started.  
If the malfunction indicator light comes on  
or blinks when the engine is running, ser-  
vice to the emission control system is nec-  
essary. Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI  
dealer to have the emission control system  
serviced right away and avoid hard accel-  
eration until the service is performed.  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
54G343  
If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank  
immediately.  
WARNING  
If the “AIR BAG” light does not blink  
when the ignition switch is turned to  
the “ON” position or stays on or  
comes on when driving, the air bag  
system or the seat belt pretensioner  
system (if equipped) may not work  
NOTE:  
The activation point of this light varies  
depending on road conditions (for exam-  
ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions  
because of fuel moving in the tank.  
CAUTION  
properly.  
Have  
both  
systems  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Continuing to drive the vehicle when  
the malfunction indicator light is on  
or blinking can cause permanent  
damage to the vehicle’s emission  
control system, and can affect fuel  
economy and driveability.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8  
     
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
If this light blinks in red, it reminds you that  
the remote controller is not in the vehicle.  
For details, refer to “Keyless Start System  
Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System  
Transmitter” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”  
section.  
Open Door Warning Light  
“SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)  
Turn Signal Indicators  
54G391  
65D474  
This light remains on until all doors (includ-  
ing the tailgate) are completely closed.  
When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by  
the cruise control system, this light will be  
on.  
“CRUISE” Indicator Light  
(if equipped)  
Keyless Start System Indicator  
Light (if equipped)  
50G055  
When you turn on the left or right turn sig-  
nals, the corresponding green arrow on the  
instrument panel will flash along with the  
respective turn signal lights.  
When you turn on the hazard warning  
switch, both arrows will flash along with all  
of the turn signal lights.  
52D113  
62J041  
When the cruise control system is on, this  
light will be on.  
When you push the ignition switch for vehi-  
cle with the keyless start system, this light  
will come on in blue or red. If this light  
comes on in blue, you can turn the ignition  
switch without using an ignition key. If this  
light comes on in red, you can not turn the  
ignition switch without using an ignition  
key. For details, refer to “Ignition Switch” in  
the “STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS”  
section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
         
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
position and it is light around the light  
sensor.  
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position,  
these lights come on briefly to let you know  
that the lights are working.  
High Beam Indicator Light  
Illumination Indicator Light  
(1): Neutral  
(2): 4-wheel drive high range center differ-  
ential lock mode  
(2) & (3): 4-wheel drive low range center  
differential lock mode  
50G056  
This indicator comes on when headlight  
high beams are turned on.  
No indicators: 4-wheel drive high range  
mode  
64J045  
This indicator light comes on when the  
lighting switch is in the second or third  
position.  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)  
Indicator Light (if equipped)  
For details, refer to “Using the Transfer  
Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-  
CLE” section.  
If the indicators (all lights) continue to blink,  
there is a problem in the transfer system  
and you should have your vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Transfer Position Indicator Light  
(if equipped)  
60B245  
With the D.R.L. system, the headlights  
light, but are dimmer than the low beam,  
when the following three conditions are all  
met. Whenever the D.R.L. system is oper-  
ating, the D.R.L. indicator light remains on.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Conditions for D.R.L. system operation  
1) The engine is running.  
2) The parking brake is released.  
3) The lighting switch is at either the “OFF”  
or the “middle” position: or  
64J044  
The lighting switch is in the “AUTO”  
These indicators show the 4WD operating  
mode as described below. When the igni-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Speedometer  
A/T Selector Position  
Indicator (if equipped)  
Speedometer/Odometer/  
Tripmeter/Brightness Control  
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed  
in km/h and miles/h.  
Odometer/Tripmeter  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,  
the display shows the odometer or tripme-  
ter. The odometer records the total dis-  
tance the vehicle has been driven. The  
tripmeter can be used to measure the dis-  
tance traveled on short trips or between  
fuel stops.  
CAUTION  
Keep track of your odometer reading  
and check the maintenance schedule  
regularly for required services.  
Increased wear or damage to certain  
parts can result from failure to per-  
form required services at the proper  
mileage intervals.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
66J034  
66J035  
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position, this indicator shows the selector  
position of automatic transmission.  
(1) Speedometer  
(2) Odometer/Tripmeter  
(3) Odometer/Tripmeter selector, Bright-  
ness control knob  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
             
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Brightness Control  
(A)  
(B)  
EXAMPLE  
(3)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(C)  
About 2 seconds  
(3)  
64J049  
64J205  
66J213  
When the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, the display shows the odom-  
eter or trip meter.  
Hold in the selector knob for about 2 sec-  
onds to reset the trip meter to zero.  
(3) Brightness control knob  
(4) In this position, the meter lights are  
the dimmest and the other instrument  
panel lights are turned off.  
(5) In this position, the instrument panel  
lights are the brightest.  
The display shows three types of indica-  
tion; odometer, trip meter A and trip meter  
B. Push the selector knob (3) quickly to  
switch the indication among the three.  
You can use the two trip meters (A and B)  
independently.  
Your vehicle has a system to automatically  
dim the instrument panel lights when the  
ignition switch is in the “ON” position and  
the lighting switch is either (a) turned to the  
second or third position, or (b) turned to  
the “AUTO” position and it is dark around  
the light sensor. The level of brightness  
depends on the position of the brightness  
control knob (3).  
To reduce the brightness and activate the  
automatic dimming feature, turn the knob  
(3) counterclockwise. When the knob (3) is  
turned counterclockwise to position (4), the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
meter brightness becomes dimmest and  
the other instrument panel lights are  
turned off.  
To brighten the instrument panel lights,  
turn the knob (3) clockwise.  
Tachometer  
Fuel Gauge  
EXAMPLE  
(2)  
To cancel the automatic dimming feature  
and maintain full brightness, turn the knob  
(3) clockwise to position (5).  
(1)  
64J051  
64J052  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in  
revolutions per minute.  
This gauge gives an approximate indica-  
tion of the amount of fuel in the fuel tank.  
“F” stands for full and “E” stands for empty.  
If the indicator gets off the graduation of  
“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank as  
soon as possible.  
CAUTION  
Never drive with the engine speed  
indicator in the red zone or severe  
engine damage can result.  
NOTE:  
The indicator moves a little depending on  
road conditions (for example, slope or  
curve) and driving conditions because of  
fuel moving in the tank.  
If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,  
fill the fuel tank immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Temperature Gauge  
“PASS AIR BAG OFF”  
Indicator  
CAUTION  
Avoid driving with an extremely low  
fuel level. Running out of fuel could  
cause the engine to misfire, damag-  
ing the catalytic converter.  
NOTE:  
The activation point of the low fuel warning  
light (1) varies depending on road condi-  
tions (for example, slope or curve) and  
driving conditions because of fuel moving  
in the tank.  
The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler  
door is located on the right side of the vehi-  
cle.  
64J053  
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position, this gauge indicates the engine  
coolant temperature. Under normal driving  
conditions, the indicator should stay within  
the normal, acceptable temperature range  
between “H” and “C”. If the indicator goes  
outside this range and approaches “H”,  
overheating is indicated. Follow the  
instructions in the “If the Engine Over-  
heats” of “Emergency Remedies” section.  
66J247  
The “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator is  
located on the center of the instrument  
panel. When the ignition switch is turned to  
the “ON” position, this indicator comes on  
for several seconds to let you know the  
indicator is working.  
While this indicator is turning on, the front  
passenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-  
tensioner will be disabled.  
CAUTION  
For details about the front passenger sens-  
ing system, refer to “Supplemental  
Restraint System (air bags)” in the  
“BEFORE DRIVIING” section.  
Continuing to drive the vehicle when  
engine overheating is indicated can  
result in severe engine damage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Hazard Warning Switch  
Rear Window Defroster and  
Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Defroster (if equipped) Switch  
An indicator light will be lit when the  
defroster is on. The defroster will only work  
when the engine is running. To turn off the  
defroster, push the switch again.  
CAUTION  
The rear window defroster and the  
outside rearview mirrors use a large  
amount of electricity. Be sure to turn  
off the defroster after the window has  
become clear.  
64J054  
(1)  
Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-  
vate the hazard warning lights. All four turn  
signal lights and both turn signal indicators  
will flash simultaneously. To turn off the  
lights, push the switch again.  
66J248  
When the rear window is fogged, push this  
switch to clear the window.  
Use the hazard warning lights to warn  
other traffic during emergency parking or  
when your vehicle could otherwise become  
a traffic hazard.  
(2)  
64J258  
If the outside rearview mirror has the mark  
(2), it is also equipped with the outside  
rearview mirrors defroster. When you push  
the switch (1), both the outside rearview  
mirrors defroster and the rear window  
defroster will operate simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will turn  
on automatically.  
Front Fog Light Switch  
(if equipped)  
“ESP OFF” Switch  
• If the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
canceled automatically.  
®
• If the ESP systems operates continu-  
ously, such as when driving on slippery  
roads, the traction control functions of  
®
the ESP systems may be canceled  
temporarily to avoid overheating the  
brake pads. After a short period of time,  
®
the ESP systems (other than ABS) will  
turn on automatically and the “ESP OFF”  
indicator light will go out.  
66J039  
®
For details of the ESP systems, refer to  
®
®
ESP  
is  
a
registered trademark of  
64J058  
“Electronic Stability Program (ESP )” in  
the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-  
tion.  
DaimlerChrysler AG.  
The front fog light comes on when the fog  
light switch is pushed in with:  
• the lighting switch turned to the third  
position and the beams set to the low  
beam position, or  
• the auto-on headlight system on and the  
beams set to the low beam position.  
The “ESP OFF” switch is located on the  
center of the instrument panel. You can  
®
turn the ESP systems (other than ABS)  
on or off using this switch.  
®
To turn off the ESP systems (other than  
ABS), push and hold the “ESP OFF” switch  
until the “ESP OFF” indicator light comes  
on.  
®
To turn on all of the ESP systems, push  
the “ESP OFF” switch again. The “ESP  
OFF” indicator light will go out.  
NOTE:  
• If the vehicle speed is greater than  
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Transfer Switch (if equipped)  
Glove Box  
Information Display  
EXAMPLE  
(4)(5)  
(7)  
(6)  
UNLOCK  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
LOCK  
66J168  
64J065  
66J198  
The transfer switch is located on the center  
of the instrument panel.  
To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.  
To close it, push the lid until it latches  
securely. If a lock is equipped on the latch  
lever, lock the glove box by inserting the  
key and turning it clockwise and unlock the  
glove box by turning the key counterclock-  
wise.  
(1) Clock  
(2) Thermometer  
(3) Instantaneous fuel consumption/Aver-  
age fuel consumption/Driving range  
(4) “H” button  
For details on how to use this switch, refer  
to “Using the Transfer Switch” in the  
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
(5) “M” button  
(6) “DISP” button  
(7) Freezing mark  
WARNING  
Never drive with the glove box lid  
open. It could cause injury if an acci-  
dent occurs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
           
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
1) If the fuel consumption/driving range  
display is blank, push the “DISP” button  
(6) to turn on the display.  
2) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”  
position.  
3) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or  
“ON” position while holding in the  
“DISP” button (6).  
NOTE:  
Clock (1)  
The unit indication of the thermometer can  
not be changed when the fuel consump-  
tion/driving range display is blank.  
The clock is shown when the ignition  
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.  
To set the clock, follow the instructions  
below.  
Refer to “Fuel Consumption and Driving  
Range (3)” in this section.  
To set the hour display, push the “H” but-  
ton (4) repeatedly to advance the hour  
display. To advance the hour display  
quickly, hold in the “H” button (4) for  
about 1 second and continue holding.  
To set the minute display, push the “M”  
button (5) repeatedly to advance the  
minute display. To advance the minute  
display quickly, hold in the “M” button (5)  
for about 1 second and continue holding.  
Fuel Consumption and Driving  
Range (3)  
The unit display of the thermometer will  
blink.  
This display can be changed to show  
instantaneous fuel consumption, average  
fuel consumption, driving range. Also, the  
display of fuel consumption can be turned  
off if you desire.  
Thermometer (2)  
The thermometer shows the outside tem-  
perature when the ignition switch is in the  
“ON” position.  
If the outside temperature nears freezing,  
the mark (7) will come on when the display  
shows the outside temperature.  
66J199  
NOTE:  
4) Push the “DISP” button (6) quickly to  
change the indication between °F and  
°C as shown in the illustration.  
5) Hold in the “DISP” button (6) for more  
than 2 seconds, and the unit indication  
will stop blinking.  
The thermometer will not indicate the  
actual outside temperature when driving at  
low speed, or when stopped.  
You can change the unit indication of the  
thermometer between °F and °C.  
To change the indication, follow the instruc-  
tions below.  
If you don’t push the “DISP” button (6)  
within about 8 seconds after the unit  
display starts blinking, the unit display  
will automatically stop blinking.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18  
     
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Instantaneous fuel consumption (a)  
If you selected instantaneous fuel con-  
sumption the last time you drove the vehi-  
cle, the display indicates “--.-” when the  
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or  
“ON” position. Unless the vehicle is mov-  
ing, the display will indicate “--.-”.  
until the fuel gauge indicates “E” based a  
current driving conditions.  
When the remaining fuel in fuel tank  
reaches a low level, the display “--.-” will  
appear.  
If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill  
the fuel tank immediately regardless of the  
value of driving range shown in the display.  
(a)  
(b)  
(c)  
(d)  
Average fuel consumption (b)  
If you selected average fuel consumption  
the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-  
play shows the last value of average fuel  
consumption when the ignition switch is  
turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position.  
Unless you reset the value of average fuel  
consumption, the display will show the  
value of average fuel consumption which  
includes average fuel consumption during  
previous driving.  
As the driving range after refueling is cal-  
culated based on the last driving condition,  
the value is different each time you refuel.  
NOTE:  
• When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal to the battery, the value of driving  
range will be shown after driving for a  
while.  
• For new vehicle with low mileage, the  
driving range may not be shown  
promptly in the display when beginning  
to drive. The driving range will be shown  
after a while.  
To reset the value of average fuel con-  
sumption, hold in the “DISP” button (6) for  
more than 2 seconds when the display  
shows an average fuel consumption value.  
The display will indicate “--.-” and then will  
show a new average fuel consumption  
value after driving for a short time.  
NOTE:  
The values of fuel consumption and driving  
range shown in the display are affected by  
conditions such as the following;  
• road condition  
66J200  
Driving range (c)  
If you selected driving range the last time  
you drove the vehicle, the display shows “--  
.-” for a few seconds and then shows the  
current driving range when the ignition  
switch is turned to the “ON” position.  
Every time you push the “DISP” button (6),  
the display will be changed among the fol-  
lowing four displays.  
• surrounding traffic condition  
• driving condition  
• vehicle condition  
• when the malfunction indicator light  
comes on or blinks  
(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption  
(b) Average fuel consumption  
(c) Driving range  
The driving range shown in the display is  
the approximate distance you can drive  
(d) No display  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Unit indication of fuel consumption and  
driving range  
You can change the unit indication of fuel  
consumption when selecting instanta-  
neous fuel consumption or average fuel  
consumption in the display.  
You can also change the unit indication of  
driving range when selecting driving range  
in the display.  
Fuel consumption  
6) Push the “DISP” button (6) for more  
than 2 seconds, and the unit display will  
stop blinking and the display will stay  
on. If you don’t push the “DISP” button  
(6) within about 8 seconds, the unit dis-  
play will automatically stop blinking and  
the display will stay on.  
NOTE:  
To change the unit indication in the display,  
follow the instructions below.  
You should operate the display before the  
vehicle moves.  
The unit indication of the fuel consumption  
or driving range can not be changed when  
the fuel consumption/driving range display  
is blank.  
1) If the fuel consumption/driving range  
display is blank, push the “DISP” button  
(6) to turn on the display.  
2) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”  
position.  
NOTE:  
66J201  
“MPG” is based on US gallons.  
Driving range  
NOTE:  
3) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or  
“ON” position while holding in the  
“DISP” button (6). The unit display of  
the thermometer will blink.  
4) Push the “M” button (5), and the unit  
display of fuel consumption or driving  
range will blink.  
When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal to the battery, the information display  
will be reinitialized. Readjust the display. If  
you select driving range, the display will be  
shown after driving for a while.  
66J202  
5) Push the “DISP” button (6) quickly to  
change the display as shown in the  
above illustrations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Theft Deterrent Light  
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System  
(Climate Control)  
EXAMPLE  
Air Outlet (front)  
EXAMPLE  
1
1
2
3
4
2
66J249  
3
This light will blink with the ignition switch  
in the “OFF” or “ACC” position. The blink-  
ing light is intended to deter theft by lead-  
ing others to believe that the vehicle is  
equipped with a security system.  
5
5
5
5
66J250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
       
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
1. Windshield defroster outlet  
2. Side defroster outlet  
3. Side outlet  
Center outlet  
Side outlet  
EXAMPLE  
Open  
4. Center outlet  
5. Floor outlet  
Close  
64J199  
63J045  
When “Open”, air comes out from the side  
outlets regardless of the air flow selector  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Description of Controls  
(1) Temperature selector  
(2) Blower speed selector  
(3) Air intake selector  
(4) Air flow selector  
(5) Defrost switch  
(6) “OFF” switch  
(8)  
(7) “AUTO” switch  
(8) Air conditioning switch  
(9) LCD display  
(1)  
(2)  
(7)  
(5)  
(4)  
(6)  
(9)  
(3)  
66J234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Temperature selector (1)  
Air conditioning switch (8)  
Blower speed selector (2)  
(1)  
(2)  
A/C: OFF  
A/C: ON  
66J235  
66J236  
66J237  
Turn this selector to adjust the tempera-  
ture.  
This switch is used to turn on and off the  
air conditioning system. To turn on the air  
conditioning system, push in the switch  
and “A/C” will appear on the LCD display.  
To turn off the air conditioning system,  
push in the switch again and “A/C” will go  
off.  
This selector is used to turn on the blower  
and to select blower speed.  
If the “AUTO” switch (7) is pushed, the  
blower speed will vary automatically as the  
climate control system maintains the  
selected temperature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Air intake selector (3)  
NOTE:  
Ventilation (c)  
If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an  
extended period of time, the air in the vehi-  
cle can become contaminated. Therefore,  
you should occasionally select “FRESH  
AIR”.  
Air flow selector (4)  
64J069  
(a)  
(b)  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the center and side air outlets.  
Bi-level (d)  
66J238  
(4)  
Push this selector to change between the  
following modes.  
RECIRCULATED AIR (a)  
64J070  
(c)  
(d)  
(e)  
(f)  
When this mode is selected, outside air is  
shut off and inside air is recirculated. This  
mode is suitable when driving through an  
area with polluted air such as a tunnel, or  
when attempting to quickly cool down the  
vehicle.  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the floor outlets and cooler air comes out  
of the center and side outlets. When the  
temperature selector (1) is in the fully  
COLD position or fully HOT position, how-  
ever, the air from the floor outlets and the  
air from the center and side outlets will be  
the same temperature.  
66J239  
Push this selector to change among the  
following functions. The indication of the  
selected mode appears on the LCD dis-  
play.  
FRESH AIR (b)  
When this mode is selected, outside air is  
introduced.  
AUTO (7)  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
various outlets automatically.  
“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”  
are selected alternately each time the air  
intake selector is pushed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-25  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Heat (e)  
Defrost switch (5)  
Defrost  
(5)  
64J071  
66J241  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the floor outlets and the side outlets, a  
small amount of air comes out of the wind-  
shield defroster outlets and the side  
defroster outlets.  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the windshield defroster outlets, the side  
defroster outlets and the side outlets.  
NOTE:  
When the defrost switch (5) is pushed to  
turn on the defroster, the air conditioning  
system will come on and the “FRESH AIR”  
mode will be selected automatically. In  
very cold weather, however, the air condi-  
tioning system will not turn on.  
Heat & defrost (f)  
66J240  
Push this switch to turn on the defroster.  
64J072  
Temperature-controlled air comes out of  
the floor outlets, the windshield defroster  
outlets, the side defroster outlets and the  
side outlets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
inside temperature below outside tempera-  
ture.  
To return the blower speed selector (2),  
air intake selector (3), and air flow selec-  
tor (4) to automatic operation, push the  
“AUTO” switch.  
System Operating Instructions  
Automatic operation  
To turn the climate control system off, push  
the “OFF” switch (6).  
NOTE:  
If the “AUTO” on the LCD display blinks,  
there is a problem in the heating system  
and/or air conditioning system. You should  
have the system inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
(F)  
(7)  
(G)  
NOTE:  
To find the temperature at which you are  
most comfortable, start with the 22°C  
(72°F) setting.  
(6)  
66J242  
• If you turn the temperature selector (1)  
until “HI” or “LO” appears on the LCD  
display, the climate control system will  
operate at the maximum cooling or heat-  
ing and the blower will run at full speed.  
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather  
or hot air in hot weather, the system will  
delay turning on the blower until warmed  
or chilled air is available.  
• If your vehicle has been left in the sun  
with the windows closed, it will cool  
faster if you open the windows briefly.  
• Even under the automatic operation, you  
can set individual selectors to the man-  
ual mode. The manually selected func-  
tions are maintained, and the other  
functions remain under automatic opera-  
tion.  
EXAMPLE  
You can let the climate control system work  
automatically. To set the system for fully-  
automatic operation, follow the procedure  
below.  
64J080  
Be careful not to cover the interior temper-  
ature sensor (F) located between the  
steering wheel and the climate control  
panel, or the solar sensor (G) located at  
the top of the driver’s side dashboard.  
These sensors are used by the automatic  
system to regulate temperature.  
1) Set the desired temperature by turning  
the temperature selector (1).  
2) Push the “AUTO” switch (7).  
The blower speed selector (2), air intake  
selector (3), and air flow selector (4) are  
controlled automatically to maintain the set  
temperature.  
Manual operation  
You can manually control the climate con-  
trol system. Set the selectors to the  
desired positions.  
You can use the air conditioning switch (8)  
to manually turn the air conditioner on or  
off according to your preference. When  
you turn the air conditioning switch off, the  
climate control system cannot lower the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Maintenance  
Audio Systems  
If you do not use the air conditioner for a  
long period, such as during winter, it may  
not give the best performance when you  
start using it again. To help maintain opti-  
mum performance and durability of your air  
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.  
Operate the air conditioner at least once a  
month for one minute with the engine  
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil  
and helps protect the internal components.  
There are two types of audio system as  
shown below:  
Type 1  
Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil-  
ters. Clean or replace them as specified in  
the “Maintenance Schedule” in the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-  
tion. Have this job done by your SUZUKI  
dealer as the lower glove box must be low-  
ered for this job.  
64J074  
NOTE:  
If you need maximum defrosting:  
• set the defrost switch (5) to “DEFROST”  
(the air conditioning system will come on  
and the “FRESH AIR” mode will be  
selected automatically),  
• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,  
• adjust the temperature selector to the  
“HI” indication on the LCD display, and  
• adjust the side outlets so the air blows  
on the side windows.  
66J093  
NOTE:  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER  
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
Your vehicle uses the air conditioning  
refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called  
“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around  
1993 for automotive applications. Other  
refrigerants are available, including recy-  
cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used  
in your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
Using the wrong refrigerant may  
damage your air conditioning sys-  
tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or  
replace the R-134a with other refrig-  
erants.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28  
   
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Type 2  
Precautions  
Cautions on Handling  
• When the inside of the car is very cold  
and the player is used soon after switch-  
ing on the heater, moisture may form on  
the disc or the optical parts of the player  
and proper playback may not be possi-  
ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it  
off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on  
the optical parts of the player, do not use  
the player for about one hour, this will  
allow the condensation to disappear nor-  
mally.  
(A)  
52D274  
This unit has been designed specifically for  
playback of compact discs bearing the  
mark (A).  
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which  
cause severe vibrations may cause  
sound to skip.  
No other discs can be played.  
66J214  
• This unit uses a precision mechanism.  
Even in the event that trouble arises,  
never open the case, disassemble the  
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.  
Please bring the unit to an authorized  
SUZUKI dealer or a Clarion service  
Department.  
Removing the disc  
Proper way to hold  
the compact disc  
AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER  
WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
52D275  
To remove the compact disc from its stor-  
age case, press down on the center of the  
case and lift the disc out, holding it care-  
fully by the edges.  
Always handle the compact disc by the  
edges.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Never touch the surface.  
prevent the system from operating prop-  
erly.  
52D348  
52D347  
Never stick labels on the surface of the  
compact disc or mark the surface with a  
pencil or pen.  
52D351  
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a  
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from  
the center of the compact disc to the cir-  
cumference.  
Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-  
light or any heat source.  
NOTE:  
• Do not use commercially available CD  
protection sheets or discs equipped with  
stabilizers, etc.  
These may get caught in the internal  
mechanism and damage the disc.  
• CD-R discs may not be able to playback  
in this unit due to the recording condi-  
tions.  
(B)  
(B)  
(C)  
52D349  
Do not use any solvents such as commer-  
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,  
or thinner to clean compact discs.  
• CD-RW discs can not playback in this  
unit.  
52D277  
New discs may have some roughness  
around the edges. The unit may not work  
or the sound may skip if such discs are  
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to  
remove the roughness (C) from edges of  
the disc before insertion inside the unit.  
52D350  
Do not use compact discs that have large  
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.  
Use of such discs will cause damage or  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
(1) Power on/off knob  
Volume control knob  
Basic Operations  
(2) Tone/balance/fader control knob  
(3) Preset button 5  
(4) Preset button 6  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(3)  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(3)  
66J215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-31  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Turning power on/off  
Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2).  
Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-  
trol)  
Press the power on/off knob (1).  
The unit starts in the function mode it was  
in when the power was turned off last.  
The Auto Volume Control (AVC) function  
Each time it is pressed, sound adjust-  
ment is changed as follows:  
automatically  
adjusts  
(increases/  
decreases) the sound volume in accor-  
dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control  
is provided with three selectable levels  
(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume  
adjustment increases together with the  
LEVEL number,  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume control knob (1).  
Turning it clockwise increases the volume;  
turning it counterclockwise decreases the  
volume.  
Bass adjustment (BASS 0)  
Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)  
Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)  
Fader adjustment (FADER 0)  
AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)  
Original mode  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode  
is selected.  
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) to select the desired AVC  
adjustment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL  
2)  
NOTE:  
While driving, adjust the volume to an  
extent that sound and/or noise coming  
from outside the car can be heard.  
Adjusting the contrast of the display  
1) Press the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) and preset button 5 (3), preset  
button 6 (4) simultaneously.  
66J224  
2) To adjust the contrast of the display,  
turn the power on/off knob (1).  
2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control  
knob (2) to adjust the sound.  
Cancel the dimmer condition  
Each time you press the power on/off knob  
(1) for two seconds with the lighting switch  
on, the background brightness of the audio  
display will switch between normal and  
dimmed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-32  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Display  
Listening to the Radio  
(C)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
(B)  
(D)  
66J097  
(6)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(1) Band switch button (FM/AM)  
(2) Seek up button  
(3) Seek down button  
(4)  
(4) Manual tuning knob  
(5) Preset buttons (1 to 6)  
(6) Auto store button (AS)/  
Scan button (SCAN)  
(5)  
(A) Band  
(B) Preset channel number  
(C) Stereo indicator  
(D) Frequency  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(6)  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
66J216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Radio Reception  
Selecting the reception band  
Auto store  
Press the band switch button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the recep-  
tion band is switched as follows:  
Press and hold the auto store button (6) for  
2 seconds or longer.  
Radio reception can be affected by envi-  
ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio  
signal’s power and distance from the sta-  
tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may  
interfere or deflect radio reception, causing  
poor reception. Poor reception or radio  
static can also be caused by electric cur-  
rent from overhead wires or high voltage  
power lines.  
Six stations in total are automatically  
stored to the preset buttons (5) in sequen-  
tial order, starting from the lower frequen-  
cies.  
NOTE:  
• When the auto store is performed, the  
station previously stored in the memory  
at the position is overwritten.  
66J098  
• When there are fewer than 6 stations  
that can be stored even if 2 rounds of  
auto store operation are performed, the  
stations previously stored at the remain-  
ing preset buttons (5) are not overwrit-  
ten.  
Seek tuning  
Press the seek up button (2) or the seek  
down button (3).  
The unit stops searching for a station at a  
frequency where a broadcast station is  
available.  
Scan tuning  
Manual tuning  
1) Press the scan button (6).  
Turn the manual tuning knob (4).  
The frequency being received is displayed.  
Stations are automatically sought for in  
a sequential order, starting from a sta-  
tion being currently received, and scan  
stops for 5 seconds at a frequency  
where there is a station available.  
2) Press the scan button (6) again to stop  
scanning at the frequency being cur-  
rently received.  
Preset memory  
1) Select the desired station.  
2) Select the preset button (5) to which  
you want to store the station and press  
and hold the button for 2 seconds or  
longer.  
Receiving a stereo broadcast station  
If a stereo broadcast station is received,  
the stereo indicator will light.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Radio Antenna  
Listening to a CD  
CAUTION  
• Never insert your finger or hand  
into the CD insertion slot. Never  
insert foreign objects.  
• Never insert a CD with glue coming  
out from adhesive tape or a rental  
CD label or with a trace indicating  
that adhesive tape or a rental CD  
label has been removed. This may  
cause the CD not to eject or result  
in a malfunction.  
(A)  
52D274  
• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)  
cannot be used.  
• Some discs previously recorded in CD-  
R\CD-RW format may not be used.  
63J055  
The radio antenna on the roof is remov-  
able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-  
terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn  
it clockwise firmly by hand.  
52D291  
CAUTION  
• A CD is inserted with its label facing  
upward.  
• When there is a CD already loaded in  
the unit, another CD cannot be loaded at  
the same time. Do not use force when  
inserting the CD into the CD insertion  
slot.  
• If a blank disc (non recorded CD-R) is  
loaded in the unit, the disc will be  
ejected.  
To avoid damage to the radio  
antenna:  
• Remove the antenna before using  
an automatic car wash.  
• Remove the antenna when it is pos-  
sible for the antenna to hit some-  
thing such as a low ceiling in a  
parking garage or putting a car  
cover over your car.  
• Remove the antenna before put-  
ting a car cover over your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-35  
   
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Type 1  
Display  
AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built in CD Player)  
(D)  
(A)  
(C)  
(B)  
66J100  
(1) CD insertion slot  
(2) CD eject button  
(3) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(1)  
(4) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(5) Track down button/Rewind button  
(6) Repeat button (RPT)  
(6)  
(3)  
(2)  
(4)  
(5)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Track number  
(C) Play time  
(D) Repeat indicator  
66J099  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
NOTE:  
Loading a CD  
Selecting a track  
About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)  
• No adapter is required to play a single  
CD.  
Insert a CD in the CD insertion slot (1).  
When a CD is loaded, play starts and the  
CD indicator (A) lights.  
• Press the track up button (4) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (5) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (5) is  
pressed once, the track being currently  
played will return to the beginning.  
• A single CD is inserted from the center  
of the CD insertion slot.  
• Since an ejected single CD is not auto-  
matically reloaded, be sure to remove  
the ejected single CD.  
Ejecting a CD  
Press the CD eject button (2).  
If you left a CD ejected for a period of  
about 15 seconds, it will be automatically  
drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-  
tion)  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (4) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (5) to rewind a  
track.  
The backup eject function:  
This function allows you to eject a CD with  
the power turned off by pressing the CD  
eject button (2).  
Repeat play  
Press the repeat button (6).  
The repeat indicator (D) lights and the  
track currently being played is played  
repeatedly.  
Press the repeat button (6) again to cancel  
repeat play.  
CAUTION  
If you forcefully try to push an ejected  
CD inside the unit before auto reload-  
ing, the disc surface might be  
scratched.  
Listening to a CD  
When a CD is inserted, it is automatically  
played back.  
When a CD is already inside the unit,  
press the disc button (3) to play back the  
CD. When a CD is inside the unit, the CD  
indicator (A) is lit on the display unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Type 2  
Display  
AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Changer)  
(F)  
(B)  
(C)  
(A)  
(D)  
(E)  
66J102  
(1) Load button (LOAD)  
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)  
(3) CD insertion slot  
(4) CD eject button  
(5) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(6) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(7) Track down button/Rewind button  
(8) Repeat button (RPT)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1)  
(8)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Disc number  
(C) Track number  
(D) Play time  
(E) CD indicator  
(F) Repeat indicator  
(2)  
66J217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
NOTE:  
Loading one CD  
Loading multiple CDs  
About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)  
1) Press the load button (1), then press  
one of the disc select buttons (2) that  
corresponds to the slot into which you  
want to load a CD.  
1) Press the load button (1) for 2 seconds  
or longer.  
• Since the unit is not compatible with a  
single CD, do not load it into the unit.  
• Keep in mind the fact that a single CD  
cannot be played even using a single CD  
adaptor for the unit.  
The indication “CD ALLappears in the  
display, and then the indication “In” and  
a disc number in the CD indicator will  
blink for about 15 seconds.  
• When a single CD is loaded into the unit  
accidentally, it will be ejected immedi-  
ately. Please be sure to remove it.  
If you forcefully try to push it into the unit  
without removing it, the CD cannot be  
ejected. This will result in a damage to  
the mechanism. Please never do this.  
2) Load a CD into the CD insertion slot  
(3).  
3) The indication “In” and the next disc  
number will blink in the display. Load  
the next CD.  
4) After loading the required number of  
CD’s, press any disc select button (2) to  
select the desired CD to listen to. If no  
select button is pressed, play will start  
from the first loaded CD.  
66J143  
Both the indication “In” and the selected  
disc number in the CD indicator will blink  
for about 15 seconds.  
2) Load the CD into the CD insertion slot  
(3). When the CD is loaded, play starts.  
The disk number in the CD indicator will  
light.  
Only the numbers in the CD indicator that  
correspond to the loaded slots will light.  
Ejecting one CD  
1) Select the CD you want to remove with  
the disc select buttons (2).  
CAUTION  
2) Press the CD eject button (4).  
If you leave the ejected CD without  
removing it, it will be drawn into the unit  
automatically after about 15 seconds.  
(Auto reload function)  
You can load a CD only while the indi-  
cation “In” is blinking for about 15  
seconds. During that period, the  
shutter located in the depth of the CD  
insertion slot (3) is opened. After 15  
seconds time has elapsed, the indi-  
cation “In” disappears from the dis-  
play and the shutter closes, making it  
impossible to load a CD. If you try to  
load the CD with the shutter closed,  
the CD may damage the shutter.  
Never do this.  
The buck up eject mechanism:  
This function allows you to eject the CD  
loaded in the unit with the unit turned off  
only by pressing the CD eject button (4).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-39  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Ejecting all the CDs  
Listening to a CD  
Repeat play  
Press the CD eject button (4) for 2 seconds  
or longer. All the CDs will be ejected from  
the unit in a sequential manner.  
1) When a CD is inserted, it is automati-  
cally played back.  
Press the repeat button (8).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
When a CD is already inside the unit,  
press the disc button (5) to play back  
the CD. When a CD is inside the unit,  
the CD indicator (A) is lit on the display  
unit.  
• Please prepare  
removed CDs can be stored.  
• If you leave the ejected CD without  
removing it, it will be drawn into the unit  
automatically after about 15 seconds.  
(Auto reload function)  
a
location where  
TRACK REPEAT  
2) If you want to play another CD, select it  
with the disc select buttons (2).  
Play starts from the point on the disc  
that the unit played last (Last position  
memory).  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
The buck up eject mechanism:  
66J144  
This function allows you to eject the CD  
loaded in the unit with the unit turned off  
only by pressing the CD eject button (4).  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
Selecting a track  
• Press the track up button (6) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (7) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (7) is  
pressed once, the track being currently  
played will return to the beginning.  
CAUTION  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (8) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
If you try to push an ejected CD  
inside the unit forcibly before auto  
reloading, the disc surface might be  
scratched.  
• TRACK REPEAT  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (F) lights.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (6) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (7) to rewind a  
track.  
The track currently being played is  
played repeatedly.  
• DISC REPEAT  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (F) lights.  
When all the tracks on the disc currently  
being played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-40  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Display (Type 1)  
Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc  
(D)  
(E) (F)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(2)  
(5)  
66J104  
(3)  
(4)  
Display (Type 2)  
(D)  
(E) (F)  
(1)  
(A)  
(B)  
(C)  
(G)  
66J105  
(1) Sound control knob  
(2) Repeat button (RPT)  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(4) Track down button/Rewind button  
(5) Display button (DISP)  
(A) Folder number  
(B) Track number  
(C) Play time  
(3)  
(4)  
(2)  
(5)  
(D) Repeat indicator  
(E) WMA indicator  
(F) MP3 indicator  
(G) CD indicator  
(1)  
66J218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-41  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
MP3/WMA MODE  
• TRACK REPEAT  
Displaying CD titles  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
Press the display button (5).  
Each time the button is pressed, the title  
changes as follows:  
Selecting a folder  
Turn the sound control knob (1) to select a  
folder.  
The track currently being played is  
played repeatedly.  
• FOLDER REPEAT  
The indication “FOLDER RPT” appears  
in the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
All the tracks in the folder currently being  
played are played repeatedly.  
• DISC REPEAT  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (D) lights.  
When all the tracks on the disc currently  
being played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
Repeat play  
Press the repeat button (2).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
OFF  
ALBUM TITLE  
FOLDER TITLE  
FILE TITLE  
Type 1  
TRACK REPEAT  
ARTIST TITLE  
TRACK TITLE  
OFF  
FOLDER REPEAT  
66J128  
66J146  
Type 2  
Forwarding a title  
Selecting a track  
If there is a title with 12 letters or more,  
each press will show next letters in the dis-  
play. (No scrolling is made.)  
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to  
the next track.  
TRACK REPEAT  
FOLDER REPEAT  
• Press the track down button (4) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (4) is  
pressed once, the track currently being  
played will start again at the beginning.  
Press and hold the display button (5) for 2  
seconds or longer. A title is changed.  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
66J145  
NOTE:  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a  
track.  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (2) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-42  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Display  
Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option)  
(C)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
(B)  
66J107  
(8)  
(6)  
(3)  
(1) XM button  
(2) Category button (CAT)  
(3) Seek up button  
(4) Seek down button  
(5) Manual tuning knob  
(6) Display button (DISP)  
(7) Preset button (1 to 6)  
(8) Scan button (SCAN)  
(4)  
(1)  
(5)  
(2)  
(7)  
(A) Band  
(B) Channel number  
(C) Category indicator  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
If you want to purchase XM Satellite Radio  
Service, contact your SUZUKI dealer.  
It is necessary to buy a special tuner to  
receive XM broadcasting.  
(8)  
(6)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1)  
(5)  
Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM  
Satellite Radio anywhere in the United  
States except Hawaii, Alaska, and Can-  
ada.  
(2)  
(7)  
66J219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-43  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
XM MODE  
Selecting a category  
and hold the button for 2 seconds or  
longer.  
Press the seek up button (3) or seek down  
button (4) to select a category.  
Selecting a band  
Press the XM button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the band  
changes in the following order.  
Scan tuning  
Displaying the category  
1) Press the scan button (8).  
Stations are automatically searched for  
in a sequential order, starting from the  
station being currently received, and  
scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at the  
frequency where there is a station avail-  
able.  
Press the category button (2) to have the  
currently selected category appear on the  
display.  
XM1  
XM2  
XM3  
Selecting a channel  
Turn the manual tuning knob (5) to select a  
channel.  
2) Press the scan button (8) again to stop  
scanning at the frequency currently  
being received.  
66J129  
NOTE:  
When the category function is on, only  
those channels included in the selected  
category can be selected.  
Selecting a category  
Satellite Radio Reception  
Press the seek up button (3) or the seek  
down button (4). The category is changed.  
Satellite radio receives signals from two  
satellites in orbit over the equator. There-  
fore, satellite radio reception can be inter-  
rupted when there are objects south of  
your vehicle. To help compensate for this,  
ground-based repeaters are placed in  
major metropolitan areas, but depending  
on the geographic situation (for example, if  
mountains or buildings are on the south  
side of your vehicle), you may experience  
reception problems.  
Selecting the item to be displayed  
Press the display button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, the item  
on display changes in the following order.  
Turning the category function on/off  
Press and hold the category button (2) for  
2 seconds or longer, and “CATEGORY  
ON” appears on the display, the CAT indi-  
cator (c) lights up and the CATEGORY  
function is activated.  
Press and hold the category button (2) for  
2 seconds or longer again, and “CATE-  
GORY OFF” appears on the display and  
the CAT indicator turns off, indicating that  
the CATEGORY function has been turned  
off.  
CH NUMBER  
TITLE  
CH NAME  
NAME  
66J130  
Preset memory  
1) Select the desired station.  
2) Select the preset button (7) to which  
you want to store the station and press  
NOTE:  
The first time you use the radio, turn the  
category function on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-44  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Display  
Listening to Audio for AUX (Option)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A)  
66J221  
(1) Aux button (CD/AUX)  
(A) Mode indicator  
Aux function  
This system has an external input terminal  
so you can listen to audio from an external  
device connected to this unit.  
(1)  
Press the aux button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected mode is switched as follows:  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
CD  
AUX  
66J123  
(1)  
66J220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-45  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Display  
Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option)  
(G)  
(E) (F)  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(A) (B)  
(D)  
(C)  
(5)  
66J113  
(3)  
(4)  
(1) Disc button (CD/AUX)  
(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)  
(1)  
(6)  
(3) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(4) Track down button/Rewind button  
(5) Repeat button (RPT)  
(6) Category button (CAT)  
(2)  
(A) Mode indicator  
(B) Disc number  
(C) Track number  
(D) Play time  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(E) Repeat indicator  
(F) Random indicator  
(G) CD changer number  
(5)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1)  
(6)  
(2)  
66J222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-46  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Selecting a CD changer mode  
Press the disc button (1).  
Each time the button is pressed, the  
selected CD plays as follows:  
Selecting a disc  
Random play  
Press the disc select button (2) corre-  
sponding to the disc number you want to  
listen to.  
Press the category button (6).  
Each time the button is pressed, the mode  
changes in the following order.  
Play starts from the first track on the disc. If  
a disc number having no disc is pressed,  
the selection will be invalid.  
TRACK RANDOM  
Built-in CD player  
CD changer 1  
CD changer 2  
Selecting a track  
OFF  
DISC RANDOM  
• Press the track up button (3) to listen to  
the next track.  
• Press the track down button (4) twice to  
listen to the previous track.  
When the track down button (4) is  
pressed once, the track currently being  
played will start again at the beginning.  
66J131  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
To cancel random play, press the category  
button (6) several times to change the ran-  
dom play mode to OFF.  
Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track  
• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to  
advance a track rapidly.  
• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a  
track.  
52D300  
• When only one CD changer is con-  
nected to this unit, CD changer 2 is  
skipped.  
• When no CD is loaded in the built-in CD  
player, the built-in CD player is skipped.  
• TRACK RANDOM  
The tracks in the disc that is loaded are  
played at random.  
• DISC RANDOM  
The tracks in all discs are played at ran-  
dom.  
NOTE:  
The random play can be operated with the  
External CD Changer (Option) only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-47  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Repeat play  
• TRACK REPEAT  
• DISC REPEAT  
Press the repeat button (5).  
Each time the button is pressed, repeat  
play mode changes as follows:  
The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (E) lights.  
The indication “DISC RPT” appears in  
the display for 2 seconds and then the  
repeat indicator (E) lights.  
The track being currently played is  
played repeatedly.  
When all the tracks on a disc being cur-  
rently played finish playing, play starts  
again at the beginning of the disc.  
TRACK REPEAT  
OFF  
DISC REPEAT  
66J144  
NOTE:  
This operation should be performed within  
2 seconds.  
To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-  
ton (5) several times to change the repeat  
play mode to OFF.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-48  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
To control the volume:  
To change the selection on a CD:  
To advance to the next track on a CD,  
push the upper part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
To select the previous track on a CD,  
push the lower part of the switch (4).  
Remote Audio Controls  
(if equipped)  
To increase the volume, push the upper  
part of the switch (1). The volume contin-  
ues to increase until you release the  
switch.  
To decrease the volume, push the lower  
part of the switch (1). The volume contin-  
ues to decrease until you release the  
switch.  
To mute, push the switch (2).  
To select the mode (AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2,  
XM (option), CD, External CD-changer  
(option), AUX (option)), push the switch  
(3).  
You can also turn on the audio system by  
pushing the switch (3).  
To change the radio station:  
To advance to the next preset station,  
push the upper part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
To select the previous preset station,  
push the lower part of the switch (4)  
briefly.  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
(4)  
To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-  
tion, push and hold the upper part of the  
switch (4).  
To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-  
tion, push and hold the lower part of the  
switch (4).  
64J041  
You can control basic functions of the  
audio system with the switches on the  
steering wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-49  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
(1) Power on/off knob  
(2) Track up button/Fast forward button  
(3) Preset buttons (1 to 6)  
Anti-Theft Feature  
Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
The anti-theft feature is intended to dis-  
courage theft or the audio system by pre-  
venting the system from operating when it  
is moved to a different vehicle.  
This feature works by allowing you to enter  
a Personal Identification Number (PIN).  
When the audio system is disconnected  
from its power source, such as when the  
audio system is removed or the battery is  
disconnected, the system will not operate  
again unless the PIN is reentered.  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL  
(2)  
(1)  
(3)  
66J223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-50  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Setting the Anti-Theft Function  
1) Turn off the power by pressing the  
power on/off knob (1).  
Canceling Your Established PIN  
Setting  
This operation is to be done when you  
want to cancel the anti-theft function or  
change your PIN.  
1) Turn off the power by pressing the  
power on/off knob (1).  
66J118  
4) After you enter your four digit PIN, the  
display will return to “0000”.  
66J118  
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while  
pressing and holding the track up but-  
ton (2). The “ENTRY 0000” will blink  
and the audio system enter PIN-input  
mode.  
EXAMPLE  
66J121  
2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while  
pressing and holding the track up but-  
ton (2). The “DELETE 0000” will blink  
and the audio system will enter the can-  
cel mode.  
NOTE:  
66J117  
Establish your PIN by combining numbers  
from 1 to 6 into any 4-digit number. If you  
forget your PIN, when you remove the bat-  
tery for repair etc., you will no longer be  
able to operate the audio system.  
5) Input the same 4-digit number you pre-  
viously entered.  
EXAMPLE  
66J120  
6) The power of the audio system will turn  
off.  
66J117  
3) Input the four digit PIN using preset but-  
tons 1 to 6.  
NOTE:  
Write down your PIN for the future use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-51  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
registered PIN, the power of the audio  
system will turn off, and you will be able  
to operate the audio system.  
Confirming Your Personal Identifi-  
cation Number (PIN)  
EXAMPLE  
When the main power source is discon-  
nected such as when you exchange your  
battery, etc, you will have to confirm your  
PIN to be able to use the audio system.  
NOTE:  
• If you input your PIN incorrectly, ----” will  
be displayed and the anti-theft function  
lock mode is entered. If you enter an  
incorrect PIN fewer than 6 times, the  
locking time will be for 15 seconds; if you  
enter an incorrect PIN more than 6  
times, the locking time will be for 15 min-  
utes.  
To confirm your PIN:  
• If you forget your PIN and enter a wrong  
PIN, you can not perform any further  
operation.  
66J124  
66J122  
3) Input your PIN. The power of the audio  
system will turn off and your PIN will be  
deleted.  
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”  
position.  
To change your PIN, first delete your  
current PIN, then set a new one.  
EXAMPLE  
66J125  
2) Input your PIN.  
If the PIN that you input matches the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-52  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Troubleshooting  
Applicable to every device  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Power is not turned on.  
(No sound is produced)  
Fuse is blown.  
Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
Connections are not properly made.  
Radio  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Too much noise.  
Not tuned correctly to the frequency of a sta- Tune correctly to the station frequency.  
tion.  
Stations cannot be selected by There is no station with strong radio waves.  
seek tuning.  
Select stations by manual tuning.  
CD  
Phenomenon  
Cause  
Remedy  
Compact disc cannot be loaded. Another compact disc is already loaded.  
Eject the compact disc before loading a new  
one.  
Sound skips or is noisy.  
Compact disc is dirty.  
Clean the compact disc with a soft cloth.  
Compact disc is heavily scratched or warped.  
Replace with a compact disc with no scratches.  
Sound is bad directly after power Water droplets may form on the internal lens Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.  
is turned on.  
when the car is parked in a humid place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-53  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
Error display  
This unit has a number of self-diagnostic functions to protect the system.  
If a problem should occur, the display shows the type of error. Refer to the table below and take proper measures to correct the problem.  
If the problem is corrected, the unit will operate normally.  
Error display  
Measures to be taken  
CD/CD changer “Mechanical error”.  
This error display indicates a mechanical failure in the CD changer  
(failure to change or eject a disc).  
The mechanism is probably damaged. Contact your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
CD/CD changer “Focus error”.  
The pick-up-focus is not properly functioning during playback due to  
damage on the disc or for other reasons.  
Check disc for damage.  
CD/CD changer “Disc error”.  
The CD is inserted upside down or only an eight-centimeter CD  
adapter is equipped.  
Check disc for correct loading.  
If an error display not listed above appears, turn off the unit and contact your SUZUKI dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-54  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-55  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 5-1  
Pedals ................................................................................... 5-1  
Gearshift Lever .................................................................... 5-2  
Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-3  
Folding Seats ....................................................................... 5-4  
Armrest ................................................................................ 5-7  
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-7  
Interior Light Switch ........................................................... 5-7  
Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-8  
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................. 5-9  
Front Seat Heater (if equipped) .......................................... 5-9  
Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-10  
Coat Hooks (if equipped) .................................................... 5-11  
Sunroof (if equipped) .......................................................... 5-11  
Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-13  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin (if equipped) ........................ 5-14  
Overhead Console Box (if equipped) ................................ 5-15  
Accessory Socket (if equipped) ......................................... 5-16  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray ............................................ 5-17  
Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-17  
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 5-18  
Shopping Hook (if equipped) ............................................. 5-19  
Front Seat Back Pocket (if equipped) ............................... 5-19  
Luggage Restraint Loops (if equipped) ............................ 5-19  
Luggage Compartment Cover ............................................ 5-20  
Underfloor Bins (if equipped) ............................................ 5-23  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-23  
HomeLink® (if equipped) .................................................... 5-25  
5
60G407  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
cult to shift out of “P” when you are ready  
to drive the vehicle. When preparing to  
drive the vehicle, move the gearshift lever  
out of the “P” position before releasing the  
parking brake.  
Parking Brake Lever  
Pedals  
Manual transmission  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
WARNING  
• Never drive your vehicle with the  
parking brake set: rear brake effec-  
tiveness can be reduced from over-  
heating, brake life may be  
shortened or permanent brake  
damage may result.  
• If the parking brake does not hold  
the vehicle securely or does not  
fully release, have your vehicle  
inspected immediately by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
(2)  
(3)  
(3)  
(2)  
(1)  
64J081  
64J082  
(1) To set  
(2) To release  
(3) To release  
Automatic transmission  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
The parking brake lever is located between  
the seats. To set the parking brake, hold  
the brake pedal down and pull the parking  
brake lever all the way up. To release the  
parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,  
pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,  
push the button on the end of the lever  
with your thumb and lower the lever to its  
original position.  
Always set the parking brake fully  
before leaving your vehicle or it may  
roll, causing injury or damage. When  
parking, make sure the gearshift  
lever for manual transmission vehi-  
cles is in 1st gear or “R” (Reverse)  
and the gearshift lever for automatic  
transmission vehicles is in “P”  
(Park). Never leave the transfer lever  
in “N” (Neutral) when you are parked.  
Remember, even though the trans-  
mission is in gear or in Park, you  
must set the parking brake fully.  
(3)  
(2)  
For automatic transmission vehicles,  
always set the parking brake before mov-  
ing the gearshift lever to the “P” (Park)  
position. If you park on an incline and shift  
into “P” before you set the parking brake,  
the weight of the vehicle may make it diffi-  
64J083  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Clutch Pedal (1)  
Gearshift Lever  
(For manual transmission)  
WARNING  
Manual transmission  
The clutch pedal is used to disengage the  
drive to the wheels when starting the  
engine, stopping or shifting the gearshift  
lever or transfer lever. Depressing the  
pedal disengages the clutch.  
Do not “ride” the brakes by applying  
them continuously or resting your  
foot on the pedal. This will result in  
overheating of the brakes which  
could cause unpredictable braking  
action, longer stopping distances or  
permanent brake damage.  
CAUTION  
Do not drive with your foot resting on  
the clutch pedal. It could result in  
excessive clutch wear or clutch dam-  
age.  
Accelerator Pedal (3)  
This pedal controls the speed of the  
engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal  
increases power output and speed.  
Brake Pedal (2)  
Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with  
front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.  
Depressing the brake pedal applies both  
sets of brakes.  
65D449  
5-speed automatic transmission  
You may hear occasional brake squeal  
when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-  
mal condition caused by environmental  
factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.  
WARNING  
If brake squeal is excessive and  
occurs each time the brakes are  
applied, you should have the brakes  
checked by your SUZUKI dealer.  
66J046  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2  
         
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Your vehicle is equipped with either a  
of the driver’s seat and can be locked by  
simply closing the door.  
Fuel Filler Cap  
manual transmission or automatic trans-  
mission. The gearshift lever for each trans-  
mission type is shown in the illustrations.  
For details on how to use the transmission,  
refer to the “Using the Transmission” in  
“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.  
Open  
Close  
64J085  
60G069  
To remove the fuel filler cap:  
1) Open the fuel filler door.  
EXAMPLE  
2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-  
clockwise.  
WARNING  
Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The  
fuel may be under pressure and may  
spray out, causing injury.  
To reinstall the fuel filler cap:  
1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear  
several clicks.  
64J253  
2) Close the fuel filler door.  
The fuel filler cap is located on the right  
rear side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door  
can be unlocked by pulling up on the  
opener lever located on the outboard side  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
3) Lower the adjustable head restraint  
fully.  
Folding Seats  
WARNING  
Folding Rear Seats  
Gasoline is extremely flammable. Do  
not smoke when refueling, and make  
sure there are no open flames or  
sparks in the area.  
To fold the rear seats forward:  
1) Remove the luggage compartment  
cover.  
WARNING  
If you need to replace the fuel cap,  
use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an  
improper cap can result in a malfunc-  
tion of the fuel system or emission  
control system. It may also result in  
fuel leakage in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
64J087  
4) Pull the release lever forward on the top  
of each split seat, and fold the seat-  
backs forward.  
66J211  
2) Stow the seat belt buckles of the center  
and left seating position into the pocket  
of the seat cushion as shown in the  
illustration.  
CAUTION  
Make sure the belt webbing is not  
caught by the seat.  
CAUTION  
When you fold the rear seatback for-  
ward, stow the seat belt buckles of  
the center and left seating position  
into the pocket first. This helps pre-  
vent being caught by the seat and  
being damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
     
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
(1)  
(4)  
64J088  
64J089  
66J196  
5) Pull the lock release strap (1) rearward  
to unlatch the seat cushion.  
6) Fold the entire seat forward.  
8) Hook the strap (4) to the front seat  
head restraint and re-tighten the  
adjuster (2) to apply a tension on the  
strap as shown in the illustration.  
WARNING  
When you unlatch the rear seat cush-  
ion, be careful that your face or  
hands are not injured from the seat  
popping up.  
CAUTION  
(2)  
When securing the folded rear seat  
with a strap, adjust the strap length  
so that the rear seat will not move.  
(3)  
66J195  
7) Push down the adjuster (2) to make the  
strap slack, and then unhook the strap  
by pushing down the hook (3).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Luggage or other cargo should be  
stowed in the luggage compartment  
with the rear seat in an upright posi-  
tion, whenever possible. If you need  
to carry cargo in the passenger com-  
partment with the rear seat back  
folded forward, be sure to secure the  
cargo or it may be thrown about,  
causing injury. Never pile cargo  
higher than the seatbacks.  
• When returning the rear seat cush-  
ion to the normal position, make  
sure that there is nothing around  
the striker. This prevents the seat  
cushion  
from  
being  
locked  
securely.  
• When returning the rear seat cush-  
ion to the normal position, make  
sure that there is nothing under the  
seat cushion. This prevents dam-  
age to the seat cushion.  
To return the seat to the normal position,  
follow the procedure below.  
64J091  
2) Pull down the seat cushion until it locks  
into place.  
WARNING  
When returning the rear seat cushion  
to the normal position, be careful that  
your finger is not caught between the  
lock and the floor.  
64J092  
3) Raise the seatback until it locks into  
place.  
64J175  
1) Unhook the strap from the head  
restraint and stow the strap to the back  
of the seat cushion.  
After returning the seat, try moving the  
seat and seatback to make sure they are  
securely latched.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Armrest  
Sun Visor  
Interior Light Switch  
Center  
Center Console Armrest  
EXAMPLE  
(3) (2) (1)  
79J161  
64J104  
The sun visors can be pulled down to block  
glare coming through the windshield, or  
they can be unhooked and turned to the  
side to block glare coming through the side  
window.  
64J263  
Rear  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage to the armrest, do  
not lean on it or allow a child to sit on  
it.  
CAUTION  
(3) (2) (1)  
When unhooking and hooking a sun  
visor, be sure to handle it by the hard  
plastic parts or the sun visor can be  
damaged.  
64J211  
This light switch has three positions which  
function as described below:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
           
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
(1) The light comes on and stays on  
regardless of whether the door is  
open or closed.  
(2) The light comes on when the door is  
opened.  
Spot Light  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
After closing all doors (including the  
tailgate), the light will remain on for  
about 15 seconds and then fade out.  
If you insert the key into the ignition  
switch during that time, the light will  
start to fade out immediately.  
After removing the key from the igni-  
tion switch, the light will turn on for  
about 15 seconds and then fade out.  
(3) The light remains off even when the  
door is opened.  
64J105  
NOTE:  
64J212  
The number of doors involved in the light-  
ing operation of the interior light depends  
on the vehicle specification. If there is a  
switch (rubber projection) at the door  
opening as shown, the door is involved in  
the lighting operation.  
Push the switch to turn on the light and  
push it again to turn off the light.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-8  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
remains off regardless of whether the  
door(s) is(are) opened or closed.  
Luggage Compartment Light  
Front Seat Heater  
(if equipped)  
(2)  
(1)  
EXAMPLE  
66J047  
The luggage compartment light is located  
at the left side of the rear luggage compart-  
ment.  
When you open any of the doors including  
the tailgate with the luggage compartment  
light switch in the “ON” position (1), the  
light comes on and remains on as long as  
you keep the door open.  
After closing all doors, the light will remain  
on for about 15 seconds and then fade out.  
If you insert the key into the ignition switch  
during that time, the light will start to fade  
out immediately.  
64J106  
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-  
tion, push in one or both of the seat heater  
switches to warm the corresponding  
seat(s). The indicator light below the  
switch will also come on. To turn off the  
seat heater, push in the switch again. The  
indicator light below the switch will go off.  
After removing the key from the ignition  
switch, the light will turn on for about 15  
seconds and then fade out.  
When the luggage compartment light  
switch is in the “OFF” position (2), the light  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Assist Grips (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the heater ele-  
ment:  
• Do not subject the front seats to  
heavy impacts, such as children  
jumping on them.  
• Do not cover the seat with any  
insulating materials such as blan-  
kets or cushions.  
86G064  
64J136  
WARNING  
Assist grips are provided for convenience.  
Improperly using the seat heater can  
be hazardous. An occupant can suf-  
fer burns even if the heating tempera-  
ture is fairly low, if the occupant is  
wearing thin pants, a thin skirt or  
shorts and leaves the heater on for  
long periods.  
Avoid using the seat heater for these  
occupants:  
• People who have reduced feeling in  
their legs, including the elderly or  
those with certain disabilities.  
• Small children, or anyone with sen-  
sitive skin.  
• People who are asleep or under the  
influence of alcohol or other drugs  
which make them tired.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Coat Hooks (if equipped)  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
You can tilt or slide the sunroof by operat-  
ing the “TILT” part of the sunroof switch or  
the “SLIDE” part of the sunroof switch  
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position.  
There is  
a
system to prevent being  
pinched by the sunroof.  
When the system senses that something is  
pinched when the sunroof is sliding for-  
ward, the sunroof will automatically  
reverse direction and slide rearward. This  
system will operate when the sunroof is  
closing automatically. This system does  
not operate when tilting the sunroof down.  
(2)  
(1)  
64J107  
To tilt the sunroof up, slide the sun shade  
rearward by hand and push the “TILT UP”  
part (1) of the sunroof switch. To tilt the  
sunroof down, push the “SLIDE OPEN”  
part (2) of the sunroof switch.  
If you push the switch for more than a sec-  
ond, the sunroof will automatically tilt up or  
down fully. To stop the sunroof halfway,  
push the switch briefly.  
64J137  
Make sure there are no hands or other  
obstructions in the path of the sunroof  
when you close the sunroof even though  
there is a system to prevent being pinched  
by the sunroof.  
You can hang clothing on the coat hooks.  
These hooks are not designed for large or  
heavy items.  
WARNING  
If your vehicle is equipped with side  
curtain air bags, do not hang sharp  
items like a hanger on the coat hook.  
When hanging the clothes, hang it on  
hook without using a hanger.  
WARNING  
• The system to prevent being  
pinched by the sunroof does not  
work in the area where the sunroof  
is almost completely closed.  
• The system to prevent being  
pinched by the sunroof may not  
work if the battery is not suffi-  
ciently charged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-11  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
How to reactivate the system to prevent  
being pinched by the sunroof  
When you disconnect the negative (–) ter-  
minal from the battery or change the fuses,  
the features below will not operate.  
• The system to prevent being pinched by  
the sliding sunroof.  
• The system to automatically open or  
close the sunroof fully.  
In this case, you must reactivate the fea-  
tures using the following procedures.  
1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”  
position.  
(2)  
(1)  
2) Push and hold the “TILT UP” part (1) of  
64J108  
64J109  
the sunroof switch, the sunroof will tilt  
up fully and then down slightly. After the  
movement stops completely, release  
the switch. The features are reacti-  
vated.  
To slide the sunroof rearward, push the  
“SLIDE OPEN” part (2) of the sunroof  
switch. To side the sunroof forward, push  
the “TILT UP” part (1) of the sunroof  
switch.  
If you push the switch for more than a sec-  
ond, the sunroof will automatically slide  
fully rearward or forward. To stop the sun-  
roof halfway, push the switch briefly.  
The sun shade will open automatically and  
cannot be closed when the sunroof is slid  
rearward.  
3) Make sure you can open or close the  
sunroof automatically by pushing the  
sunroof switch for more than about a  
second.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-12  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Engine Hood  
CAUTION  
Do not put your body weight on the  
roof around the sunroof such as by  
sitting on it.  
• Be sure to close the sunroof when you  
leave the vehicle unattended.  
• Periodically inspect the guide rail for dirt  
and clean it if any dirt has accumulated.  
65D612  
64J110  
WARNING  
To open the engine hood:  
1) Pull the hood release handle located on  
the outboard side of the driver’s side of  
the instrument panel. This will disen-  
gage the engine hood lock halfway.  
• Never allow any part of your body  
such as hands or head to get out of  
the sunroof opening while the vehi-  
cle is moving.  
• Be sure there are no hands or other  
obstructions in the path of the sun-  
roof when you close the sunroof.  
• Always remove the ignition key  
when leaving the vehicle even if for  
a short time. Also do not leave chil-  
dren alone in a parked vehicle.  
Unattended children could use the  
sunroof switches and get trapped  
by the sunroof.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-13  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin  
(if equipped)  
Cup holders and a storage bin are pro-  
vided as shown.  
EXAMPLE  
64J111  
64J112  
2) Push the under-hood release lever  
sideways with your finger, as shown in  
the illustration. While pushing the lever,  
lift up the engine hood.  
3) Continue to lift up the hood until it is  
high enough to support with the prop  
rod.  
64J113  
To close the engine hood:  
To access a bin, push the release button.  
1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the  
prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod  
back to the holding clip.  
2) Lower the hood close to the bumper,  
then let it drop down.  
Make sure the hood is securely latched  
after closing.  
WARNING  
Make sure the hood is fully closed  
and latched before driving. If it is not,  
it can fly up unexpectedly during  
driving, obstructing your view and  
resulting in an accident.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Overhead Console Box  
(if equipped)  
WARNING  
Do not use the cup holder or the stor-  
age bin to hold cups containing hot  
liquids or sharp-edged, hard or  
breakable objects. Objects in these  
bins may be thrown about during a  
sudden stop or impact, and could  
cause personal injury.  
(1)  
Bottle holder  
64J115  
To use the console bin, pull the lever up  
and open the lid.  
64J289  
To use the overhead console box, push on  
the front edge (1) and open the lid. To  
close the lid, push the front edge (1) until it  
latches. Do not put heavy or sharp items in  
the box.  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
64J200  
Never drive with the overhead con-  
sole box lid open. It could cause  
injury if an accident occurs.  
You should hold a bottle with a cap in the  
bottle holder.  
64J116  
To use the rear cup holders, open the lid.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-15  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
12-volt accessory sockets are located both  
on the center console and on the left side  
of the luggage compartment.  
Accessory Socket  
(if equipped)  
CAUTION  
If you park your vehicle outdoors in  
direct sunlight or in hot weather, the  
eyeglasses compartment can get  
very hot since it is close to the roof.  
So, when parking in such conditions:  
• Do not leave eyeglasses in the  
compartment. The heat may distort  
plastic lenses or frames.  
Depending on the specification, there are  
two sockets on the center console.  
EXAMPLE  
Each socket can be used to provide 12  
volt/120 watt power for electrical accesso-  
ries when used alone. Make sure that the  
cap remains on the socket when the  
socket is not in use.  
• Do not place flammable items,  
such as a lighter, in the compart-  
ment. The heat may cause a fire.  
CAUTION  
• To prevent the fuse from being  
blown, when using sockets at the  
same time, do not exceed the total  
combined power capacity of 120  
NOTE:  
An aftermarket garage door opener can be  
installed in the front side overhead console  
box.  
64J121  
watts.  
• Use of inappropriate electrical  
accessories can cause damage to  
your vehicle’s electrical system.  
Make sure that any electrical  
accessories you use are designed  
to plug into this type of socket.  
EXAMPLE  
64J120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-16  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Ashtray (if equipped)  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray  
Frame Hooks  
Front  
Cigarette Lighter (if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
(1)  
64J201  
You can fit the ashtray into any of the cup  
holders on the center console.  
64J122  
64J119  
Rear  
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the  
way into the receptacle and release it. It  
will automatically heat up and will pop out  
to its normal position when it is ready for  
use.  
WARNING  
Make sure tobacco is fully extin-  
guished before closing the ashtrays.  
Never throw waste in the ashtrays: it  
could create a fire hazard.  
CAUTION  
• Holding the cigarette lighter in can  
overheat and damage the lighter.  
Release the lighter after you push it  
in.  
• To avoid damage to the cigarette  
lighter socket, do not use it as an  
accessory power source. Some  
accessories’ power plug can dam-  
age the inner mechanism of the  
cigarette lighter socket.  
64J123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-17  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
WARNING  
Frame hooks are provided at the front and  
rear of the vehicle.  
Tire Changing Tool  
To access the front hook, unhook the  
lower part of the cover (1) and then  
remove the cover (1).  
After using the jack, extension rod  
and lug wrench, be sure to stow them  
securely, or they could be thrown  
about in an accident, causing injury.  
WARNING  
Do not use the frame hooks to tow  
another vehicle or to have your vehi-  
cle towed on the road or highway.  
The hooks are designed for use in  
emergency situations only, such as if  
your vehicle or another vehicle gets  
stuck in deep mud or snow.  
64J124  
The jack, wheel brace and jack handle are  
stowed in the rear left corner of the lug-  
gage compartment. Remove the cover to  
access the tools.  
To remove the jack, turn its shaft counter-  
clockwise and pull the jack out of the stor-  
age bracket. To stow the jack, place it in  
the storage bracket and turn the shaft  
clockwise until the jack is securely held in  
place.  
WARNING  
The jack should be used only to  
change wheels. It is important to read  
the jacking instructions in the  
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section of  
this manual before attempting to use  
the jack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-18  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Shopping Hook (if equipped)  
Front Seat Back Pocket  
(if equipped)  
Luggage Restraint Loops  
(if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
66J049  
The shopping hooks are located on both  
sides of the luggage compartment.  
64J127  
64J129  
This pocket is provided for holding light  
and soft things such as gloves, newspa-  
pers or magazines.  
Four luggage restraint loops are provided  
on the luggage compartment floor. An  
optional rubber net can be hooked to these  
loops to help keep cargo from moving  
around in the luggage compartment during  
normal driving.  
You can hang the shopping bag or other  
suitable objects on the hook. This hook is  
not designed for large or heavy items.  
WARNING  
Do not put hard or breakable objects  
in the pocket. If an accident occurs,  
objects such as bottles, cans, etc.  
can injure the occupants in the rear  
seat.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-19  
           
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
To remove the luggage compartment  
cover:  
Luggage Compartment Cover  
WARNING  
Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-  
gage compartment can be hidden from  
view by a luggage compartment cover.  
However, the luggage compartment cov-  
ers are not designed to support items  
loaded on top of them, and may get dam-  
aged if used as a shelf.  
The luggage restraint loops and  
optional rubber net can be used to  
help keep lightweight cargo from  
moving around in the luggage com-  
partment during normal driving. They  
are neither capable of nor intended  
for preventing cargo from being  
thrown around in a crash.  
Place heavier objects on the floor  
and as far forward in the cargo area  
as possible. Never pile cargo higher  
than the top of the seat backs.  
WARNING  
Do not carry items on top of the lug-  
gage compartment cover, even if they  
are small and light. Objects on top of  
the cover could be thrown about in  
an accident, causing injury, or could  
obstruct the driver’s rear view.  
(a)  
(a)  
66J203  
WARNING  
1) Release the three hooks (a) from the  
rear seat backs.  
Do not attach the child restraint top  
strap to the luggage restraint loops.  
Incorrectly attached top strap will  
reduce the intended effectiveness of  
the child restraint system.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the luggage com-  
partment cover:  
• Do not place items on top of it.  
• Do not push down on it or lean on  
it.  
• Handle it carefully when installing  
or removing.  
NOTE:  
The seatback should always be securely  
latched in a fairly upright position when  
removing or installing the luggage com-  
partment cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-20  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
clearance is established on the other  
end to swing the cover down and out.  
rear  
front  
(b)  
66J205  
3) Lift up both ends of the cover to disen-  
gage the attachment points (b).  
66J206  
5) Tilt the luggage compartment cover,  
and then remove the compartment  
cover from the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
When you place the end of the cover  
in the quarter window opening (c), be  
careful not to damage the window or  
other materials while positioning the  
compartment cover.  
(c)  
66J204  
2) Fold and roll the cover forward.  
66J228  
4) Place one end of the cover in the quar-  
ter window opening (c) so enough  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-21  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
To stow a luggage compartment cover  
on the floor of the rear luggage room:  
To reinstall the luggage compartment  
cover:  
(c)  
(d)  
(b)  
66J209  
2) Align the attachment points (d) on the  
cover with the attachment points (b) on  
the vehicle and push down both ends.  
Make sure that the cover securely fits in  
the attachment points.  
66J208  
1) Fold/roll the luggage compartment  
cover, and place one end in the quarter  
window opening (c) to swing the other  
end into position.  
66J207  
Tilt the cover, and fit it onto floor of the rear  
luggage room.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-22  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Underfloor Bins (if equipped)  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack  
Anchors (if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
Roof rails  
(e)  
(A)  
66J210  
3) Unroll/unfold the cover as you secure  
the other latches (e).  
64J132  
Pull up the straps (A) to open the bin.  
64J133  
CAUTION  
Roof rack anchors  
Do not allow items in the bins to  
extend above the top of the bin. Oth-  
erwise, the bin or luggage floor may  
be damaged.  
(1)  
(a)  
(a)  
66J229  
4) Reattach the three hooks (a) to the rear  
seat backs.  
64J224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-23  
       
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
WARNING  
You can use the roof rails or the roof rack  
anchors to attach the optional roof rack  
which is available at your SUZUKI dealer.  
If you use a roof rack, observe the instruc-  
tions and precautions in this section and  
provided with the roof rack.  
• Mount and secure the cargo onto the  
roof rack properly according to the  
instructions provided. Be sure to stow  
the heaviest items at the bottom and dis-  
tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.  
• Do not carry items so large that they  
hang over the bumpers or the sides of  
the vehicle, or block your view.  
• Abrupt maneuvers or failure to  
properly secure cargo can allow  
the cargo to fly off the vehicle and  
hit others, causing personal injury  
or property damage.  
(For vehicles with roof rack anchors)  
To remove the cap, slide the cap in the  
direction of the arrow (1) and then lift the  
edge of the cap up as shown in the illustra-  
tion. To install the cap, put in the front part  
of the cap, slide the cap in the opposite  
direction of the arrow (1) and then push  
down the rear part of the cap.  
• Mount cargo securely and avoid  
abrupt maneuvers such as “jack-  
rabbit” starts, sharp turns, fast cor-  
nering and sudden braking. Check  
periodically to make sure that  
cargo is securely fastened.  
• Large, bulky, long, or flat items can  
affect vehicle aerodynamics or be  
caught by the wind, and can reduce  
vehicle control resulting in an acci-  
dent and personal injury. Drive  
cautiously at reduced speed when  
carrying this type of cargo.  
• Secure the front and rear ends of long  
items – such as wood panels, surfboards  
and so forth – to both the front and rear  
of the vehicle. You should protect the  
painted surfaces of the vehicle from  
scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.  
• Check periodically to make sure the roof  
rack is securely installed and free from  
damage.  
• Make sure the roof rack is securely  
installed.  
• For vehicles with roof rack anchors,  
make sure the anchors are covered with  
the caps when not in use.  
To mount various types of cargo (such  
as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit-  
able attachments which are available  
from your SUZUKI dealer. Be sure to  
install the attachments properly and  
securely according to the instructions  
provided. Do not mount cargo directly on  
the roof panel. The cargo can damage  
the roof panel.  
• The gross weight of the roof rack plus  
cargo must not exceed the loading  
capacity (75 kg (165 lbs)). Also, do not  
let the gross vehicle weight (fully loaded  
vehicle including driver, passengers,  
cargo, roof load and trailer tongue  
weight) exceed the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) listed on the  
driver’s door lock pillar.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-24  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
®
®
dards (this includes any garage door  
opener model manufactured before April 1,  
1982). A garage door that cannot detect an  
object – signaling the door to stop and  
reverse – does not meet current U.S. fed-  
HomeLink button. Begin with “Program-  
HomeLink (if equipped)  
®
ming HomeLink ” – step 2).  
eral safety standards. For more informa-  
®
tion,  
contact  
HomeLink  
at  
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-  
355-3515.  
66J092  
Retain the original transmitter of the RF  
device you are programming for use in  
other vehicles as well as for future  
®
®
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are  
registered  
trademarks  
of  
Johnson  
Controls, Inc.  
®
HomeLink programming. It is also sug-  
gested that upon the sale of the vehicle,  
®
the programmed HomeLink buttons be  
®
The HomeLink Wireless Control System  
provides a convenient way to replace up to  
three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)  
transmitters used to activate devices such  
as gate operators, garage door openers,  
entry door locks, security systems, even  
erased for security purposes. Refer to  
66J050  
®
“Programming HomeLink ” (step 1) only)  
®
1) Press and hold the two outer  
or, for assistance, contact HomeLink at  
®
HomeLink buttons (buttons one and  
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-  
355-3515.  
three) – releasing only when the indica-  
tor light begins to flash (after 20 sec-  
onds). Do not hold the buttons for  
longer than 30 seconds and do not  
repeat step 1) to program a second  
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the  
®
home lighting. Additional HomeLink infor-  
®
Programming HomeLink  
mation can be found on the Internet at  
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-  
355-3515.  
NOTE:  
Some vehicles may require the ignition  
switch to be turned to the second (or  
“accessories”) position or the “on” position  
for programming and/or operation of  
®
®
remaining two HomeLink buttons.  
Before programming HomeLink  
to  
a
2) Position the end of your hand-held  
transmitter 5–14 cm (1–3 inches) away  
garage door opener or gate operator,  
make sure that people and objects are out  
of the way of the device to prevent poten-  
tial harm or damage. When programming a  
garage door opener, it is advised to park  
outside of the garage. Do not use  
®
HomeLink . It is also recommended that a  
®
from the HomeLink button you wish to  
new battery be placed in the hand-held  
transmitter of the device being pro-  
program while keeping the indicator  
light in view.  
®
grammed to HomeLink for quicker train-  
3) Simultaneously press and hold both the  
ing and accurate transmission of the radio-  
frequency signal. Do not repeat “Program-  
®
®
chosen HomeLink  
and hand-held  
HomeLink with any garage door opener  
®
transmitter buttons. Do not release the  
buttons until step 4) has been com-  
pleted.  
ming HomeLink ” – step 1) to train addi-  
that lacks safety stop and reverse features  
as required by U.S. federal safety stan-  
tional devices to  
a
second or third  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-25  
   
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
®
NOTE:  
HomeLink ” steps 6–8 to complete the  
programming of rolling code  
6) At the garage door opener receiver  
Some gate operators and garage door  
openers may require you to replace this  
Programming step 3) with procedures  
noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian  
Programming” section.  
a
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate  
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can  
usually be found where the hanging  
antenna wire is attached to the motor-  
head unit.  
equipped device (most commonly a  
garage door opener).  
7) Firmly press and release the “learn” or  
“smart” button. (The name and color of  
the button may vary by manufacturer.)  
®
4) After the HomeLink indicator light  
changes from a slow to a rapidly blink-  
®
ing light, release both the HomeLink  
and hand-held transmitter buttons.  
NOTE:  
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate  
step 8).  
NOTE:  
®
If the HomeLink indicator light does not  
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact  
8) Return to the vehicle and firmly press,  
®
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call  
hold for two seconds and release the  
®
1-800-355-3515 for assistance.  
programmed  
Repeat the  
HomeLink  
button.  
“press/hold/release”  
66J051  
5) Press and hold the just-trained  
sequence a second time, and, depend-  
ing on the brand of the garage door  
opener (or other rolling code equipped  
device), repeat this sequence a third  
time to complete the programming pro-  
cess.  
®
HomeLink button and observe the  
indicator light.  
– If the indicator light stays on con-  
stantly, programming is complete and  
your device should activate when the  
®
®
HomeLink button is pressed and  
released.  
HomeLink should now activate your  
rolling code equipped device.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons, begin with “Programming  
HomeLink ” – step 2). Do not repeat step  
1).  
®
®
To program the remaining two HomeLink  
buttons,  
begin  
with  
“Programming  
®
®
HomeLink ” – step 2). Do not repeat step  
1).  
– If the indicator light blinks rapidly for  
two seconds and then turns to a con-  
stant light continue with “Programming  
For questions or comments, please con-  
66J052  
®
tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or  
1-800-355-3515.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-26  
OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT  
®
2) The indicator light will begin to flash  
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the  
Gate Operator / Canadian Program-  
ming  
Using HomeLink  
To operate, simply press and release the  
programmed HomeLink button. Activation  
®
®
HomeLink button, proceed with “Pro-  
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)  
after several seconds of transmission –  
which may not be long enough for  
®
gramming HomeLink ” – step 2).  
will now occur for the trained device (i.e.  
garage door opener, gate operator, secu-  
rity system, entry door lock, home/office  
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-  
held transmitter of the device may also be  
used at any time. In the event that there  
For questions or comments, contact  
®
®
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-  
HomeLink to pick up the signal during  
800-355-3515.  
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,  
some U.S. gate operators are designed to  
“time-out” in the same manner.  
are still programming difficulties or ques-  
®
tions,  
contact  
HomeLink  
at  
If you live in Canada or you are having dif-  
ficulties programming a gate operator by  
using the Programming procedures  
(regardless of where you live), replace  
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.  
®
Erasing HomeLink Buttons  
To erase programming from the three but-  
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased  
but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined  
below), follow the step noted:  
®
“Programming HomeLink ” step 3) with  
the following:  
NOTE:  
®
If programming a garage door opener or  
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the  
device during the “cycling” process to pre-  
vent possible overheating.  
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink  
buttons until the indicator light begins to  
flash-after 20 seconds. Release both but-  
tons. Do not hold for longer that 30 sec-  
®
onds. HomeLink is now in the train (or  
3) Continue to press and hold the  
learning) mode and can be programmed at  
any time beginning with “Programming  
®
HomeLink button while you press and  
release – every two seconds (“cycle”)  
your hand-held transmitter until the fre-  
quency signal has successfully been  
®
HomeLink ” – step 2).  
Reprogramming a Single  
®
accepted by HomeLink . (The indicator  
®
HomeLink Button  
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.)  
®
To program a device to HomeLink using a  
®
®
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink ”  
HomeLink button previously trained, fol-  
step 4) to complete.  
low these steps:  
®
1) Press and hold the desired HomeLink  
button. DO NOT release the button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-27  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 6-1  
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 6-2  
Starting the Engine ............................................................. 6-2  
Engine Block Heater (if equipped) ..................................... 6-4  
Using the Transmission ..................................................... 6-5  
Using the Transfer Switch (if equipped) ........................... 6-7  
Braking ................................................................................. 6-15  
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) ................................. 6-18  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
(if equipped) ......................................................................... 6-21  
Break-In ................................................................................ 6-25  
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 6-25  
Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 6-26  
6
60G408  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Exhaust Gas Warning  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Do not park with the engine run-  
ning for a long period of time, even  
in an open area. If it is necessary to  
sit for a short time in a parked vehi-  
cle with the engine running, make  
sure the air intake lever is set to  
“FRESH AIR” and the fan is at high  
speed.  
• Have the exhaust system inspected  
periodically for damage and leaks.  
Any damage or leaks should be  
repaired immediately.  
• Avoid operating the vehicle with  
the rear side door, tailgate or rear  
window open. If it is necessary to  
operate the vehicle with the rear  
side door, tailgate or rear window  
open, make sure the folding sun-  
roof (if equipped) and all the win-  
dows are closed, and the fan is at  
high speed with the air intake  
selector set to “FRESH AIR”.  
52D334  
WARNING  
Avoid breathing exhaust gases.  
Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-  
oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is  
colorless and odorless. Since carbon  
monoxide is difficult to detect by  
itself, be sure to take the following  
precautions to help prevent carbon  
monoxide from entering your vehicle.  
• Do not leave the engine running in  
garages or other confined areas.  
(Continued)  
• To allow proper operation of your  
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep  
the air inlet grille in front of the  
windshield clear of snow, leaves or  
other obstructions at all times.  
• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear  
of snow and other material to help  
reduce the buildup of exhaust  
gases under the vehicle. This is  
particularly important when parked  
in blizzard conditions.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-1  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
11)Make sure that all warning lights come  
on as the key is turned to the “ON” or  
“START” position.  
Daily Inspection Checklist  
Starting the Engine  
Before Driving  
Before Starting the Engine  
1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.  
2) Manual Transmission – Shift into “N”  
(Neutral) and depress the clutch pedal  
all the way to the floor.  
12)Check all gauges.  
1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights  
and reflectors are clean and unob-  
structed.  
13)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM  
WARNING light turns off when the  
parking brake is released.  
2) Visually check the tires for the following  
points:  
– the depth of the tread groove  
– abnormal wear, cracks and damage  
– loose wheel nuts  
– existence of foreign material such as  
nails, stones, etc.  
Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE” section for details.  
3) Look for fluid, oil leaks.  
Hold it while starting the engine.  
Automatic Transmission – If the gear-  
shift lever is not in “P” (Park) position,  
shift into “P”. (If you need to re-start the  
engine while the vehicle is moving, shift  
into “N”.)  
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel  
tank, perform the following under-hood  
checks:  
1) Engine oil level  
2) Coolant level  
3) Brake fluid level  
4) Power steering (if equipped) fluid level  
5) Windshield washer fluid level  
6) Hood latch operation  
NOTE:  
The engine of manual transmission vehicle  
will not start unless the clutch pedal is  
depressed.  
NOTE:  
Pull the hood release handle inside the  
vehicle. Make sure that you cannot  
open the hood all the way without  
releasing the secondary latch. Be sure  
to close the hood securely after check-  
ing for proper latch operation. See the  
item “All Latches, Hinges and Locks” of  
“CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic  
It is normal for water to drip from the air  
conditioning system after use.  
NOTE:  
Automatic transmission vehicles have a  
starter interlock device which is designed  
to keep the starter from operating if the  
transmission is in any of the drive posi-  
tions.  
4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and  
latched.  
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,  
brake lights and horn for proper opera-  
tion.  
6) Lock all doors.  
7) Adjust the seat and adjustable head  
restraints (if equipped).  
8) Check the brake pedal and the parking  
brake lever.  
9) Adjust the mirrors.  
Maintenance  
Schedule”  
in  
the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for lubrication schedule.  
WARNING  
Make sure that the parking brake is  
set fully and the transmission is in  
Neutral (or Park for vehicles with an  
WARNING  
Make sure the hood is fully closed  
and latched before driving. If it is not,  
it can fly up unexpectedly during  
driving, obstructing your view and  
resulting in an accident.  
automatic  
transmission)  
before  
attempting to start the engine.  
10)Make sure that you and all passengers  
have properly fastened your seat belts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2  
       
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Starting a Cold Engine  
Starting a Warm Engine  
Use the same procedure as for “Starting a  
Cold Engine”.  
With your foot off the accelerator pedal,  
crank the engine by turning the ignition key  
to “START”. Release the key when the  
engine starts.  
Vehicle With Keyless Start System  
CAUTION  
• Stop turning the starter immedi-  
ately after the engine has started or  
the starter system can be dam-  
aged.  
• Do not crank the engine for more  
than 15 seconds at a time. If the  
engine doesn’t start on the first try,  
wait about 15 seconds before try-  
ing again.  
EXAMPLE  
66J022  
If the keyless start system blue indicator  
light illuminates on the instrument cluster,  
you can turn the ignition switch. If the red  
indicator light illuminates, you can not turn  
the ignition switch.  
If the engine does not start after 15 sec-  
onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,  
then press down the accelerator pedal to  
1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engine  
again. Release the key and accelerator  
pedal when the engine starts.  
63J265  
The ignition switch can be operated when  
the remote controller is in the vehicle  
except the rear luggage area. To turn the  
ignition switch, push the switch first.  
NOTE:  
• The ignition switch can be turned to the  
“ACC” position when the keyless start  
system blue indicator light illuminates.  
The blue indicator light will illuminate for  
several seconds and then turn off to pro-  
tect the system. In this case, you must  
release the ignition switch once and  
push the switch again.  
If the engine still does not start, try holding  
the accelerator pedal all the way to the  
floor while cranking. This should clear the  
engine if it is flooded.  
NOTE:  
You must push in the ignition switch to turn  
it from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”  
position. To return to the “LOCK” position  
from the “ACC” position, turn the ignition  
switch counterclockwise while pushing in  
the switch.  
If you are unable to start the engine using  
this procedure, consult your SUZUKI  
dealer.  
• If the keyless start system red indicator  
light illuminates, the remote controller  
may not be in the vehicle or the battery  
of the remote controller may be unreli-  
able.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
 
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
When the remote controller is in the vehi-  
cle except the rear luggage area, you can  
turn the ignition switch without using an  
ignition key.  
NOTE:  
Engine Block Heater  
(if equipped)  
Activate the heater at least four hours  
before you start the engine. However, as  
the heating time varies depending on the  
ambient temperature and other factors,  
adjust the time by observing the engine  
cranking condition.  
NOTE:  
• If the battery of the remote controller  
runs down or there are strong radio  
waves or noise, the operating range may  
be narrower or the remote controller may  
be inoperative.  
WARNING  
To avoid serious personal injury  
caused by electrical shock or fire:  
• Do not plug the cord into a non-  
grounded outlet. Only use a prop-  
erly grounded three-prong 110-volt  
AC outlet.  
• If the remote controller is too close to the  
door glass, it may not operate.  
• The ignition switch may not turn when  
the remote controller is on the instru-  
ment panel, in the glove box, in the door  
pocket, in the sun visor or on the floor.  
• Do not use a 2-wire (non-grounded)  
extension cord.  
65D420  
• Only use a heavy-duty, three-prong  
extension cord rated for at least 15  
amps.  
CAUTION  
The engine block heater will help you start  
the engine more easily in very cold  
weather (–18°C (0°F) or below). To use the  
engine block heater:  
The remote controller is a sensitive  
electronic instrument. To avoid dam-  
aging it, do not expose it to impacts,  
moisture or high temperature (such  
as on the dashboard under direct  
sunlight).  
After using the block heater:  
1) Unplug the extension cord and reinstall  
the plug cap.  
2) Tie the block heater cord back to its  
original position.  
1) Turn off the engine.  
2) Open the engine hood.  
3) Untie the block heater cord and remove  
the block heater plug cap. When the  
engine block heater is not in use,  
ensure the heater cord is secured to  
prevent contact with any moving parts.  
You can also turn the ignition switch by  
inserting the ignition key into the slot.  
CAUTION  
4) Using  
a
heavy-duty, three-prong  
Secure the block heater cord back to  
its original position or to the routed  
position. A loose cord could get  
caught in the engine accessory drive  
belt(s) or other moving parts.  
grounded extension cord, plug the  
female end into the block heater socket  
and the male end into a normal,  
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
3) Close the engine hood securely before  
starting the engine.  
Gearshift lever  
Using the Transmission  
5-Speed Automatic Transmission  
66J004  
The gearshift lever is designed so that it  
can not be shifted out of the “P” position  
unless the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position and the brake pedal is depressed.  
66J003  
D:  
5-speed automatic transmission mode  
4:  
4-speed automatic transmission mode  
WARNING  
Always depress the brake pedal  
before shifting from “P” (Park) (or  
“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-  
ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to  
help prevent the vehicle from moving  
unexpectedly when you shift.  
The 4-speed mode is suitable for the fol-  
lowing driving conditions:  
• Driving on hilly, winding roads  
You can drive more smoothly with less  
frequent gearshifting  
• Going down a steep hill  
– Some engine braking is provided  
NOTE:  
With the transfer switch in the “4L LOCK”  
position, the 5-speed automatic transmis-  
sion will remain in the 4-speed mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION  
Use the gearshift lever positions as  
described below:  
speed is, the more you will need to press  
the accelerator pedal to get a downshift.  
P (Park)  
4 (Low 3)  
Be sure to take the following precau-  
tions to help avoid damage to the  
automatic transmission:  
• Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped before shifting into  
“P” or “R”.  
• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,  
“D”, “4”, “3” or “Lwhen the  
engine is running above idle speed.  
• Do not rev the engine with the  
transmission in a drive position  
(“R”, “D”, “4”, “3” or “L) and the  
rear wheels not moving.  
• Do not use the accelerator to hold  
the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-  
cle’s brakes.  
Use this position to lock the transmission  
when the vehicle is parked or when start-  
ing the engine. Shift into Park only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
Use this position for driving on moderate  
uphill and downhill gradients. The engine  
braking effect on moderate downhills can  
be used in this position. The transmission  
shifts up only to 4th gear.  
WARNING  
3 (Low 2)  
Use this position to provide extra power  
when climbing hills, or to provide engine  
braking when going down hills.  
If you have a 4-wheel drive vehicle,  
never leave the transfer switch in “N”  
(Neutral) position when parked.  
Otherwise the vehicle may roll even if  
the transmission is in Park.  
L (Low 1)  
Use this position to provide maximum  
power when climbing steep hills or driving  
through deep snow or mud, or to provide  
maximum engine braking when going  
down steep hills.  
R (Reverse)  
Use this position to back the vehicle from  
stop. Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped before shifting into  
Reverse.  
Emergency shifting out of “P” (Park)  
If you are unable to shift the transmission  
out of Park in the normal manner, see “If  
You Can Not Shift Automatic Transmission  
Gearshift Lever Out Of “P” (PARK)” in the  
INDEX for what to do.  
NOTE:  
If you move the gearshift lever to a lower  
gear while driving faster than the maximum  
allowable speed for the lower gear, the  
transmission will not actually downshift  
until your speed drops below the maximum  
speed for the lower gear.  
N (Neutral)  
Use this position for starting the engine if  
the engine stalls and you need to restart it  
while the vehicle is moving. You may also  
shift into Neutral and depress the brake  
pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during  
idling.  
D (Drive)  
Use this position for all normal driving.  
With the selector in “D” range, you can get  
an automatic downshift by pressing the  
accelerator pedal. The higher the vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Manual Transmission  
Using the Transfer Switch  
(if equipped)  
WARNING  
• Reduce your speed and downshift  
to a lower gear before going down  
a long or steep hill. Downshifting  
will allow the engine to provide  
braking. Avoid riding the brakes or  
they may overheat, resulting in  
brake failure.  
• When driving on slippery roads, be  
sure to slow down before down-  
shifting.  
Large  
and  
sudden  
changes in engine speed may  
cause loss of traction, which could  
cause you to lose control.  
65D449  
• Make sure that the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped before you shift  
into reverse.  
Starting off  
66J168  
To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the  
way to the floor and shift into 1st gear.  
After releasing the parking brake, gradually  
release the clutch. When you hear a  
change in the engine’s sound, slowly press  
the accelerator while continuing to gradu-  
ally release the clutch.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a four-mode  
full-time 4x4 system. You can use the  
transfer switch to select any of the four  
modes: N, 4H, 4H LOCK, 4L LOCK.  
CAUTION  
• To help avoid clutch damage, do  
not use the clutch pedal as a foot-  
rest while driving or use the clutch  
to keep the vehicle stationary on a  
hill. Depress the clutch fully when  
shifting.  
• When shifting or starting off, do not  
race the engine. Racing the engine  
can shorten engine life and affect  
smooth shifting.  
Shifting  
All forward gears are synchronized, which  
provides for quiet, and easy shifting.  
Always push in the clutch pedal fully before  
shifting gears. Make sure the engine speed  
does not rise into the red zone of the  
tachometer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
(1) Front differential  
(2) Engine  
(3) Transmission  
(4) High/Low clutch  
(5) Transfer case  
(6) Center differential  
(7) Differential lock clutch  
(8) Chain  
(9) Rear propeller shaft  
(10) Rear differential  
(11) Front propeller shaft  
(4)  
(6)  
(7)  
(9)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
(8)  
(10)  
(1)  
(11)  
64J143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
In this position, engine power is not sup-  
plied to the front or rear axles. Only use  
this position for towing your vehicle.  
When you turn the transfer switch to the  
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with  
the buzzer sound.  
Description of Transfer Switch Positions  
N (Neutral)  
WARNING  
Never leave the transfer switch in “N”  
(Neutral) when parked.  
When the transfer switch is in “N”  
(Neutral), the vehicle may roll even if  
the transmission is in gear or in Park.  
64J223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4H (4-wheel drive high range)  
In this position, engine power is supplied to  
the front and rear axles. Use this position  
for normal driving.  
64J220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4H LOCK (4-wheel drive high range center differential lock)  
In this position, engine power is supplied to  
the front and rear axles and you get better  
traction than when driving in “4H”. Use this  
position when you need better traction  
than “4H” provides, such as when driving  
on slippery roads etc.  
64J221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
4L LOCK (4-wheel drive low range center differential lock)  
In this position, engine power is supplied to  
the front and rear axles and you get better  
traction and more low-speed torque than  
when driving in “4H”. Use this position  
when you need better traction than “4H”  
provides and more low-speed torque than  
“4H LOCK” provides, such as when climb-  
ing or descending steep, slippery hills etc.  
NOTE:  
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
canceled to provide improved vehicle trac-  
tion, and the “ESP OFF” indicator light will  
come on.  
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, brake-  
traction control can be activated. Brake-  
traction control brakes the spinning wheel  
to distribute drive power to the other  
wheels for increased climbing ability or for  
better performance on a rolling hill or a  
slippery surface.  
®
ESP  
is  
a
registered trademark of  
DaimlerChrysler AG.  
64J222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
transfer switch. Be sure to wait until traf-  
fic conditions allow you to accelerate and  
decelerate safety before using this pro-  
cedure.  
NOTE:  
Transfer Switch Operation  
Operate the transfer switch according to  
the appropriate procedure described  
below:  
• When shifting between the transfer  
switch position and the transfer gear  
position is unmatched, all 4WD indica-  
tors will blink and the buzzer will sound.  
• If it is difficult to shift between “4H” and  
“4H LOCK” while the vehicle is moving,  
try accelerating and decelerating your  
vehicle several times after turning the  
transfer switch. Be sure to wait until traf-  
fic conditions allow you to accelerate and  
decelerate safety before using this pro-  
cedure.  
From 4H LOCK to 4L LOCK  
From N to 4H  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to shift into “4L LOCK”.  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to shift into “4H”.  
From 4L LOCK to 4H LOCK  
From 4H to 4H LOCK  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to shift into “4H LOCK”.  
You can operate the transfer switch either  
when the vehicle is stopped or while the  
vehicle is moving.  
From 4H to N  
Position the front wheels straight ahead  
and turn the switch to shift into “4H LOCK”.  
If the vehicle is moving, we recommend  
that the speed be less than 100 km/h (60  
mph) during this operation.  
(1)  
From 4H LOCK to 4H  
You can operate the transfer switch either  
when the vehicle is stopped or while the  
vehicle is moving.  
CAUTION  
Position the front wheels straight ahead  
and turn the switch to shift into “4H”. If the  
vehicle is moving, we recommend that the  
speed be less than 100 km/h (60 mph) dur-  
ing this operation.  
Do not operate the transfer switch  
while tires are racing.  
NOTE:  
• When shifting between the transfer  
switch position and the transfer gear  
position is unmatched, all 4WD indica-  
tors will blink and the buzzer will sound.  
• If it is difficult to shift between “4H” and  
“4H LOCK” while the vehicle is moving,  
try accelerating and decelerating your  
vehicle several times after turning the  
64J209  
CAUTION  
Stop the vehicle completely, place the  
transmission in “N” (Neutral) and depress  
the brake pedal and the clutch pedal fully  
(if equipped), then push in and turn the  
switch to the mark (1) at the left of the “N”  
position, and hold the switch in this posi-  
Do not operate the transfer switch  
while tires are racing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION  
tion for 5 seconds until the “N” indicator  
blinks, then turn the switch to the “N” posi-  
tion.  
When you turn the transfer switch to the  
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with  
the buzzer sound.  
CAUTION  
• Be sure to stop the vehicle com-  
pletely before operating the trans-  
fer switch to shift between “N” and  
“4H”, or between “4H LOCK” and  
“4L LOCK”.  
(Continued)  
• Do not operate the vehicle while a  
4WD mode indicator is blinking  
except when shifting between “4H”  
and “4L LOCK”.  
• Do not shift between “4H” and “4H  
LOCK” unless the front wheels are  
in the straight-ahead position and  
we recommend that the vehicle  
speed be less than 100 km/h (60  
mph).  
If you operate the vehicle while a  
4WD mode indicator is blinking, a  
buzzer will sound and the transfer  
will shift to “N” (Neutral) to prevent  
transfer case damage.  
In this case, use the following pro-  
cedure.  
Do not operate the transfer switch  
while tires are racing.  
1) Depress the clutch pedal fully (if  
equipped) or shift the automatic  
transmission gearshift lever to the  
“N” position.  
2) Turn the transfer switch to the  
position previously selected.  
3) Operate the transfer switch again.  
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry, hard  
surfaces.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-14  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
The basic operation for transfer switch  
Braking  
Current  
Target  
Current Indicator  
Position  
Target Indicator  
Position  
N
4H  
N
4H  
4H LOCK  
4H  
60G165  
The distance needed to bring any vehicle  
to a halt increases with the speed of the  
vehicle. The braking distance needed, for  
example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be  
approximately 4 times greater than the  
braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19  
mph). Start to brake the vehicle when there  
is plenty of distance between your vehicle  
and the stopping point, and slow down  
gradually.  
4H LOCK  
4L LOCK  
4L LOCK  
4H LOCK  
N: Neutral  
4H: 4-wheel drive high range mode  
4H LOCK: 4-wheel drive high range center differential lock mode  
4L LOCK: 4-wheel drive low range center differential lock mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-15  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-  
tronically controlling braking pressure. It  
will also help you maintain steering control  
when braking on slippery surfaces or when  
braking hard.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
If water gets into the brake drums,  
brake performance may become poor  
and unpredictable. After driving  
through water or washing the under-  
side of the vehicle, test the brakes  
while driving at a slow speed to see if  
they have maintained their normal  
effectiveness. If the brakes are less  
effective than normal, dry them by  
repeatedly applying the brakes while  
driving slowly until the brakes have  
regained their normal effectiveness.  
Even without reserve power in the  
brake system, you can still stop the  
vehicle by pressing the brake pedal  
harder than normally required. How-  
ever, the stopping distance may be  
longer.  
The ABS works automatically, so you do  
not need any special braking technique.  
Just push the brake pedal down without  
pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it  
senses that the wheels are locking up.  
Brake Assist System  
When you slam the brakes on, the brake  
assist system judges as an emergency  
stop and provides more powerful braking  
for a driver who cannot hold down the  
brake pedal firmly.  
You may feel the brake pedal pulsate while  
the ABS is operating.  
NOTE:  
Power Assisted Brakes  
The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is  
under 5 – 6 km/h (3 – 4 mph).  
Your vehicle has power assisted brakes. If  
power assistance is lost due to a stalled  
engine or other failures, the system is still  
fully operational on reserve power and you  
can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by  
pressing the brake pedal once and holding  
it down. The reserve power is partly used  
up when you depress the brake pedal and  
reduces each time the pedal is pressed.  
Apply smooth and even pressure to the  
pedal. Do not pump the pedal.  
NOTE:  
If you depress the brakes forcefully, you  
may hear a clicking sound in the brake  
pedal. This is normal and indicates that the  
brake assist system is activated properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-16  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
• On some types of loose surfaces  
(such as gravel, snow-covered  
roads, etc.), the stopping distance  
required for an ABS-equipped vehi-  
cle may be slightly greater than for  
a comparable vehicle with a con-  
ventional brake system. With a  
conventional brake system, skid-  
ding tires are able to “plow” the  
gravel or snow layer, shortening  
the stopping distance. ABS mini-  
mizes this resistance effect. Allow  
for extra stopping distance when  
driving on loose surfaces.  
• On regular paved roads, some driv-  
ers may be able to obtain slightly  
shorter stopping distances with  
conventional brake systems than  
with ABS.  
• In both of the above conditions,  
ABS will still offer the advantage of  
helping you maintain directional  
control. However, remember that  
ABS will not compensate for bad  
road or weather conditions or poor  
driver judgment. Use good judg-  
ment and do not drive faster than  
conditions will safely allow.  
or  
or  
(1)  
(2)  
54G140  
WARNING  
If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2)) on  
the instrument panel comes on and  
stays on while driving, there may be a  
problem with the ABS system.  
If this happens:  
1) Pull off the road and stop care-  
fully.  
2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”  
and then start the engine again.  
If the warning light comes on briefly  
then turns off, the system is normal.  
If the warning light still stays on,  
have the system inspected by your  
SUZUKI dealer immediately. If the  
ABS system becomes inoperative,  
the brake system will function as an  
ordinary brake system that has no  
ABS.  
(3)  
65D451  
WARNING  
If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2))  
and the Brake system warning light  
(3) on the instrument panel simulta-  
neously stay on or come on when  
driving, both anti-lock function and  
rear brake force control function  
(Proportioning valve function) of the  
ABS system may have failed. This  
could cause the rear wheels to skid  
or the vehicle to spin during braking  
on a slippery road or hard braking on  
a dry paved road. If both warning  
lights come on, drive carefully, avoid-  
ing hard braking as much as possi-  
ble, and ask your SUZUKI dealer to  
inspect the ABS system immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-17  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
®
The ESP has the following three systems:  
How the ABS Works  
Electronic Stability Program  
A computer continuously monitors wheel  
speed. The computer compares the  
changes in wheel speed when braking. If  
the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a  
skidding situation, the computer will  
change braking pressure several times  
each second to prevent the wheels from  
locking. When you start your vehicle or  
when you accelerate after a hard stop, you  
may hear a momentary motor or clicking  
sound as the system resets or checks  
itself.  
®
(ESP )  
Stability Control System  
®
ESP  
is  
a
registered trademark of  
The vehicle stability control system helps  
provide integrated control of systems such  
as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine  
control, etc. This system automatically  
controls the brakes and engine to help pre-  
vent the vehicle from skidding when cor-  
nering on a slippery road surface or when  
turning the steering wheel abruptly.  
DaimlerChrysler AG.  
®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP )  
helps to control the vehicle during corner-  
ing if the vehicle is understeering or over-  
steering. It also assists you in maintaining  
traction while accelerating on loose or slip-  
pery road surfaces. It does this by regulat-  
ing the engine’s output, and by selectively  
applying the brakes. In addition, ESP  
helps to avoid skidding by controlling brak-  
ing pressure.  
Traction Control System  
The traction control system automatically  
helps prevent the spinning of wheels when  
the vehicle is started or accelerated on  
slippery road surfaces. The system oper-  
ates only if it senses that some of the  
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose  
traction. When this happens, the system  
operates the front or rear brakes and  
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.  
®
WARNING  
The ABS may not work properly if  
tires or wheels other than those  
specified in the owner’s manual are  
used. This is because the ABS works  
by comparing changes in wheel  
speed. When replacing tires or  
wheels, use only the size and type  
specified in this owner’s manual.  
WARNING  
®
The ESP cannot enhance the vehi-  
cle’s driving stability in all situations  
and does not control your vehicle’s  
®
entire braking system. The ESP can-  
NOTE:  
not prevent accidents, including  
those resulting from excessive speed  
in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe  
and attentive driver can prevent acci-  
You may hear a clicking sound in the  
engine compartment for a few seconds  
when you start the engine or just after the  
vehicle begins to move. This means that  
the above systems are in the self-check  
mode. This sound does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
®
dents. The capabilities of an ESP -  
equipped vehicle must never be used  
as a substitute for careful driving.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-18  
       
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
®
The ESP indicator lights are described  
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)  
ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-  
tronically controlling braking pressure. It  
will also help you maintain steering control  
when braking on slippery surfaces or when  
braking hard. The ABS works automati-  
cally, so you do not have to use any special  
braking technique. Just push the brake  
pedal down without pumping. The ABS will  
operate whenever it senses that wheels  
are locking up. You may feel the brake  
pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.  
(For more information on ABS, see “Brak-  
ing” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”  
section.)  
below:  
WARNING  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
tires or wheels other than those  
specified in the Owner’s Manual are  
used. When replacing tires or  
wheels, use only the size and type  
specified in this Owner’s Manual.  
SLIP Indicator Light  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
tires are not inflated to the recom-  
mended tire inflation pressure.  
®
66J033  
• The ESP may not work properly if  
®
tires are fitted with tire chains.  
When one of the ESP systems other than  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
ABS is activated, the SLIP indicator light in  
the instrument cluster blinks 5 times per  
second.  
the tires are excessively worn. Be  
sure to replace tires when the tread  
wear indicators in the grooves  
appear on the tread surface.  
NOTE:  
If the ABS system is activated, you may  
hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating  
in the brake pedal. This is normal and indi-  
cates that the brake fluid pressure is being  
controlled properly.  
CAUTION  
®
• The ESP is not a substitute for  
winter tires or tire chains on a snow  
covered road.  
If the SLIP indicator light comes on  
and stays on while driving, there may  
be a malfunction of the ESP sys-  
®
tems (other than ABS). You should  
have the systems inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
WARNING  
®
• The ESP may not work properly if  
engine related parts such as the  
muffler are not equivalent to stan-  
dard equipment or are extremely  
deteriorated.  
NOTE:  
When the SLIP indicator light comes on  
and stays on while driving, indicating a  
®
malfunction of the ESP systems (other  
• Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-  
than ABS), the brake system will function  
as an ordinary ABS with no additional  
®
pension since the ESP may not  
operate correctly.  
®
ESP functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-19  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
NOTE:  
“ESP OFF” switch  
When you disconnect and re-connect the  
CAUTION  
®
battery, ESP system functions other than  
If the “ESP” warning light comes on,  
or stays on while driving, there may  
be a malfunction of the ESP sys-  
tems (other than ABS). You should  
have the systems inspected by an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer.  
ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-  
tor light will blink 1 time per second. In this  
case, use the following procedure to re-  
®
®
activate the ESP systems:  
1) Drive your vehicle straight ahead with-  
out tire slippage at a speed greater than  
approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) for a  
few seconds  
NOTE:  
When the “ESP” warning light comes on,  
or stays on while driving, indicating a mal-  
2) The slip indicator light will go out and  
®
the ESP systems (other than ABS) will  
®
function of the ESP systems (other than  
be re-activated  
ABS), the brake system will function as an  
It may take more than few seconds before  
the slip indicator light goes out depending  
on the road surface condition.  
®
66J039  
ordinary ABS that has no additional ESP  
functions.  
When the “ESP OFF” switch located at the  
center of the instrument panel is pushed  
and held to turn off the ESP systems  
(other than ABS), the “ESP OFF” indicator  
light in the instrument cluster comes on.  
When you push and hold the “ESP OFF”  
switch again, the “ESP OFF” indicator light  
®
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light  
“ESP” Warning Light  
®
will go out and all of the ESP systems will  
be activated.  
NOTE:  
66J032  
66J031  
• When the vehicle speed is greater than  
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph), the  
®
®
You should turn the ESP on during your  
When the ESP systems (other than ABS)  
ordinary driving, so that you have the ben-  
efits of all of the ESP systems.  
®
have a system malfunction, the “ESP”  
warning light in the instrument cluster  
comes on.  
ESP systems (other than ABS) will turn  
®
on automatically and the “ESP OFF”  
indicator light will go out.  
®
It may be required to turn the ESP sys-  
• When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, the  
tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is  
stuck in sand, mud, or snow, or when driv-  
ing in extreme off-road conditions where  
wheel spin is necessary.  
®
ESP systems (other than ABS) will be  
canceled to provide improved vehicle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-20  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
traction, and the “ESP OFF” indicator  
light will come on.  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) (if equipped)  
When the transfer switch (if equipped) is  
turned to the “4L LOCK” position, brake-  
traction control can be activated. Brake-  
traction control brakes the spinning  
wheel to distribute drive power to the  
other wheels for increased climbing abil-  
ity or for better performance on a rolling  
hill or a slippery surface.  
The tire pressure monitoring system is  
designed to alert you when one or more of  
the tires on your vehicle is significantly  
under-inflated. A Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) sensor containing  
a
unique identification code is mounted on  
each wheel. The TPMS sensors transmit  
tire pressure signals to a central receiver  
which relays the information to a tire pres-  
sure monitoring system controller. When  
the inflation pressure of one or more tires  
indicates significant under-inflation, the low  
tire pressure warning light shown below  
comes on.  
52D305  
®
• If the ESP systems operate continu-  
WARNING  
ously, such as when driving on slippery  
roads, the traction control functions of  
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-  
vided), should be checked monthly  
when cold and inflated to the inflation  
pressure recommended by the vehi-  
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-  
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If  
your vehicle has tires of a different  
size than the size indicated on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-  
sure label, you should determine the  
proper tire inflation pressure for  
those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)  
that illuminates a low tire pressure  
telltale when one or more of your  
tires is significantly under-inflated.  
(Continued)  
®
the ESP systems may be canceled  
temporarily to avoid overheating the  
brake pads, and the “ESP OFF” indicator  
light will come on. After a short period of  
®
time, the ESP systems (other than  
NOTE:  
ABS) will turn on automatically and the  
“ESP OFF” indicator light will go out.  
The TPMS controller is not programmed to  
recognize the ID code of the TPMS sensor  
in your spare tire. The tire pressure moni-  
toring system will only work with the spare  
tire if you bring your vehicle to an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer to register the ID  
code of the spare tire sensor. Refer to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” in this  
section.  
ABS Warning Light / Brake System  
Warning Light  
See “Braking” in the “OPERATING YOUR  
VEHICLE” section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-21  
     
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
The tire pressure monitoring system  
is not a substitute for regular tire  
pressure inspections. Check tire  
inflation pressures monthly when  
cold and set to the recommended  
inflation pressure as specified on the  
vehicle’s tire information placard and  
in the owner’s manual. Refer to  
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE” section.  
The load rating of your tires is  
reduced at lower inflation pressures.  
If your tires become even moderately  
under-inflated, the vehicle load may  
exceed the load rating of the tires,  
which can lead to tire failure. The low  
tire pressure warning light will not  
alert you of this condition. The warn-  
ing light will only come on when one  
or more of your tires become signifi-  
cantly under-inflated. Check and  
adjust your tire inflation pressure at  
least once a month. Refer to “Tires”  
in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-  
NANCE” section.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-  
sure telltale illuminates, you should  
stop and check your tires as soon as  
possible, and inflate them to the  
proper pressure.  
Driving on  
a
significantly under-  
inflated tire causes the tire to over-  
heat and can lead to tire failure.  
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-  
ciency and tire tread life, and may  
affect the vehicle’s handling and  
stopping ability.  
WARNING  
Please note that the TPMS is not a  
substitute for proper tire mainte-  
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-  
bility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger illumi-  
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure  
telltale.  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
does not come on when the ignition  
is turned to the “ON” position, or  
comes on and blinks while driving  
there may be a problem with the tire  
pressure monitoring system. Have  
your vehicle inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the light  
turns off after blinking, indicating  
that the monitoring system has  
recovered, make sure to have an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer check the  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-22  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
on the tire information placard should  
cause the low tire pressure warning light to  
turn off.  
when the tires are cold. Tires that  
appear to be at the specified pressure  
when checked after driving, when the  
tires are warm, could have pressure  
below the specification when the tires  
cool down. Also, tires that are inflated to  
the specified pressure in a warm garage  
may have pressure below the specifica-  
tion when the vehicle is driven outside in  
very cold temperature. If you adjust the  
tire pressure in a garage that is warmer  
than the outside temperature, you  
should add 1 psi to the recommended  
cold tire inflation pressure for every 10°F  
difference between garage temperature  
and outside temperature.  
If the low tire pressure warning light  
comes on and stays on, reduce your  
speed and avoid abrupt steering and  
braking. Stop in a safe place as soon  
as possible and check your tires.  
If the light turns on again shortly after  
adjusting the pressure in your tires, you  
may have a flat tire. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with the spare tire. Refer to  
“Jacking Instructions” in the “EMER-  
GENCY SERVICE” section. Refer to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” for  
instructions on how to restore normal oper-  
ation of the tire pressure monitoring sys-  
tem after you have had a flat tire.  
• If you have a flat tire, replace it with  
the spare tire. Refer to “Jacking  
Instructions” in the “EMERGENCY  
SERVICE”  
section.  
Refer  
to  
“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”  
for instructions on how to restore  
normal operation of the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system after you  
have had a flat tire.  
NOTE:  
• When the tire inflation pressure is  
adjusted in high altitude areas, the low  
tire pressure light may not turn off even  
after tire inflation pressure adjustment.  
In this case, adjust the inflation pressure  
to a slightly higher pressure than is  
shown on the tire information placard.  
• The low tire pressure warning light may  
turn off temporarily after coming on. This  
could be due to surface temperature  
increases after long distance driving or  
traveling to a high temperature area.  
Even if the tire pressure warning light  
turns off after coming on, make sure to  
check the inflation pressure of all tires.  
To reduce the chance that the low tire  
pressure warning light will come on due  
to normal changes in temperature and  
atmospheric pressure, it is important to  
check and adjust the tire pressures  
• If one or more of your tires is  
under-inflated adjust the inflation  
pressure in all of your tires to the  
recommended inflation pressure as  
soon as possible.  
Be aware that driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire can cause  
the tire to overheat and can lead to  
tire failure, and may affect steering  
control and brake effectiveness. This  
could lead to an accident, resulting in  
severe injury or death.  
For tire inflation pressure information, refer  
to “Tire Inflation Pressure” in the “INSPEC-  
TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.  
TPMS Malfunction Indicator  
WARNING  
Your vehicle also has been equipped  
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to  
indicate when the system is not oper-  
ating properly.  
The low tire pressure warning light can  
come on due to normal causes such as  
natural air leaks and pressure changes  
caused by changes in temperature or  
atmospheric pressure. Adjusting the air  
pressure in the tires to the pressure shown  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-23  
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
• When the TPMS sensor’s electronic sig-  
nal is disturbed in one of the following  
ways:  
– Electric devices or facilities using simi-  
lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.  
– A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle,  
in particular, around the wheels or  
wheel housings.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
The TPMS malfunction indicator is  
combined with the low tire pressure  
telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then  
remain continuously illuminated.  
This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long  
as the malfunction exists.  
• The tire pressure sensors can be  
damaged by the installation or  
removal of tires. When tires must  
be repaired or replaced, we highly  
recommend that you have them  
repaired or replaced by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
• Do not use liquid sealants for a flat  
tire as air pressure sensors can be  
damaged.  
– Snow tires or tire chains are used.  
• When you use non-genuine SUZUKI  
wheels or tires.  
Replacing Tires and/or Wheels  
If you get a flat tire, Suzuki recommends  
that you have an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer mount a new tire on the wheel that  
had the flat tire, and reinstall this tire on the  
vehicle in place of the spare. The TPMS is  
already set up to recognize the ID code of  
the original wheel, and normal TPMS oper-  
ation will be restored.  
• If the low tire pressure warning  
light comes on frequently, there  
may be something wrong with one  
of the tires or with the monitoring  
When you turn off the engine, however, the  
malfunction indicator resets. It takes about  
ten minutes after restarting the engine for  
the malfunction to be detected again and  
for the light to start flashing.  
system.  
Have  
your  
vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer.  
WARNING  
When the malfunction indicator is  
illuminated, the system may not be  
able to detect or signal low tire pres-  
sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions  
may occur for a variety of reasons,  
including the installation of replace-  
ment or alternate tires or wheels on  
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS  
from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale  
after replacing one or more tires or  
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that  
the replacement or alternate tires and  
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to  
function properly.  
TPMS Limitations  
If you wish to operate your vehicle with the  
spare tire installed, you must have an  
authorized SUZUKI dealer set up the  
TPMS to recognize the ID code of the  
spare tire TPMS sensor.  
The tire pressure monitoring system may  
not function properly under certain circum-  
stances. In the following situations, the low  
tire pressure warning light may come on  
and remain on or may blink.  
• When you replace a flat tire with the  
spare tire.  
• When you include the spare tire during a  
tire rotation.  
• When the TPMS sensor is damaged dur-  
ing a tire replacement or liquid sealants  
are used to repair a flat tire.  
If you need to replace any wheels on your  
vehicle, your dealer must make sure that  
TPMS sensors are installed in the new  
wheels and must set up the TPMS to rec-  
ognize the new sensors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-24  
 
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
WARNING  
Break-In  
Catalytic Converter  
CAUTION  
Only use tires and wheels recom-  
mended by SUZUKI as standard or  
optional equipment for your vehicle.  
Use of tires or wheels not recom-  
mended by SUZUKI can result in  
TPMS failure. Refer to “Tires” in the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for additional information.  
EXAMPLE  
The future performance and reliabil-  
ity of the engine depends on the care  
and restraint exercised during its  
early life. It is especially important to  
observe the following precautions  
during the initial 960 km (600 miles)  
of vehicle operation.  
• After starting, do not race the  
engine. Warm it up gradually.  
• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation  
at a constant speed. Moving parts  
will break in better if you vary your  
speed.  
For Vehicles Sold in U.S.A.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference.  
2) This device must accept any interfer-  
ence received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
54G236  
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to  
minimize the amount of harmful pollutants  
in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded  
fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic  
converters is prohibited by federal law,  
because lead deactivates the pollutant-  
reducing components of the catalyst sys-  
tem.  
• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid  
full throttle starts.  
• Avoid hard stopping, especially  
during the first 320 km (200 miles)  
of driving.  
• Do not drive slowly with the trans-  
mission in a high gear.  
• Drive the vehicle at moderate  
engine speeds.  
• Do not tow a trailer during the first  
960 km (600 miles) of vehicle oper-  
ation.  
NOTE:  
Changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for com-  
pliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
The converter is designed to last the life of  
the vehicle under normal usage and when  
unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-  
nance is required on the converter. How-  
ever, it is very important to keep the engine  
properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which  
can result from an improperly tuned  
engine, may cause overheating of the cat-  
alyst. This may result in permanent heat  
damage to the catalyst and other vehicle  
components.  
Traveling to CANADA  
Please note that service for the tire pres-  
sure monitoring system may not be avail-  
able in CANADA should there be any  
problems or malfunctions in the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-25  
       
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
Improving Fuel Economy  
CAUTION  
The following instructions will help you  
improve fuel economy.  
To minimize the possibility of catalyst  
or other vehicle damage:  
• Maintain the engine in the proper  
operating condition.  
• In the event of an engine malfunc-  
tion, particularly one involving  
engine misfire or other apparent  
loss of performance, have the vehi-  
cle serviced promptly.  
• Do not shut off the engine or inter-  
rupt the ignition when the transmis-  
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in  
motion.  
• Do not try to start the engine by  
pushing or towing the vehicle or  
coasting down a hill.  
• Do not idle the engine with any  
spark plug wires disconnected or  
removed, such as during diagnos-  
tic testing.  
• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-  
longed periods if idling seems  
rough or there are other malfunc-  
tions.  
• Do not allow the fuel tank to get  
near the empty level.  
Avoid excessive idling  
If you are to wait for more than a minute  
while you are parked, stop the engine and  
start it again later. When warming up a  
cold engine, allow the engine to idle until  
the temperature gauge pointer comes up  
to the “C” position. In this position, the  
engine is sufficiently warm for starting off.  
Avoid “jackrabbit” starts  
54G584S  
Fast starts away from lights or stop signs  
will consume fuel unnecessarily and  
shorten engine life. Start off slowly.  
WARNING  
Be careful where you park and drive;  
the catalytic converter and other  
exhaust components can get very  
hot. As with any vehicle, do not park  
or operate this vehicle in areas where  
combustible materials such as dry  
grass or leaves can come in contact  
with a hot exhaust system.  
Avoid unnecessary stops  
Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-  
ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed  
whenever possible. Slowing down and then  
accelerating again uses more fuel.  
Keep a steady cruising speed  
Keep as constant a speed as road and traf-  
fic conditions will permit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-26  
   
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE  
EXAMPLE  
60A183S  
Keep the air cleaner clean  
A dirty air cleaner will cause the fuel injec-  
tion system to supply too much fuel to the  
engine for the amount of air being sup-  
plied. The result is waste of fuel due to  
incomplete fuel burning.  
Keep weight to a minimum  
The heavier the load, the more fuel the  
vehicle consumes. Take out any luggage  
or cargo when it is not necessary.  
Keep tire pressure correct  
Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel  
due to increased running resistance of the  
tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct  
pressure shown on the label located below  
the driver’s side door latch striker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-27  
DRIVING TIPS  
DRIVING TIPS  
Important Vehicle Design Features To Know ................... 7-1  
On-Pavement Driving .......................................................... 7-2  
Off-Road Driving ................................................................. 7-4  
7
60G409  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
DRIVING TIPS  
Important Vehicle Design  
Features To Know  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
Your multipurpose vehicle has han-  
dling characteristics that differ from  
those of a conventional passenger  
car. For the safety of you and your  
passengers, please read the follow-  
ing section very carefully.  
52D078S  
WARNING  
• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.  
Even though air bags are equipped  
at the front seating positions, the  
driver and all passengers should  
be properly restrained at all times,  
using the seat belts provided. Refer  
to the “Seat Belts and Child  
Restraint Systems” section for  
instructions on proper use of the  
seat belts.  
• Never drive while under the influ-  
ence of alcohol or other drugs.  
Alcohol and drugs can seriously  
impair your ability to drive safely,  
greatly increasing the risk of injury  
to yourself and others. You should  
also avoid driving when you are  
tired, sick, irritated or under stress.  
Multipurpose vehicles such as your new  
SUZUKI have higher ground clearance and  
a narrower track than conventional pas-  
senger cars, to make them capable of per-  
forming in a wide variety of off-road  
applications. Specific design characteris-  
tics give them a higher center of gravity  
than ordinary cars. An advantage of the  
higher ground clearance is a better view of  
the road allowing you to anticipate prob-  
lems. They are not designed for cornering  
at the same speed as conventional pas-  
senger cars any more than low-slung  
sports cars are designed to perform satis-  
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all  
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt  
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this  
type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-  
rectly may result in loss of control or vehi-  
cle rollover.  
65D218  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a per-  
son wearing a seat belt.  
Important Differences Between  
Your Multipurpose Vehicle and  
Ordinary Passenger Cars  
Higher Ground Clearance  
The higher ground clearance of your vehi-  
cle enables it to clear off-road obstacles,  
such as rocks and tree stumps, that ordi-  
nary passenger cars can not drive over. An  
unavoidable result of this higher ground  
clearance is that the vehicle also has a  
higher center of gravity. Consequently,  
your vehicle will handle differently than a  
vehicle with a lower center of gravity.  
Multipurpose vehicles have a significantly  
higher rollover rate than other types of  
vehicles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1  
   
DRIVING TIPS  
Shorter Wheelbase  
All Types of Rollover Accidents  
On-Pavement Driving  
Along with its higher ground clearance,  
your vehicle has a shorter wheelbase and  
shorter front and rear overhangs than  
many passenger cars. These features  
combine to allow you to drive your vehicle  
over hillcrests without hanging up on them  
or damaging the frame and chassis com-  
ponents. The shorter wheelbase also  
makes the steering of your vehicle more  
responsive than that of vehicles with longer  
wheelbases.  
As with many kinds of automobile acci-  
dents, rollovers can be greatly reduced by  
doing what all prudent drivers should do,  
i.e., don’t drink and drive, don’t drive when  
tired and don’t do anything behind the  
wheel that could cause a loss of attention  
to the driving task.  
Government data show that most rollover  
accidents for multi-purpose vehicles are  
caused when a driver loses control of the  
vehicle and leaves the paved portion of the  
roadway striking a ditch, curb or other off-  
road object that causes the vehicle to over-  
turn. The following driving practices may  
reduce the risk of rollover.  
Additional guidelines are set out below for  
your on-road driving.  
Vehicle Slides Off-Road  
You can reduce the risk of this kind of roll-  
over accident by always keeping the vehi-  
cle under control. Typically, drivers lose  
control of vehicles, often resulting in roll-  
over accidents, when the driver is impaired  
because of alcohol or other drugs, falls  
asleep at the wheel or is otherwise inatten-  
tive, or is driving too fast for the road condi-  
tions.  
Know Your Vehicle  
Take time to familiarize yourself with the  
unique handling characteristics of your  
vehicle by first driving around in an area  
away from traffic. Practice turning the vehi-  
cle at a variety of speeds and in different  
directions. Get a feel for the greater steer-  
ing response that your vehicle has over a  
conventional car.  
Narrower Body Width and Track  
Your vehicle is narrower than the average  
passenger car so that it can pass through  
tight spaces.  
Without the essential characteristics  
described above: higher ground clearance,  
shorter wheelbase and narrower body  
width and track – your vehicle could not  
provide you with excellent off road driving  
performance. However, it is also true that  
on-pavement driving, handling and steer-  
ing will be different from what drivers expe-  
rience with a conventional passenger car.  
Rollovers On the Roadway  
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times  
The driver and all passengers should be  
properly restrained at all times, using the  
seat belts provided. Refer to the “Seat  
Belts and Child Restraint Systems” section  
for instructions on proper use of the seat  
belts.  
If, for any reason, your vehicle slides side-  
ways or spins out of control at highway  
speeds, while on the paved portion of the  
roadway, the risk of rollover is greatly  
increased. This condition can be created  
when two or more wheels drop off onto the  
shoulder and you steer sharply in an  
attempt to reenter the roadway. To reduce  
the risk of rollover in these circumstances,  
if conditions permit, you should hold the  
steering wheel firmly and slow down  
before pulling back into the travel lanes  
with controlled steering movements.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2  
   
DRIVING TIPS  
Don’t Make Sharp Turns  
As mentioned before, small multipurpose  
vehicles have specific design characteris-  
tics that allow them to perform in a wide  
variety of applications. These characteris-  
tics also change the cornering behavior  
relative to conventional passenger cars.  
Remember, small multipurpose vehicles  
have more responsive steering and a  
higher center of gravity than conventional  
passenger cars. If at all possible, avoid  
making sharp turns in your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
Do not operate your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry, hard  
surfaces. Operating your vehicle in  
“4H LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on dry,  
hard surfaces puts severe stress to  
the drive train, especially during tight  
cornering, and can damage it. Also,  
you may have some difficulty steer-  
ing.  
Unevenly worn tires can cause prob-  
lems in the operation of the transfer  
switch. Be sure to rotate the tires  
according to the maintenance sched-  
ule. Refer to “Tires” and “Mainte-  
nance  
Schedule”  
in  
the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”  
section for proper tire rotation proce-  
dures.  
NOTE:  
Slow Down on Curves  
Avoid operating your vehicle in “4H LOCK”  
or “4L LOCK” on wet pavement as much  
as possible. Operating your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” on wet pavement  
may cause severe damage to the drive  
train.  
Learn to approach curves cautiously and  
at a conservative speed. Do not attempt to  
take curves at the same speeds that you  
would in a vehicle with a lower center of  
gravity. Just as you would not drive a  
sports car on a trail, you should not  
attempt to drive your vehicle around curves  
like a sports car.  
NOTE:  
Operating your vehicle in “4H” on dry and  
tight corner may cause some vibration on  
your vehicle. This is not caused by the  
vehicle malfunction, but caused by working  
of the limited slip differential gear in the  
center differential.  
Slow Down and Use Caution on Slip-  
pery Roads  
Under wet road conditions you should  
drive at a lower speed than on dry roads  
due to possible slippage of tires during  
braking. When driving on icy, snowcovered  
or muddy roads, reduce your speed and  
avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt braking  
or sharp steering movements. Use 4-wheel  
drive high range (4H) (if equipped) for bet-  
ter traction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
DRIVING TIPS  
Do Not Turn on or Drive Across the Side  
of Hills  
Do not drive in the field covered with  
grown grass  
If you drive in the field covered with grass,  
it may cause unexpected accident or vehi-  
cle damage by getting caught in grown  
grass.  
Off-Road Driving  
Your vehicle has specific design character-  
istics for off-road driving. When you leave  
the pavement, you will encounter driving  
surfaces of all kinds which may change  
continually as you drive. In most cases, off-  
road driving requires the use of 4-wheel  
drive. If your vehicle is a 2-wheel drive  
vehicle, you should limit your off-road driv-  
ing only to hard, flat, nonslippery surfaces.  
2-wheel drive vehicles have far less trac-  
tion on off-road surfaces than 4-wheel  
drive vehicles. It is important when driving  
off-road to follow the guidelines below.  
Turning on or driving across the side of a  
hill can be extremely hazardous. Most of  
the vehicle’s weight will be transferred to  
the downhill tires, which could result in the  
vehicle rolling sideways. Whenever possi-  
ble, avoid this potential hazard. Also, if you  
have to exit your vehicle on a side-hill,  
always get out on the uphill side.  
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck  
If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or  
sand, follow the directions below:  
1) (For vehicles equipped with transfer  
switch) Turn the transfer switch to “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK”.  
Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times  
You and your passengers should use the  
seat belts at all times when driving off-  
road. For proper seat belt use, refer to the  
“Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems”  
section in this manual.  
2) Shift the transmission back and forth  
between a forward range (or first gear  
for manual transmission) and reverse.  
This will create a rocking motion which  
may give you enough momentum to  
free the vehicle. Press gently on the  
accelerator to keep wheel spin to a min-  
imum. Remove your foot from the  
accelerator while shifting.  
Use Caution on Steep Inclines  
Always inspect hills before you attempt to  
drive up them. Know what is on the other  
side and how you will get back down. If you  
have any doubt that it is safe, do not  
attempt to drive over a hill. Never drive  
your vehicle up an extremely steep incline.  
Avoid Sudden Reactions in Mud, Ice or  
Snow  
Be careful when off-road conditions are  
slick. Reduce your speed and avoid sud-  
den movements of the vehicle. If your vehi-  
cle is a 2-wheel drive vehicle, do not drive  
in deep snow or mud. If your vehicle is a 4-  
wheel drive vehicle, be aware that driving  
in deep snow or mud can cause a loss of  
traction and an increase in the resistance  
to the vehicle’s forward motion. Use 4WD  
low gear (4L) and maintain a steady but  
moderate speed with a light touch on the  
steering wheel and brakes.  
Do not race the engine. Excessive  
wheel spin will cause the tires to dig  
deeper, making it more difficult to free  
the vehicle.  
Coming down a steep hill can be trickier  
than getting up one. Keep the vehicle  
heading straight down the hill and use low  
gear. Do not lock the brakes. If the vehicle  
begins to slide, accelerate slightly to regain  
steering control.  
3) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few  
minutes of rocking, get another vehicle  
to pull you out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
     
DRIVING TIPS  
Do not drive through deep or rushing  
water  
Tire Chains  
Tire chains should only be used if they are  
needed to increase traction or are required  
by law. Make sure that the chains you use  
are small-link chains or cable-type chains  
and are the correct size for your vehicle’s  
tires. Also make sure that there is enough  
clearance between the fenders and the  
chains as installed on the tires.  
WARNING  
Driving in deep or rushing water can be  
hazardous. You could lose control of the  
vehicle and the occupants could drown.  
Also, your vehicle could be seriously dam-  
aged. To avoid these risks, observe the fol-  
lowing instructions and precautions.  
• Do not allow anyone to stand near  
the vehicle when you are rocking it,  
and do not spin the wheels faster  
than an indicated 40 km/h (25 mph)  
on the speedometer. Personal  
injury and/or vehicle damage may  
result from spinning the wheels too  
fast.  
• Be sure to turn the transfer switch  
from “4H” to “4H LOCK” or “4L  
LOCK” when the tires slip in “4H”.  
The continuing tires slip in “4H”  
can cause the limited slip differen-  
tial gear damage in the center dif-  
ferential.  
• Do not drive through deep or rushing  
water. Deep or rushing water, such as  
fast-moving streams or floodwaters,  
could carry your vehicle away from your  
intended path. The water is too deep if it  
covers your wheel hubs, axles or  
exhaust tailpipe. Know the depth of the  
water before you attempt to drive  
through it.  
• If water blocks the tailpipe, the engine  
may not start or run. If the water is deep  
enough to get drawn into the engine  
intake system, the engine will be badly  
damaged.  
• Submerged brakes will have poor brak-  
ing performance. Drive slowly and care-  
fully. Driving slowly will also help avoid  
water splashing onto the ignition system,  
which could cause the engine to stall.  
• Even when driving through shallow or  
still waters, drive carefully since the  
water may be hiding ground hazards  
such as holes, ditches or bumps.  
Install the chains on the rear tires tightly,  
according to the chain manufacturer’s  
instructions. Retighten the chains after  
driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-  
sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.  
CAUTION  
If you hear the chains hitting against  
the vehicle body while driving, stop  
and tighten them.  
Release the accelerator pedal when  
operating the gearshift lever. Operat-  
ing the lever with the engine racing  
can damage the gears.  
CAUTION  
Do not continue rocking the vehicle  
for more than a few minutes. Pro-  
longed rocking can cause engine  
overheating, transmission or trans-  
fer case damage or tire damage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
 
DRIVING TIPS  
WARNING  
WARNING  
In addition to following the driving  
tips in this section, it is important to  
observe the following precautions for  
on-road and off-road driving.  
(Continued)  
• Never use oversized tires or special  
shocks and springs to raise (jack  
up) your vehicle. This will raise the  
center of gravity of the vehicle and  
change its handling characteris-  
tics. Oversized tires may also rub  
against the fender over bumps,  
causing vehicle damage or tire fail-  
ure.  
• Driver and passengers should wear  
seat belts at all times.  
• Do not let anyone else drive your  
vehicle unless they are also aware  
of the vehicle characteristics and  
handling differences described in  
this section.  
• After driving through water, mud or  
sandy ground, test the brakes while  
driving at a slow speed to see if  
they have maintained their normal  
effectiveness. If the brakes are less  
effective than normal, dry them by  
repeatedly applying the brakes  
while driving slowly until the  
brakes have regained their normal  
effectiveness.  
• Do not use “4H LOCK” or “4L  
LOCK” drive for normal driving.  
• After extended operation in mud,  
sand or water, have the brakes  
inspected by your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer as soon as possi-  
ble.  
• Avoid loaning your vehicle to any-  
one unless you accompany them.  
• Make sure your tires are in good  
condition and always maintain the  
specified tire pressure. Refer to  
“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE”  
details.  
section  
for  
• Do not use tires other than those  
specified by SUZUKI. Never use dif-  
ferent sizes or types of tires on the  
front and rear wheels. For informa-  
tion regarding the specified tires,  
refer to the Tire Inflation Pressure  
Label located on the driver’s side  
door pillar or the “SPECIFICA-  
TIONS” section.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6  
DRIVING TIPS  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 8-1  
Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 8-2  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) ...................... 8-7  
8
54G215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-  
missible weight on an individual axle.  
Vehicle Loading  
WARNING  
Vehicle Capacity Weight – Maximum per-  
missible load weight a vehicle can carry  
including the weight of all the occupants,  
accessories, cargo, plus trailer tongue  
weight (if towing a trailer).  
Never overload your vehicle. The  
gross vehicle weight (sum of the  
weights of the loaded vehicle, driver  
and passengers) must never exceed  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
(GVWR) listed on the Safety Certifica-  
tion Label. In addition, never distrib-  
ute a load so that the weight on either  
the front or rear axle exceeds the  
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)  
listed on the Safety Certification  
Label.  
The weight of any accessories already  
installed on your vehicle at the time of pur-  
chase, or that you or the dealer install after  
purchase, must be subtracted from the  
Vehicle Capacity Weight to determine how  
much capacity remains available for occu-  
pants, cargo, and trailer tongue weight (if  
towing a trailer).  
54G307  
Contact your dealer for further information.  
WARNING  
Your vehicle was designed for specific  
weight capacities. The weight capacities of  
your vehicle are indicated by the Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), the Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR, front and rear)  
and the Vehicle Capacity Weight. The  
GVWR and GAWR (front and rear) are  
listed on the Safety Certification Label  
which is located below the driver’s side  
door latch striker. The Vehicle Capacity  
Weight is listed on the Tire Information  
Label which is located below the Safety  
Certification Label.  
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and  
actual loads at the front and rear axles can  
only be determined by weighing the vehicle  
using a vehicle scale. To measure the  
weight and load, try taking your vehicle to  
a highway weighing station, shipping com-  
pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.  
Compare these weights to the GVWR and  
GAWR (front and rear) listed on the Safety  
Certification Label. If the gross vehicle  
weight or the load on either axle exceeds  
these ratings, you must remove enough  
weight to bring the load down to the rated  
capacity.  
• Always distribute cargo evenly.  
• To avoid personal injury or damage  
to your vehicle, always secure  
cargo to prevent it from shifting if  
the vehicle moves suddenly.  
• Place heavier objects on the floor  
and as far forward in the cargo area  
as possible. Never pile cargo  
higher than the top of the seat  
backs.  
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall  
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including  
all the occupants, accessories and cargo  
plus the trailer tongue weight if towing a  
trailer).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1  
   
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
WARNING  
cool down. Refer to “If the Engine Over-  
heats” section for details on how to deal  
with overheating.  
Trailer Towing  
You can use your SUZUKI to tow a trailer,  
but you should always observe the require-  
ments and recommendations in this sec-  
tion. If you intend to tow a trailer, it is  
essential to select a trailer and trailer tow-  
ing equipment which are compatible. A  
reputable trailer dealer can help you.  
Never attach safety chains to the  
bumper of your vehicle. Secure con-  
nections so that they can’t come  
loose.  
CAUTION  
Towing in “D” range up a steep hill  
can cause coolant overheating which  
may result in engine/automatic trans-  
mission damage.  
Trailer Lights  
Make sure your trailer is equipped with  
lights which meet federal, state and local  
requirements. Always check for the proper  
operation of all trailer lights before you  
start to tow.  
CAUTION  
Hitches  
Trailer towing puts additional stress  
on the engine, drive train and brakes  
of your vehicle. Never tow a trailer  
during the first 960 km (600 miles) of  
vehicle operation.  
Use only a trailer hitch bracket that is  
designed to bolt to the frame of your vehi-  
cle, and a hitch that is designed to bolt to  
this bracket. We recommend that you use  
a genuine SUZUKI trailer hitch bracket and  
trailer hitch (available as options), or equiv-  
alent.  
WARNING  
Never splice trailer lights directly into  
your vehicle’s electrical system, or  
electrical system damage may occur.  
CAUTION  
Because towing a trailer puts addi-  
tional stress on your vehicle, more  
WARNING  
Brakes  
frequent  
maintenance  
will  
be  
Never use a bumper hitch or a hitch  
which attaches to the axle of your  
vehicle.  
required than under normal driving  
conditions. Follow the schedule for  
Maintenance Recommended Under  
Severe Driving Conditions or perform  
more frequent maintenance as nec-  
essary.  
WARNING  
If trailer brakes are used, you should  
follow all instructions provided by the  
manufacturer. Never tap into the  
brake system of your vehicle.  
Safety Chains  
Always attach safety chains between your  
vehicle and trailer. Cross safety chains  
under the tongue of the trailer so that the  
tongue will not drop to the road if the trailer  
becomes separated from the hitch. Follow  
the manufacturer’s recommendation for  
attaching safety chains. Always leave just  
enough slack to permit full turning. Never  
allow safety chains to drag on the road.  
For Automatic transmission vehicles, shift  
into “3” (Low 2) or “L(Low 1) (if necessary)  
and frequently monitor the coolant temper-  
ature gauge when towing up a steep hill. If  
the gauge indicates overheating, park the  
vehicle in a safe place and let the engine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2  
   
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Gross Trailer Weight  
Gross Combined Weight  
Tires  
WARNING  
When towing a trailer, it is very  
important for your vehicle and trailer  
to have properly inflated tires. Your  
vehicle’s tires should be inflated to  
the recommended pressures listed  
on your vehicle’s Tire Inflation Pres-  
sure label. Inflate trailer tires accord-  
ing to the specifications provided by  
the trailer manufacturer.  
Mirrors  
60A378  
60A381  
Check to see if your vehicle’s mirrors meet  
federal, state and local requirements for  
mirrors used on towing vehicles. If they do  
not, you must install required mirrors  
before you tow.  
Gross Trailer Weight is the weight of the  
trailer plus all cargo in it (measured with  
the trailer disconnected from the towing  
vehicle). Gross trailer weight must never  
exceed 1350 kg (3000 pounds).  
Gross Combined Weight is the weight of  
the fully loaded vehicle (including all the  
occupants, accessories and cargo) plus  
the weight of the fully loaded trailer. Gross  
combined weight must never exceed:  
• 2WD – 3400 kg (7500 pounds)  
Vehicle/Trailer Weight Limits  
If you intend to tow a trailer having a gross  
trailer weight greater than 450 kg (1000  
pounds), the trailer must be equipped with  
trailer brakes.  
• 4WD – 3450 kg (7600 pounds)  
Before towing, you must make sure that  
gross trailer weight, gross combined  
weight, trailer tongue weight, gross vehicle  
weight and gross axle weight (front and  
rear) are within specified limits as  
described below. You can measure vehicle  
and trailer weights using a vehicle scale  
and can measure tongue weight using a  
bathroom scale.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Tongue Weight  
Gross Vehicle Weight  
Gross Axle Weight  
60A380  
60A379  
60A382  
Tongue Weight is the downward force  
exerted on the hitch by the trailer coupler,  
with the trailer fully loaded and the coupler  
at its normal towing height. Cargo should  
be distributed so that tongue weight is  
approximately 10% of gross trailer weight.  
Gross Vehicle Weight is the weight of the  
fully loaded vehicle (including all the occu-  
pants, accessories and cargo plus the  
trailer tongue weight). The gross vehicle  
weight must never exceed the Gross Vehi-  
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed on the  
Safety Certification Label.  
Gross Axle Weight (Front and Rear) is the  
weight supported by an individual axle with  
the vehicle fully loaded and the trailer con-  
nected. Gross axle weight for the front and  
rear axles must never exceed the Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the  
Safety Certification Label.  
NOTE:  
You can usually get tongue weight to be  
about 10% of gross trailer weight by plac-  
ing about 60% of the total cargo weight in  
the front half of the trailer. You should mea-  
sure gross trailer weight and tongue weight  
before towing, however, to make sure that  
your load is properly distributed.  
WARNING  
Improper distribution of cargo in your  
trailer may result in poor vehicle han-  
dling and swaying of the trailer.  
Always make sure that trailer tongue  
weight is about 10% of gross trailer  
weight. Failure to observe this  
requirement may result in an acci-  
dent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
WARNING  
Additional Trailer Towing Warnings  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Never overload your trailer or your  
vehicle. Gross Trailer Weight must  
never exceed 1350 kg (3000 pounds).  
Gross Combined Weight must never  
exceed 3400 kg (7500 pounds) for  
2WD or 3450 kg (7600 pounds) for  
4WD.  
Gross vehicle weight must never  
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-  
ing (GVWR) listed on the Safety Certi-  
fication Label. Gross axle weight for  
the front and rear axles must not  
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR) listed on the Safety Certifica-  
tion Label.  
(Continued)  
• Allow adequate stopping distance.  
Stopping distance is increased  
when you tow a trailer. For each 16  
km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow at  
least one vehicle and trailer length  
between you and the vehicle ahead.  
Follow at a greater distance if roads  
are wet or slippery.  
• Slow down when making turns.  
Remember that a larger than nor-  
mal turning radius is needed  
because the trailer wheels will be  
closer than the vehicle wheels to  
the inside of the turn.  
• Avoid sudden acceleration and  
stopping of the vehicle. Do not  
make quick maneuvers unless they  
are necessary.  
• Slow down in cross winds and be  
prepared for wind blasts from large  
passing vehicles.  
Connect trailer lights and hook up  
safety chains every time you tow.  
WARNING  
Your vehicle will handle differently  
when towing a trailer. For your safety  
and the safety of others, you should  
observe the following precautions:  
• Practice turning, stopping and  
backing up before you begin tow-  
ing in traffic. Do not tow in traffic  
until you are confident that you can  
handle the vehicle and trailer  
safely.  
• Never exceed posted towing speed  
limits or 72 km/h (45 mph), which-  
ever is lower.  
WARNING  
Do not tow a trailer having a gross  
trailer weight greater than 450 kg  
(1000 pounds) unless the trailer is  
equipped with trailer brakes.  
• Never drive at a speed that causes  
shaking or swaying of the trailer. If  
you notice even the slightest sign  
of shaking or swaying, slow down.  
• Always have someone guide you  
when backing.  
• Be careful when passing other  
vehicles. Be sure to allow enough  
room for your trailer before you  
change lanes, and signal well in  
advance.  
(Continued)  
• Slow down and shift into a lower  
gear before you reach long or steep  
downhill grades. It is hazardous to  
attempt downshifting while you are  
descending a hill.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Avoid “riding” the brakes. “Riding”  
the brakes could cause the brakes  
to overheat, resulting in reduced  
braking efficiency. Use engine  
braking as much as possible.  
When starting out after parking:  
1) Push in the clutch (if equipped)  
and start the engine.  
2) Depress the brake pedal, shift into  
gear, release the parking brake  
and slowly pull away from the  
chocks.  
3) Stop, apply the brakes firmly and  
hold the brakes while you have  
another person remove the  
chocks.  
• Because of the added trailer  
weight, your engine may overheat  
on hot days when going up long or  
steep hills. Pay attention to your  
engine temperature gauge. If it indi-  
cates overheating, pull off the road  
and stop in a safe place. Refer to  
the “If the Engine Overheats” in  
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section  
for details on how to proceed.  
60A186  
WARNING  
When parking your vehicle and con-  
nected trailer, always use the follow-  
ing procedure:  
1) Apply the vehicle’s brakes firmly.  
2) Have another person place wheel  
chocks under the wheels of the  
vehicle and the trailer while you  
are holding the brakes.  
3) Slowly release the brakes until the  
wheel chocks absorb the load.  
4) Fully engage the parking brake.  
5) Manual Transmission – Shift into  
Reverse or first gear and turn off  
the engine.  
Automatic Transmission – Shift  
into Park and turn off the engine.  
6) If you have a 4-wheel drive vehi-  
cle, make sure the transfer switch  
is not in “N” (Neutral).  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE  
4WD Vehicle With a Transfer Switch  
Towing Your Vehicle  
(recreational towing)  
TRANS-  
TOWING  
DRIVE TRAIN  
Your vehicle may be towed behind another  
vehicle (such as a motorhome), provided  
you use the proper towing method speci-  
fied for your vehicle. The towing method  
you must use depends on the specifica-  
tions of your vehicle: whether it is a 2-  
wheel drive (2WD), 4-wheel drive (4WD)  
with a transfer switch or 4-wheel drive  
(4WD) without a transfer switch vehicle.  
MISSION METHOD  
4WD  
with a transfer  
switch  
A/T  
M/T  
A/T  
M/T  
A
A
4WD  
none  
none  
without a  
transfer switch  
A/T  
B
B
Use the towing instruction table to select  
the proper towing method for your vehicle,  
and carefully follow the corresponding  
instructions. Be sure to use proper towing  
equipment designed for recreational tow-  
ing and make sure that towing speed does  
not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).  
2WD  
M/T  
54G585  
CAUTION  
Never tow your 4WD vehicle without  
a transfer switch using recreational  
towing methods. If you do, the trans-  
mission will be permanently dam-  
aged.  
64J234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
   
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
Before towing  
To tow a vehicle equipped with a trans-  
fer switch with all four wheels on the  
ground:  
WARNING  
When you tow your vehicle, follow  
the instructions below to avoid acci-  
dents and damage to your vehicle. In  
addition, be sure to observe govern-  
ment and local requirements regard-  
ing vehicle lighting and trailer hitches  
or tow bars.  
1) Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
2) Place the transmission in “N” (Neutral)  
and depress the brake pedal and the  
clutch pedal fully (if equipped).  
3) Use the transfer switch to shift into neu-  
tral.  
(1)  
WARNING  
A safety chain should always be used  
when you tow your vehicle.  
64J147  
Vehicles equipped with a transfer switch  
may be towed from the front with all four  
wheels on the ground. Be sure to use  
proper towing equipment designed for rec-  
reational towing and make sure that towing  
speed does not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).  
CAUTION  
64J218  
Do not tow your vehicle with either  
front wheels or rear wheels directly  
on the ground (and the transmission  
in neutral). If you do, the transmis-  
sion will be damaged fatally.  
NOTE:  
First, push in and turn the switch to the  
mark (1) at the left of the “N” position, and  
hold the switch in this position for 5 sec-  
onds until the “N” indicator blinks, then turn  
the switch to the “N” position.  
When you turn the transfer switch to the  
“N” position, “N” indicator will come on with  
the buzzer sound.  
4) Make sure the “N” light on the instru-  
ment cluster comes on.  
5) Shift the manual transmission lever into  
2nd gear or the automatic transmission  
lever into “P” (Park).  
6) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-  
tion to unlock the steering wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
7) Release the parking brake.  
TOWING METHOD A  
Stop towing the vehicle every 300 km (200  
miles). Start the engine. With the manual  
transmission lever in 2nd gear (or the auto-  
matic transmission lever in “D”) and the  
transfer switch in neutral, rev the engine for  
about one minute with the clutch engaged  
(if equipped), to circulate oil in the transfer  
case.  
FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND  
64J148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
4WD Vehicle Without a Transfer  
Switch  
2WD Vehicle  
1) Secure the rear wheels on a towing  
dolly according to the instructions pro-  
vided by the dolly manufacturer.  
2) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-  
tion to unlock the steering wheel.  
3) Make sure the front wheels are facing  
straight forward and secure the steering  
wheel with a steering wheel clamping  
device designed for towing.  
CAUTION  
The steering column is not strong  
enough to withstand shocks trans-  
mitted from the front wheels during  
towing. Always unlock the steering  
wheel before towing.  
64J234  
You can not tow your vehicle behind  
another vehicle using recreational towing  
methods.  
54G586  
CAUTION  
Never tow your vehicle using recre-  
ational towing methods. If you do, the  
transmission will be permanently  
damaged.  
54G585  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10  
VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING  
TOWING METHOD B  
FRONT WHEELS ON THE GROUND  
AND REAR WHEELS ON A DOLLY.  
52D082  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 9-2  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 9-3  
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving  
Conditions ........................................................................... 9-7  
Drive Belt ............................................................................. 9-9  
Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 9-9  
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 9-13  
Automatic Transmission Fluid ........................................... 9-15  
Engine Coolant .................................................................... 9-17  
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 9-19  
Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 9-20  
Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 9-20  
Brakes .................................................................................. 9-21  
Steering Wheel .................................................................... 9-23  
Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 9-24 9  
Tires ...................................................................................... 9-24  
Battery .................................................................................. 9-35  
Fuses .................................................................................... 9-35  
Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 9-38  
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 9-39  
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 9-44  
Air Conditioning System .................................................... 9-47  
60G410  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
• Do not leave the engine running in  
garages or other confined areas.  
• When the engine is running, keep  
hands, clothing, tools and other  
objects away from the moving fan  
and fan belt.  
• Be careful not to cause accidental  
short circuits between the positive  
and negative battery terminals.  
• Keep used oil, engine coolant and  
other fluids away from children and  
pets. Dispose of used fluids prop-  
erly; never pour them on the  
ground, into sewers, etc.  
• When it is necessary to do service  
work with the engine running, make  
sure that the parking brake is set  
fully and the transmission is in  
Neutral (for manual transmission  
vehicles) or Park (for automatic  
transmission vehicles).  
60A187S  
WARNING  
• Do not touch ignition wires or other  
ignition system parts when starting  
the engine or when the engine is  
running, or you could receive an  
electric shock.  
• Be careful not to touch a hot  
engine, exhaust manifold and  
pipes, muffler, radiator and water  
hoses.  
• Do not allow smoking, sparks or  
flames around gasoline or the bat-  
tery. Flammable fumes are present.  
• Do not get under your vehicle if it is  
supported only with the portable  
jack provided in your vehicle.  
(Continued)  
You should take extreme care when  
working on your vehicle to prevent  
accidental injury. Here are a few pre-  
cautions that you should be espe-  
cially careful to observe:  
• To prevent damage or unintended  
inflation of the air bag system, be  
sure the battery is disconnected  
and the ignition switch has been in  
the “LOCK” position for at least 90  
seconds before performing any  
electrical service work on your  
SUZUKI. Do not touch air bag sys-  
tem components or wires. The  
wires are wrapped with yellow tape  
or yellow tubing, and the couplers  
are yellow for easy identification.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-1  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
WARNING  
NOTICE (for U.S.A.)  
Maintenance Schedule  
Maintenance, replacement or repair of  
the emission control devices and sys-  
tems may be performed by any automo-  
bile repair establishment or individual  
using any part which has been certified  
under the provisions in the Clean Air  
Act sec. 207. (a) (2).  
The following table shows the times when  
you should perform regular maintenance  
on your vehicle. This table shows in miles,  
kilometers and months when you should  
perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica-  
tion and other services. These intervals  
should be shortened if driving is usually  
done under severe conditions (refer to  
The shock absorbers are filled with  
high pressure gas. Never attempt to  
disassemble it or throw it into a fire.  
Avoid storing it near a heater or heat-  
ing device. When scrapping the  
absorber, the gas must be released  
from the absorber safely. Ask your  
dealer for assistance.  
“Maintenance  
Recommended  
Under  
Severe Driving Conditions”).  
WARNING  
SUZUKI recommends that mainte-  
nance on items marked with an aster-  
isk (*) be performed by your  
authorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali-  
fied service technician. If you are  
qualified, you may perform mainte-  
nance on the unmarked items by  
referring to the instructions in this  
section. If you are not sure whether  
you can successfully complete any of  
the unmarked maintenance jobs, ask  
your authorized SUZUKI dealer to do  
the maintenance for you.  
CAUTION  
Whenever it becomes necessary to  
replace parts on your vehicle, it is  
recommended that you use genuine  
SUZUKI replacement parts or their  
equivalent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer miles (x 1000)  
7.5  
12.5  
7.5  
15  
25  
15  
22.5  
37.5  
22.5  
30  
50  
30  
37.5  
62.5  
37.5  
45  
75  
45  
52.5  
87.5  
52.5  
60  
100  
60  
67.5  
112.5  
67.5  
75  
125  
75  
reading or months, whichever comes first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL  
1. Drive belt  
Tension check, *adjustment, *replacement  
*2. Valve lash (clearance)  
3. Engine oil and oil filter  
*4. Cooling system hoses and connections  
5. Engine coolant  
R
R
R
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
I
R
R
R
*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings  
*7. EVAP canister  
I&(R)  
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes  
9. Spark plugs  
*10. Ignition coil (Plug cap)  
*11. Fuel tank & cap  
12. Air cleaner filter element  
*13. Fuel filter  
*14. Fuel lines and connections  
*15. Canister air suction filter  
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer miles (x 1000)  
82.5  
137.5  
82.5  
90  
150  
90  
97.5  
162.5  
97.5  
105  
175  
105  
112.5  
187.5  
112.5  
120  
200  
120  
127.5  
212.5  
127.5  
135  
225  
135  
142.5  
237.5  
142.5  
150  
250  
150  
reading or months, whichever comes first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL  
1. Drive belt  
Tension check, *adjustment, *replacement  
*2. Valve lash (clearance)  
3. Engine oil and oil filter  
*4. Cooling system hoses and connections  
5. Engine coolant  
R
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
I
R
I
R
I
*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings  
*7. EVAP canister  
I&(R)  
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes  
9. Spark plugs  
*10. Ignition coil (Plug cap)  
*11. Fuel tank & cap  
12. Air cleaner filter element  
*13. Fuel filter  
*14. Fuel lines and connections  
*15. Canister air suction filter  
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I (#1)  
R
R
R
I
R
I
I (#1)  
Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months  
#1: Inspect at 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months.  
NOTE:  
The maintenance services enclosed with rectangle are recommended maintenance items.  
Item 6 (R) is applicable to the exhaust mounting rubber only.  
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform recom-  
mended maintenance items enclosed with a rectangle will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion  
of the vehicle’s useful life. SUZUKI, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated inter-  
vals and the maintenance recorded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer miles (x 1000)  
7.5  
12.5  
7.5  
15  
25  
15  
22.5  
37.5  
22.5  
30  
50  
30  
37.5  
62.5  
37.5  
45  
75  
45  
52.5  
87.5  
52.5  
60  
100  
60  
67.5  
112.5  
67.5  
75  
125  
75  
reading or months, whichever comes first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
CHASSIS AND BODY  
1. Clutch (for manual transmission)  
Pedal and fluid level  
*2. Brake discs and pads  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(front)  
(rear)  
Brake drums and shoes  
*3. Brake hoses and pipes  
4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement  
5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment  
6. Parking brake lever and *cable  
Lever movement check, *adjustment  
7. Tires (including tire rotation)  
*8. Wheel discs  
*9. Wheel bearings  
*10. Suspension system  
*11. Propeller shafts/Drive shafts  
*12. Manual transmission oil  
13. Automatic transmission (A/T)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
Fluid level  
*Fluid change  
*Fluid hose  
Replace every 175000 km (105000 miles)-----5-speed A/T  
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
*14. Transfer oil  
*15. Differential & Extension (for 2WD) oil  
16. Steering system  
R
I
Steering wheel movement,  
*linkage  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*17. Power steering (if equipped)  
18. All Latches, Hinges and Locks  
19. Air conditioner filter (if equipped)  
R
R
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-5  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
R: Replace or change  
I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer miles (x 1000)  
82.5  
137.5  
82.5  
90  
150  
90  
97.5  
162.5  
97.5  
105  
175  
105  
112.5  
187.5  
112.5  
120  
200  
120  
127.5  
212.5  
127.5  
135  
225  
135  
142.5  
237.5  
142.5  
150  
250  
150  
reading or months, whichever comes first.  
km (x 1000)  
months  
CHASSIS AND BODY  
1. Clutch (for manual transmission)  
Pedal and fluid level  
*2. Brake discs and pads  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(front)  
(rear)  
Brake drums and shoes  
*3. Brake hoses and pipes  
4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement  
5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment  
6. Parking brake lever and *cable  
Lever movement check, *adjustment  
7. Tires (including tire rotation)  
*8. Wheel discs  
*9. Wheel bearings  
*10. Suspension system  
*11. Propeller shafts/Drive shafts  
*12. Manual transmission oil  
13. Automatic transmission (A/T)  
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*I  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
Fluid level  
*Fluid change  
*Fluid hose  
Replace every 175000 km (105000 miles)-----5-speed A/T  
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
*14. Transfer oil  
*15. Differential & Extension (for 2WD) oil  
16. Steering system  
Steering wheel movement,  
*linkage  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
*17. Power steering (if equipped)  
18. All Latches, Hinges and Locks  
19. Air conditioner filter (if equipped)  
R
R
R
NOTE:  
This table shows the service schedule up to 250000 km (150000 miles).  
Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.  
Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), the maintenance services enclosed with a rectangle are required.  
Item 9 *I - inspect for wear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions  
If the vehicle is usually used under the conditions corresponding to any severe condition code given below, it is recommended that appli-  
cable maintenance operation be performed at the particular interval shown in the chart below.  
Severe condition code  
A – Repeated short trips  
B – Driving on rough and/or muddy roads  
C – Driving on dusty roads  
D – Driving in extremely cold weather and/or on salted roads  
E – Repeated short trips in extremely cold weather  
H – Towing a trailer  
Severe  
Condition Code  
Maintenance  
Operation  
Maintenance  
Maintenance Interval  
Every 5000 km (3000 miles)  
or 3 months  
A
A
C D E H Engine oil and oil filter  
R
I
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
B
D – H Exhaust pipes and mountings  
Every 5000 km (3000 miles)  
or 3 months  
I
C –  
Air cleaner filter element *1  
Canister air suction filter  
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
R
R
I
Every 100000 km (60000 miles)  
or 60 months  
A
C –  
C –  
Brake discs and pads (front)  
Brake drums and shoes (rear)  
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
B
B
B
H
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
D E H Propeller shafts/Drive shafts  
H Manual transmission oil  
I
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
E
R
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-7  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Severe  
Maintenance  
Operation  
Maintenance  
H Automatic transmission (A/T) fluid  
H Transfer, Differential and Extension oil  
Maintenance Interval  
Condition Code  
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
B
B
B
B
E
E
R
R
T
I
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
Bolts and nuts on suspension  
Drive belt  
Every 25000 km (15000 miles)  
or 15 months  
C –  
Every 10000 km (6000 miles)  
or 6 months  
I
C D –  
Air conditioner filter element *2  
Every 50000 km (30000 miles)  
or 30 months  
R
NOTE:  
I – Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary  
T – Tighten to the specified torque  
R – Replace or change  
L – Lubricate  
*1 Inspect more frequently if the vehicle is used under dusty conditions.  
*2 Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Drive Belt  
Engine Oil and Filter  
Specified Oil  
WARNING  
When the engine is running, keep  
hands, hair, clothing, tools, etc. away  
from the moving fan and drive belts.  
(1)  
10W-30  
DEFL: 9 – 11 mm (0.35 – 0.43 in.)  
5W-30  
o
-30 -20 -10  
-22  
0
32  
10  
50  
20  
68  
30  
86 104  
40  
C
F
o
Make sure the drive belt tension is correct.  
If the belt is too loose, insufficient battery  
charging, engine overheating, poor power  
steering, poor air conditioning or excessive  
belt wear can result. When you press the  
belt with your thumb midway between the  
-4  
14  
Temperature  
PS  
GE  
AC  
EXAMPLE  
“Starburst”  
pulleys, there should be  
deflection  
according to the following chart.  
The belts should also be examined to  
ensure that they are not damaged.  
52D083  
DEFL: 4 – 7 mm (0.16 – 0.28 in.)  
(1) Preferred  
If you need to replace or adjust the belt  
have it done by your SUZUKI dealer.  
Use engine oil with the American Petro-  
leum Institute Certified For Gasoline  
Engines “Starburst” symbol.  
: 100 N (22 lbs, 10 kg) press  
GE: Generator  
DEFL: Deflection  
PS: Power steering pump  
AC: Air conditioner compressor  
Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-  
ing to the above chart.  
We highly recommend you use SAE 5W-  
30 oil.  
52D029  
CAUTION  
Failure to use the recommended oil  
can result in engine damage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-9  
         
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Oil Level Check  
Engine oil dipstick  
Refilling  
FULL  
ADD  
EXAMPLE  
EXAMPLE  
Open  
Close  
52D084  
81A147  
The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-  
ored yellow for easy identification.  
Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a  
clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way  
into the engine, then remove it again. The  
oil on the stick should be between the  
upper and lower limits shown on the stick.  
52D030  
Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly  
through the filler hole to bring the oil level  
to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful  
not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as  
bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the  
engine and allow it to idle for about a  
minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 min-  
utes and check the oil level again.  
It is important to keep the engine oil at the  
correct level for proper lubrication of your  
vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with  
the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level  
indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle  
is on a slope. The oil level should be  
checked either before starting the engine  
or at least 5 minutes after stopping the  
engine.  
If the oil level indication is near the lower  
limit, add enough oil to raise the level to the  
upper limit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-10  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Changing Engine Oil and Filter  
EXAMPLE  
Replace the Oil Filter  
WARNING  
New and used oil and solvent can be  
hazardous. Children and pets may be  
harmed by swallowing new or used  
oil or solvent. Repeated, prolonged  
contact with used engine oil may  
cause skin cancer. Brief contact with  
used oil or solvent may irritate skin.  
• Keep new and used oil and solvent  
away from children and pets.  
• Wear a long-sleeve shirt and water-  
proof gloves.  
• Wash with soap if oil or solvent  
contacts your skin.  
60G306  
60A198  
Drain the engine oil while the engine is still  
warm.  
1) Remove the engine under cover.  
5) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket.  
Tighten the plug with a wrench to the  
specified torque.  
2) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-  
ter counterclockwise and remove it.  
3) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-  
ing surface on the engine where the  
new filter will be seated.  
1) Remove the oil filler cap.  
2) Remove the engine under cover.  
3) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.  
4) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug  
and drain out the engine oil.  
6) Reinstall the engine under cover.  
Tightening torque specification  
35 Nm (25.3 lb-ft, 3.5 kg-m)  
4) Smear a little engine oil around the rub-  
ber gasket of the new oil filter.  
5) Screw on the new filter by hand until the  
filter gasket contacts the mounting sur-  
face.  
WARNING  
The engine oil temperature may be  
high enough to burn your fingers  
when the drain plug is loosened. Wait  
until the drain plug is cool enough to  
touch with your bare hands.  
CAUTION  
To tighten the oil filter properly, it is  
important to accurately identify the  
position at which the filter gasket  
first contacts the mounting surface.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-11  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
EXAMPLE  
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks  
1) Pour oil through the filler hole and  
install the filler cap.  
For the approximate capacity of the oil,  
refer to the “Capacities” item in the  
“SPECIFICATIONS” section.  
2) Start the engine and look carefully for  
leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run  
the engine at various speeds for at least  
5 minutes.  
3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-  
utes. Check the oil level again and add  
oil if necessary. Check for leaks again.  
52D086  
83E010  
CAUTION  
(1) Oil filter  
(2) Oil filter wrench  
(3) 3/4 turn  
When replacing the oil filter, it is rec-  
ommended that you use a genuine  
SUZUKI replacement filter. If you use  
an after-market filter, make sure it is  
of equivalent quality and carefully fol-  
low the manufacturer’s instructions  
and precautions.  
CAUTION  
Oil leaks from around the oil filter or  
drain plug indicate incorrect installa-  
tion or gasket damage. If you find any  
leaks or are not sure that the filter  
has been properly tightened, have  
the vehicle inspected by your SUZUKI  
dealer.  
6) Tighten the filter 3/4 turn from the point  
of contact with the mounting surface (or  
to the specified torque) using an oil filter  
wrench.  
7) Reinstall the engine under cover.  
Tightening torque specification  
14 Nm (10.1 lb-ft, 1.4 kg-m)  
CAUTION  
To prevent oil leakage, make sure  
that the oil filter is tight, but do not  
overtighten it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-12  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Manual transmission  
Gear Oil  
API GRADE  
GL-4  
Specified Gear Oil  
Transmission/  
When replacing gear oil, use gear oil with  
the appropriate viscosity and grade as  
shown in the charts below. We highly rec-  
ommend you use SAE 75W-90 gear oil  
(SAE 80W-90 for front differential oil, rear  
differential oil and transfer gear oil).  
Extension case  
Transfer case  
GL-5  
(Hypoid gear oil)  
Front  
Rear  
Differential  
Transmission/Extension case  
52D087  
Transfer case  
54G095  
(1)  
Differential/Transfer case  
65D594  
(2)  
66J005  
(1) Oil filler and level plug  
(2) Oil drain plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-13  
     
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Extension case (2WD)  
Front differential  
Gear Oil Level Check  
The manual transmission, transfer gears,  
extension case and differentials (front and  
rear) are lubricated with gear oil. To check  
the gear oil level in any of the above loca-  
tions, use the following procedure:  
(1)  
(1)  
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Set  
parking brake and stop the engine.  
2) Remove the oil filler plug (1).  
3) Check the inside of the hole with your  
finger. If the oil level comes up to the  
bottom of the plug hole, the oil level is  
correct. If so, reinstall the plug.  
(2)  
(2)  
4) If the oil level is low, add gear oil  
through the filler plug hole (1) until the  
oil level reaches the bottom of the filler  
hole, then reinstall the plug.  
66J165  
66J006  
(1) Oil filler and level plug  
(2) Oil drain plug  
Rear differential  
(1)  
(2)  
66J007  
(1) Oil filler and level plug  
(2) Oil drain plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-14  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Tightening torque  
Gear Oil Replacement  
Automatic Transmission  
Fluid  
To change the gear oil in the manual trans-  
mission, transfer case, extension case or  
differential(s), use the following procedure:  
Oil Filler  
Plug  
Oil Drain  
Plug  
Specified Fluid  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Use an automatic transmission fluid  
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309.  
1) Remove the oil filler plug (1).  
2) Remove the drain plug (2), drain the oil  
and reinstall the drain plug.  
Manual  
transmission  
3) Pour new gear oil of the specified type  
through the filler hole until the oil level  
reaches the bottom of the filler hole.  
4) Reinstall the filler plug.  
Fluid Level Check  
CAUTION  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Transfer  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Driving with too much or too little  
fluid can damage the transmission.  
Extension  
case  
WARNING  
After driving the vehicle, gear oil tem-  
perature may be high enough to burn  
you. Wait until the oil filler plug is  
cool enough to touch with your bare  
hands before inspecting or replacing  
gear oil.  
You must check the fluid level with the  
automatic transmission fluid at normal  
operating temperature.  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
Front  
differential  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
23 Nm  
(17.0 lb-ft)  
(2.3 kg-m)  
To check the fluid level:  
Rear  
differential  
1) To warm up the transmission fluid, drive  
the vehicle or idle the engine until the  
temperature gauge indicates normal  
operating temperature.  
CAUTION  
2) Then drive for ten more minutes.  
When tightening these plugs, apply  
sealing compound “SUZUKI Bond  
No. 1215” or equivalent to the plug  
threads to prevent oil leakage and  
tighten them to the specified torque  
shown below.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the specified auto-  
matic transmission fluid. Using auto-  
matic transmission fluid other than  
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309  
may damage the automatic transmis-  
sion of your vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-15  
         
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
NOTE:  
The fluid level should be between the  
two marks in the “HOT” range on the  
dipstick.  
Do not check the fluid level if you have just  
driven the vehicle for a long time at high  
speed, if you have driven in city traffic in  
hot weather, or if the vehicle has been pull-  
ing a trailer. Wait until the fluid cools down  
(about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indica-  
tion will not be correct.  
7) Add just enough specified fluid through  
the dipstick hole to fill the transmission  
to the proper level.  
CAUTION  
After checking or adding oil, be sure  
to insert the dipstick securely.  
3) Park your vehicle on level ground.  
4) Apply the parking brake and then start  
the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for  
two minutes and keep it running during  
the fluid level check.  
5) With your foot on the brake pedal, move  
the gearshift lever through each gear,  
pausing for about three seconds in  
each range. Then move it back to the  
“P” (Park) position.  
Changing Oil  
Since special procedures, materials and  
tools are required to change the automatic  
transmission oil, it is recommended that  
you trust this job to your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
52D032  
The handle of the A/T fluid dipstick is col-  
ored red for easy identification.  
WARNING  
FULL HOT  
LOW HOT  
Be sure to depress the brake pedal  
when moving the gearshift lever, or  
the vehicle can move suddenly.  
65D109  
6) Remove the dipstick, clean it and push  
it back in until the cap seats. Pull out  
the dipstick and read the fluid level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-16  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Selection of Coolant  
Engine Coolant  
To maintain optimum performance and  
durability of your engine, use SUZUKI  
Genuine Coolant or equivalent.  
This type of coolant is best for your cooling  
system as it:  
CAUTION  
(Continued)  
• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi-  
tives. They may not be compatible  
with your cooling system.  
• Do not mix different types of base  
coolants. Doing so may result in  
accelerated seal wear and/or the  
possibility of severe overheating  
and extensive engine/automatic  
transmission damage.  
• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-  
ture.  
• Gives proper protection against freezing  
and boiling.  
• Gives proper protection against corro-  
sion and rust.  
Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-  
age your cooling system. Your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer can help you select the  
proper coolant.  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Check the engine coolant level at the  
reserve tank, not at the radiator. With the  
engine cool, the engine coolant level  
should be between the “FULLand “LOW”  
marks.  
64J151  
CAUTION  
EXAMPLE  
To avoid damaging your cooling sys-  
tem:  
• Always use a high quality ethylene  
glycol base phosphate type coolant  
diluted with distilled water at the  
correct mixture concentration.  
• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/  
50 coolant to distilled water and in  
no case higher than 70/30. Concen-  
trations greater than 70/30 coolant  
to distilled water will cause over-  
heating conditions.  
Adding Engine Coolant  
If the engine coolant level is below the  
“LOW” mark, more engine coolant should  
be added. Remove the reserve tank cap  
and add engine coolant until the reserve  
tank level reaches the “FULLmark. Never  
fill the reserve tank above the “FULLmark.  
FULL  
LOW  
• Do not use straight coolant nor  
plain water.  
60A208  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-17  
         
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Engine Coolant Replacement  
CAUTION  
Open  
Close  
• The mixture you use should con-  
tain 50% concentration of anti-  
freeze.  
• If the lowest ambient temperature  
in your area is expected to be –35  
°C (–31°F) or below, use higher  
concentrations up to 60% following  
the instructions on the antifreeze  
container.  
• When putting the cap on the  
reserve tank, line up the arrow on  
the cap and the arrow on the tank.  
Failure to follow this can result in  
coolant leakage.  
66J191  
66J151  
1) When the engine is cool, remove the  
radiator cap by turning it slowly to the  
left until a “stop” is felt. Do not press  
down while turning the cap. Wait until  
any pressure is released, then press  
down on the cap and continue turning it  
to the left.  
WARNING  
It is hazardous to remove the radiator  
cap when the engine coolant temper-  
ature is high, because scalding fluid  
and steam may be blown out under  
pressure. Wait until the engine cool-  
ant temperature has lowered before  
removing the cap.  
WARNING  
Engine coolant is harmful or fatal if  
swallowed or inhaled. Do not drink  
antifreeze or coolant solution. If swal-  
lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme-  
diately contact  
a
poison control  
center or a physician. Avoid inhaling  
mist or hot vapors; if inhaled, remove  
to fresh air. If coolant gets in eyes,  
flush eyes with water and seek medi-  
cal attention. Wash thoroughly after  
handling. Solution can be poisonous  
to animals. Keep out of the reach of  
children and animals.  
2) Remove the reservoir by lifting it up,  
and drain the reservoir completely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-18  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
EXAMPLE  
fluid tank. If the fluid level is near empty,  
refill it.  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
Front and rear (if equipped)  
EXAMPLE  
Use a good quality windshield washer  
fluid, diluted with water as necessary.  
WARNING  
Do not use “anti-freeze” solution in  
the windshield washer reservoir. This  
can severely impair visibility when  
sprayed on the windshield, and also  
damage your vehicle’s paint.  
CAUTION  
64J191  
(or opposite side)  
3) Loosen the drain plug attached to the  
lower part of the radiator and drain the  
engine coolant into a suitable container.  
4) Reinstall the reservoir and fill it with  
engine coolant to the “FULLline.  
Damage may result if the washer  
motor is operated with no fluid in the  
washer tank.  
66J008  
5) Tighten the drain plug on the radiator,  
fill the radiator with engine coolant and  
install the radiator cap.  
6) After filling, let the engine idle for about  
2 – 3 minutes to get rid of air in the  
cooling system. Then, stop the engine.  
7) Check the engine coolant level in the  
radiator again. If the level has gone  
down, add more engine coolant.  
CAUTION  
66J116  
The engine coolant must be replaced  
with the vehicle on level ground.  
Check that there is washer fluid in the tank  
by looking at the washer fluid level gauge  
which is attached to the cap of the washer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-19  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Air Cleaner  
Spark Plugs  
CAUTION  
The air cleaner element should be  
replaced every 50000 km (30000  
miles). More frequent replacement is  
necessary when you drive under  
dusty conditions.  
66J167  
66J009  
If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there  
will be greater intake resistance, resulting  
in decreased power output and increased  
fuel consumption.  
Check and clean periodically according to  
the following procedure:  
1) Take off the air cleaner case cover.  
Remove the element from the air  
cleaner case cover.  
2) This air cleaner element is of dry type.  
Remember that it needs cleaning  
according to the following method.  
3) Blow off dust on cleaner element by  
compressed air from inside the ele-  
ment, or replace the element as neces-  
sary.  
65D434  
You should inspect spark plugs periodically  
for carbon deposits. When carbon accu-  
mulates on a spark plug, a strong spark  
may not be produced. Remove carbon  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-20  
       
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
deposits with a wire or pin and adjust the  
spark plug gap.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
To access the spark plugs:  
1) Remove the engine cover.  
2) Disconnect the coupler (1) while push-  
ing the release lever.  
3) Remove the bolt.  
4) Pull the ignition coil out.  
65D477  
WARNING  
Failure to follow the guidelines below  
can result in personal injury or seri-  
ous damage to the brake system.  
• If the brake fluid in the reservoir  
drops below a certain level, the  
brake warning light on the instru-  
ment panel will come on (the  
engine must be running with the  
parking brake fully disengaged.)  
Should the light come on, immedi-  
ately ask your SUZUKI dealer to  
inspect the brake system.  
• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in  
the brake system which should be  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer  
immediately.  
• Brake fluid can harm your eyes and  
damage painted surfaces. Use cau-  
tion when refilling the reservoir.  
(Continued)  
1.0 – 1.1 mm  
(0.039 – 0.043 in.)  
64J154  
Check the brake fluid level by looking at  
the reservoir in the engine compartment.  
Check that the fluid level is between the  
“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluid  
level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the  
“MAX” line with DOT3 brake fluid.  
80G093  
CAUTION  
When replacing spark plugs, you  
should use the brand and type speci-  
fied for your vehicle. For the speci-  
fied  
plugs,  
refer  
to  
the  
“SPECIFICATIONS” section at the  
end of this book. If you wish to use a  
brand of spark plug other than the  
specified plugs, consult your SUZUKI  
dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-21  
     
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
NOTE:  
measured above is less than the minimum  
distance required, have your vehicle  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.  
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be  
expected to gradually fall as the brake  
pads wear.  
WARNING  
(Continued)  
• Do not use any fluid other than  
DOT3 brake fluid. Do not use  
reclaimed fluid or fluid that has  
been stored in old or open contain-  
ers. It is essential that foreign parti-  
cles and other liquids are kept out  
of the brake fluid reservoir.  
NOTE:  
When measuring the distance between the  
brake pedal and floor wall, push in the floor  
carpet as far as it goes and measure the  
distance between the carpet surface and  
the brake pedal.  
Brake Pedal  
WARNING  
Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-  
lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-  
tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,  
do not induce vomiting. Immediately  
contact a poison control center or a  
physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,  
flush eyes with water and seek medi-  
cal attention. Wash thoroughly after  
handling. Solution can be poisonous  
to animals. Keep out of the reach of  
children and animals.  
“a”  
Floor carpet  
65D345  
Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance  
“a”  
70 mm (2.8 in.)  
CAUTION  
With the engine running and the parking  
brake set, measure the distance between  
the brake pedal and floor carpet when the  
pedal is depressed with approximately 300  
N (66 lbs, 30 kg) of force. The minimum  
distance required is as specified. Since  
your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjust-  
ing, there is no need for pedal adjustment.  
If the pedal to floor carpet distance as  
The brake fluid should be replaced  
according to the maintenance sched-  
ule. Have the brake fluid replaced by  
your SUZUKI dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-22  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Parking Brake Lever  
EXAMPLE  
Steering Wheel  
EXAMPLE  
200 N (44 lbs, 20 kg)  
“c”  
“b”  
60G104  
60A226  
66J233  
WARNING  
Ratchet tooth specification “b”  
5th – 7th  
Steering wheel play “c”  
If you experience any of the following  
problems with your vehicle’s brake  
system, have the vehicle inspected  
immediately by your SUZUKI dealer.  
• Poor braking performance  
• Uneven braking (Brakes not work-  
ing uniformly on all wheels.)  
• Excessive pedal travel  
• Brake dragging  
• Excessive noise  
• (Except ABS equipped vehicle)  
Pedal pulsation (Pedal pulsates  
when pressed for braking.)  
0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)  
Check the parking brake for proper adjust-  
ment by counting the number of clicks  
made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly  
pull up on the parking brake lever to the  
point of full engagement. The parking  
brake lever should stop between the speci-  
fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels  
should be securely locked. If the parking  
brake is not properly adjusted or the  
brakes drag after the lever has been fully  
released, have the parking brake inspected  
and/or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer.  
Check the play of the steering wheel by  
gently turning it from left to right and mea-  
suring the distance that it moves before  
you feel slight resistance. The play should  
be between the specified values. Check  
that the steering wheel turns easily and  
smoothly without rattling by turning it all the  
way to the right and to the left while driving  
very slowly in an open area. If the amount  
of free play is outside the specification or  
you find anything else to be wrong, an  
inspection must be performed by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-23  
     
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Power Steering (if equipped)  
Clutch Pedal  
Tires  
For safe operation of your vehicle, it is  
important that the tires be the correct type  
and size, in good condition, and properly  
inflated. Be sure to follow the requirements  
and recommendations in this section.  
(1)  
(2)  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded  
into its sidewall. The example below shows  
a typical passenger car tire.  
Typical Passenger Car Tire Sidewall  
I
C
64J155  
D
64J154  
J
(1) UPPER  
(2) LOWER  
Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-  
tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.  
If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully  
depressed, have the clutch inspected by  
your SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch fluid level  
is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the “MAX”  
line with DOT3 brake fluid.  
B
H
Check the steering box case, vane pump  
and hose connections for leaks or damage.  
G
Power Steering Fluid  
Check the fluid level by looking at the res-  
ervoir in the engine compartment when the  
fluid is cold (about room temperature).  
A
E
EXAMPLE  
F
Check that the fluid level is between the (1)  
and (2) lines. If the fluid level is near the (2)  
line, fill it up to the (1) line with an auto-  
matic transmission fluid equivalent to ATF  
67D027  
A. Tire Manufacturer  
The name of the tire manufacturer is  
shown here.  
®
®
DEXRON -II (Esso JWS 2326) or  
B. Tire Name/Model  
DEXRON -III. Do not overfill.  
The tire name or model is shown  
here.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-24  
             
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
C. Tire Size  
of cord and number of plies in the  
sidewall and under the tread.  
J. M+S Marking  
The tire size code is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a  
particular tire’s width, height, aspect  
ratio, construction type, and service  
description. See the “Tire Size” expla-  
nation later in this section for more  
details.  
This marking indicates the tire has  
some mud and snow capabilities and  
is designed for all-season use.  
I. Load Index and Speed Rating  
The two- or three-digit number is the  
tire’s load index, the maximum load a  
tire can carry at the speed indicated  
by its speed symbol at the maximum  
inflation pressure. The higher the  
number is, the greater the load carry-  
ing capacity. The letter symbol  
denotes the speed at which a tire is  
designed to be driven for extended  
periods of time. (Ratings are listed  
below.)  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an exam-  
ple of a typical passenger car tire size.  
D. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number  
The Department of Transportation  
(DOT) marking indicates that the tire  
is in compliance with the U.S. Depart-  
ment of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards. The letters and  
numbers following the DOT marking  
is the Tire Identification Number  
(TIN). The TIN identifies the tire man-  
ufacturer and plant, tire size, and date  
the tire was manufactured.  
EXAMPLE  
Letter Rating  
Speed Rating  
99 mph  
Q
R
S
T
A
B
C
D
E
106 mph  
112 mph  
118 mph  
124 mph  
130 mph  
149 mph  
168 mph*  
186 mph*  
E. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
Tire manufacturers are required to  
grade tires based on three perfor-  
mance factors: treadwear, traction  
and temperature resistance. Refer to  
the “Uniform Tire Quality Grading”  
section for more details.  
67D028  
U
H
V
W
Y
A. Tire Type  
This letter code indicates the primary  
intended use of the tire. The letter “P”  
identifies a tire primarily intended for  
use on a passenger vehicle.  
B. Tire Width  
F. Load Rating  
Load rating is the maximum weight a  
tire is designed to support in normal  
service.  
This three-digit number indicates the  
tire section width in millimeters from  
sidewall to sidewall.  
G. Max Inflation Pressure  
Max inflation pressure is the maxi-  
*The letters ZR may be used on tires with a  
maximum speed capability over 149 mph  
and will always be used on tires with a  
maximum speed capability over 186 mph.  
mum inflation pressure  
designed for.  
a
tire is  
C. Aspect Ratio  
This two-digit number represents the  
tire section height divided by the tire  
section width.  
H. Tire Ply Material  
These tire markings describe the type  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-25  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
D. Construction Code  
Tire Inflation Pressure  
This letter code is used to indicate the  
type of ply construction in the tire. The  
letter “R” means radial ply tire con-  
struction, the letter “D” means diago-  
nal or bias ply construction, and the  
letter “B” means belted-bias ply con-  
struction.  
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation  
Pressures  
Tire inflation pressure should be checked  
when the tire is cold. “Cold tire inflation  
pressure” is the pressure in a tire that has  
been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) or  
has been standing for three hours or more.  
220 kPa  
Front Tires  
32 psi  
220 kPa  
Rear Tires  
32 psi  
E. Rim Diameter  
220 kPa  
This two-digit number is the wheel or  
rim diameter in inches.  
Spare  
32 psi  
WARNING  
NOTE:  
The tire inflation pressure will change due  
to changes in atmospheric pressure, tem-  
perature or tire temperature when driving.  
To reduce the chance that the low tire  
pressure warning light will come on due to  
normal changes in temperature and atmo-  
spheric pressure, it is important to check  
and adjust the tire pressures when the  
tires are cold. Tires that appear to be at the  
specified pressure when checked after  
driving, when the tires are warm, could  
have pressure below the specification  
when the tires cool down. Also, tires that  
are inflated to the specified pressure in a  
warm garage may have pressure below the  
specification when the vehicle is driven  
outside in very cold temperature. If you  
adjust the tire pressure in a garage that is  
warmer than the outside temperature, you  
should add 1 psi to the recommended cold  
tire inflation pressure for every 10°F differ-  
ence between garage temperature and  
outside temperature.  
Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires  
which are all the same type and size.  
This is important to ensure proper  
steering and handling of the vehicle.  
Never mix tires of different size or  
type on the four wheels of your vehi-  
cle. Mixing tires could cause you to  
lose control while driving which may  
lead to an accident. The size and type  
of tires used should be only those  
approved by SUZUKI Motor Corpora-  
tion as standard or optional equip-  
ment for your vehicle.  
54G307  
The front, rear and spare tire pressure  
specifications for your vehicle are shown  
below and are listed on the Tire and Load-  
ing Information Label, which is located on  
the driver’s door lock pillar. The Tire and  
Loading Information Label contains the fol-  
lowing information:  
• Seating Capacity  
• Maximum Allowed Combined Weight of  
Occupants and Cargo  
• Original Tire Size  
• Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-  
sure of Original Tires  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-26  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Measuring air pressure  
Tire Inspection  
Use the following steps to achieve proper  
tire inflation:  
Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a  
month by performing the following checks:  
1) Measure the air pressure with a tire  
gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-  
sary. Remember to check the spare  
tire, too. Refer to the “Measuring Air  
Pressure” section.  
WARNING  
• Air pressures should be checked  
when the tires are cold or you may  
get inaccurate readings.  
• Check the inflation pressure from  
time to time while inflating the tire  
gradually, until the specified pres-  
sure is obtained.  
• Never underinflate or overinflate  
the tires.  
Underinflation can cause unusual  
handling characteristics or can  
cause the rim to slip on the tire  
bead, resulting in an accident or  
damage to the tire or rim.  
Underinflation can also cause tires  
to overheat, leading to tire failure.  
Overinflation can cause the tire to  
burst, resulting in personal injury.  
Overinflation can also cause  
unusual handling characteristics  
which may result in an accident.  
1) Identify the recommended tire pressure  
on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Infor-  
mation Label or in the owner’s manual.  
2) Remove the valve cap from the tire  
valve stem.  
3) Using a reliable pressure gauge, mea-  
sure the tire inflation pressure by press-  
ing the tire gauge firmly onto the valve  
to get  
a
pressure measurement.  
Remember that inflation pressures  
should be checked when the tires are  
“cold”, meaning before they have been  
driven one mile or after sitting for three  
hours or more allowing the tire to cool  
to ambient air temperature.  
4) If the air pressure is too high, slowly  
release the air by pressing on the tire  
valve stem with the edge of the tire  
gauge until you reach the correct pres-  
sure.  
5) If the air pressure is too low, fill the tire  
with air at a service station until it  
reaches the recommended pressure.  
6) Make sure all tires have the same air  
pressure (unless the owner’s manual  
indicates otherwise).  
54G136  
(1) Tread wear indicator  
(2) Indicator location mark  
2) Check that the depth of the tread  
groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).  
To help you check this, the tires have  
molded-in tread wear indicators in the  
grooves. When the indicators appear  
on the tread surface, the remaining  
depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)  
or less and the tire should be replaced.  
3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and  
damage. Any tires with cracks or other  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-27  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
damage should be replaced. If any tires  
show abnormal wear, have them  
inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
The U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration has developed a grading  
system for evaluating the performance of  
passenger car tires. The following informa-  
tion will help you understand the grading  
system, which applies to vehicles sold in  
the U.S. Consult your SUZUKI dealer or  
tire retailer for help in choosing the correct  
replacement tires for your vehicle.  
WARNING  
Replacing the wheels and tires  
equipped on your vehicle with certain  
combinations of aftermarket wheels  
and tires can significantly change the  
steering and handling characteris-  
tics of your vehicle. Oversized tires  
may also rub against the fender over  
bumps, causing vehicle damage or  
tire failure. Therefore, use only those  
WARNING  
Hitting curbs and running over rocks  
can damage tires and affect wheel  
alignment. Be sure to have tires and  
wheel alignment checked periodically  
by your SUZUKI dealer.  
Quality grades can be found where appli-  
cable on the tire sidewall between tread  
shoulder and maximum section width. For  
example:  
wheel  
and  
tire  
combinations  
4) Check for loose wheel nuts.  
5) Check that there are no nails, stones or  
other objects sticking into the tires.  
approved by SUZUKI Motor Corpora-  
tion as standard or optional equip-  
ment  
for  
your  
vehicle.  
For  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
information regarding the specified  
tires, refer to the Tire Information  
Label located on the driver’s side  
door pillar or the “SPECIFICATIONS”  
section.  
WARNING  
DOT Quality Grades  
Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires  
which are all the same type and size.  
This is important to ensure proper  
steering and handling of the vehicle.  
Never mix tires of different size or  
type on the four wheels of your vehi-  
cle. The size and type of tires used  
should be only those approved by  
SUZUKI Motor Corporation as stan-  
dard or optional equipment for your  
vehicle.  
Treadwear  
Traction AA A B C  
Temperature A B C  
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform To  
Federal Safety Requirements in Addition  
To These Grades  
CAUTION  
Replacing the original tires with tires  
of a different size may result in false  
speedometer or odometer readings.  
Check with your SUZUKI dealer  
before purchasing replacement tires  
that differ in size from the original  
tires.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-  
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when  
tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the  
government course as a tire graded 100.  
The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use,  
however and may depart significantly from  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-28  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
the norm due to variations in driving habits,  
service practices and differences in road  
characteristics and climate.  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.  
Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel  
than the minimum required by law.  
schedule. After rotation, adjust front and  
rear tire pressures to the specification  
listed on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading  
Information Label.  
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to low-  
est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades rep-  
resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet  
pavement as measured under controlled  
conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire  
marked C may have poor traction perfor-  
mance.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly  
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-  
sive speed, underinflation or exces-  
sive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause heat buildup  
and possible tire failure.  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the  
parts to which it is fastened, can  
make wheel nuts become loose after  
a time. The wheel could come off and  
cause an accident. When you change  
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from  
places where the wheel attaches to  
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can  
use a cloth or a paper towel to do  
this; but be sure to use a scraper or  
wire brush later, if you need to, to get  
all the rust or dirt off.  
Tire Rotation  
4-tire rotation  
The traction grade assigned to this  
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-  
ing traction tests, and does not  
include  
acceleration,  
cornering,  
hydroplaning or peak traction charac-  
teristics.  
Temperature – A, B, C  
The temperature grades are A (the high-  
est), B and C, representing the tire’s resis-  
tance to the generation of heat and its  
ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor  
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-  
perature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and  
excessive temperature can lead to sudden  
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a  
level of performance which all passenger  
car tires must meet under the Federal  
65D459  
To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to  
prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-  
trated. Tires should be rotated as recom-  
mended in the periodic maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-29  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Changing Wheels  
To change a wheel, use the following pro-  
cedure:  
(B)  
1) Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel  
from the vehicle.  
NOTE:  
How to remove the spare wheel:  
(1)  
(A)  
(2)  
64J179  
64J180  
(Half cover type)  
2. Pull out the lock cover (B) fitted on  
the lock nut of the spare wheel while  
inserting the key full into the key hole  
of the lock cover (B).  
Remove the center bolt (1), then  
remove the outer cover (2) of the  
spare wheel half cover.  
3. Remove the lock nut and wheel nuts  
of the spare wheel, then remove the  
spare wheel with both hands.  
64J178  
2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel  
nuts.  
3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking  
instructions in the “EMERGENCY SER-  
VICE” section in this manual).  
4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.  
5) Install the new wheel and replace the  
wheel nuts with their cone shaped end  
facing the wheel. Tighten each nut  
snugly by hand until the wheel is  
securely seated on the hub.  
1. (Full cover type)  
Release the lock at the underneath  
of the spare wheel full cover (A) as  
shown in the illustration, then  
remove the outer cover of the spare  
wheel full cover.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-30  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
(3)  
WARNING  
Vehicle equipped with P225/65R17  
tires have a spare wheel and tire that  
are a different size than the wheels  
and tires on the vehicle. The spare  
wheel and tire on these vehicles are  
intended for temporary emergency  
use only. The wheel is painted yellow  
to remind you that the wheel and tire  
are for temporary use only. Continu-  
ous use of this spare can result in tire  
failure and loss of control. Always  
observe these precautions when  
using this spare:  
• Be aware that your vehicle will han-  
dle differently with this temporary  
spare.  
• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)  
speed.  
• Replace the temporary spare with a  
standard tire and wheel as soon as  
possible.  
• Do not operate your vehicle in “4H  
LOCK” or “4L LOCK” with this tem-  
porary spare.  
(4)  
EXAMPLE  
81A057  
64J196  
Tightening torque for wheel nut  
100 Nm (72.3 lb-ft, 10.0 kg-m)  
CAUTION  
To avoid the removal of the spare  
wheel full cover while driving, be  
sure to fit the claws (3) of the outer  
cover of the spare wheel full cover to  
each hole (4) of the inner cover of the  
spare wheel full cover.  
6) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts  
to the specified torque in a crisscross  
fashion with a wrench as shown in the  
illustration.  
NOTE:  
How to install the spare wheel:  
When you install the spare wheel to the  
vehicle again, handle it in the reverse order  
of removal.  
• Do not use tire chains on the spare  
tire. If you must use tire chains,  
rearrange the wheels so standard  
tires and wheels are fitted to the  
rear axle.  
(Continued)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-31  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
vehicle capacity weight (total load capac-  
ity), and production options weight.  
GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOL-  
OGY  
WARNING  
Accessory Weight – the combined weight  
(in excess of those standard items which  
may be replaced) of automatic transmis-  
sion, power steering, power brakes, power  
windows, power seats, radio, and heater,  
to the extent that these items are available  
as factory-installed equipment (whether  
installed or not).  
Normal Occupant Weight – 68 kilograms  
times the number of occupants specified in  
the second column of Table 1 (shown  
below).  
(Continued)  
• Replace the spare tire with a new  
one as soon as the tread wear indi-  
cator appears.  
• When replacing the spare tire, use  
a replacement tire with the exact  
same size and construction.  
Occupant distribution  
distribution of  
occupants in a vehicle as specified in the  
third column of Table 1 (shown below).  
Production Options Weight – the combined  
weight of those installed regular production  
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in  
excess of those standard items which they  
replace, not previously considered in curb  
weight or accessory weight, including  
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,  
heavy duty battery, and special trim.  
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure – the pressure  
in a tire that has been driven less than 1  
mile or has been standing for three hours  
or more.  
Snow Tires  
Your vehicle is equipped with all-season  
tires which are designed for use in summer  
and most winter conditions. For improved  
traction in severe winter conditions,  
SUZUKI recommends mounting radial  
snow tires on all four wheels. Snow tires  
must be the same size as the standard  
tires. Also be sure to use the tires of the  
same type and brand on all four wheels of  
your vehicle.  
Curb Weight – the weight of a motor vehi-  
cle with standard equipment including the  
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,  
and, if so equipped, air conditioning and  
additional weight optional engine.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure – the  
cold tire inflation pressure recommended  
by a manufacturer.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall – (1) the side-  
wall that contains a whitewall, bears white  
lettering or bears manufacturer, brand,  
and/or model name molding that is higher  
or deeper than the same molding on the  
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward  
facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that  
has a particular side that must always face  
outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
Rim – metal support for a tire or tire and  
tube assembly upon which the tire beads  
are seated.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight – the rated cargo  
and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150  
lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating  
capacity.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure – the maxi-  
mum cold inflation pressure a tire is  
designed to support in normal service.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight – the  
sum of curb weight, accessory weight,  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire – the  
load on an individual tire that is determined  
by distributing to each axle its share of the  
maximum loaded vehicle weight and divid-  
ing by two.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-32  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire – the load  
on an individual tire that is determined by  
distributing to each axle its share of the  
curb weight, accessory weight, and normal  
occupant weight (distributed in accordance  
with Table 1 shown below) and dividing by  
2.  
NOTE:  
Vehicle Loading  
Even though the number of occupants is  
within the seating capacity, you still must  
make sure that you do not exceed the total  
load capacity of the vehicle.  
Your vehicle was designed for specific load  
capacities. The load capacities of your  
vehicle are indicated by the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR), the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR, front and rear), and  
the total load capacity, the seating capac-  
ity, and the cargo load capacity. The  
GVWR and GAWR (front and rear) are  
listed on the Safety Certification Label  
which is located below the driver’s side  
door latch striker. The total load capacity  
and seating capacity are listed on the Tire  
and Loading Information Label which is  
located below the Safety Certification  
Label. The cargo load capacity can be  
determined as described below.  
Total Load Capacity – Maximum permissi-  
ble weight a vehicle can carry including the  
weight of all the occupants, accessories,  
cargo, plus trailer tongue weight (if towing  
a trailer).  
TABLE 1 – Occupant Loading and Dis-  
tribution For Vehicle Normal Load For  
Various Designated Seating Capacities  
Designated  
Vehicle nor-  
Occupant  
The weight of any accessories already  
installed on your vehicle at the time of pur-  
chase, or that you or the dealer install after  
purchase, must be subtracted from the  
total load capacity to determine how much  
capacity remains available for occupants,  
cargo, and trailer tongue weight (if towing a  
trailer). Contact your dealer for further  
information.  
seating capac- mal load, num- distribution in  
ity, number of ber of  
occupants  
a normally  
loaded vehicle  
2 through 4  
2
3
2 in front  
2 in front, 1 in  
second seat  
5 through 10  
Cargo Load Capacity – Maximum weight  
of cargo and luggage that the vehicle can  
safely carry. Cargo load capacity is the dif-  
ference between the total load capacity of  
the vehicle and the total combined weight  
of all vehicle occupants. Refer to “Steps for  
Determining Correct Load Limit” for details  
on how to determine cargo load capacity.  
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and  
actual loads at the front and rear axles can  
only be determined by weighing the vehicle  
using a vehicle scale. To measure the  
weight and load, try making your vehicle to  
a highway weighing station, shipping com-  
pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.  
Compare these weights to the GVWR and  
GAWR (front and rear) listed on the Safety  
Certification Label. If the gross vehicle  
weight or the load on either axle exceeds  
these ratings, you must remove enough  
weight to bring the load down to the rated  
capacity.  
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall  
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including  
all the occupants, accessories and cargo  
plus the trailer tongue weight if towing a  
trailer).  
GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-  
missible weight on an individual axle.  
Seating Capacity – Maximum number of  
occupants the vehicle is designed to carry.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-33  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on  
your vehicle’s placard.  
2) Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding  
in your vehicle.  
3) Subtract the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers from XXX kg or  
XXX lbs.  
4) The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load  
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”  
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will  
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehi-  
cle, the amount of available cargo and  
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400  
– 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
5) Determine the combined weight of lug-  
gage and cargo being loaded on the  
vehicle. That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,  
load from your trailer will be transferred  
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to  
determine how this reduces the avail-  
able cargo and luggage load capacity of  
your vehicle.  
luggage capacity of your vehicle would be  
600 lbs (950 – 350 = 600 lbs).  
WARNING  
If you later added 2 more passengers, hav-  
ing a combined weight of 325 lbs, the  
cargo and luggage capacity of your vehicle  
would be reduced from 600 lbs to 275 lbs  
(600 – 325 = 275 lbs). As you can see, as  
the number and combined weight of vehi-  
cle occupants increase, the vehicle’s cargo  
and luggage capacity decreases.  
Suppose again, that you were to take a trip  
in your vehicle with the same three pas-  
sengers described above, and you decided  
to tow a trailer having a trailer tongue  
weight of 75 lbs. The cargo and luggage  
capacity would be reduced again, to 200  
lbs (275 – 75 = 200 lbs).  
Never overload your vehicle. Over-  
loading your vehicle can cause dam-  
age to your tires and lead to poor  
steering and braking which can result  
in an accident. The gross vehicle  
weight (sum of the weights of the  
loaded vehicle, driver and passen-  
gers) must never exceed the Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed  
on the Safety Certification Label. In  
addition, never distribute a load so  
that the weight on either the front or  
rear axle exceeds the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the  
Safety Certification Label.  
Determining Compatibility of Tire and  
Vehicle Load Limits  
WARNING  
The tires on your vehicle, when they are  
inflated to the recommended tire inflation  
pressure, have a load-carrying capacity  
that is greater than the load that will be on  
the tires when the vehicle is at its GVWR  
or GAWR limit. Never use replacement  
tires that have a load-carrying capacity  
less than the original tires on your vehicle.  
Tire load-carrying capacity information is  
molded into the tire sidewall typically  
shown as “Max. Load”. Use of replacement  
tires with a lower load-carrying capacity  
than the original tires, or failure to keep the  
tires inflated to recommended tire pres-  
sure, may reduce the GVWR or GAWR  
limit of your vehicle.  
• Always distribute cargo evenly.  
• To avoid personal injury or damage  
to your vehicle, always secure  
cargo to prevent it from shifting if  
the vehicle moves suddenly.  
• Place heavier objects on the floor  
and as far forward in the cargo area  
as possible. Never pile cargo  
higher than the top of the seat-  
backs.  
Vehicle Loading Example  
As an example, suppose that the Tire and  
Loading Information label on your vehicle  
indicates that your vehicle’s total load  
capacity is 950 lbs. If you were to drive  
your vehicle with one passenger, and the  
total combined weight of you and your pas-  
senger was 350 lbs, then the cargo and  
Steps for Determining Correct Load  
Limit  
1) Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-34  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
NOTE:  
Battery  
Use of replacement tires with a higher  
load-carrying capacity than the original  
tires, or using a tire inflation pressure  
higher than the recommended tire inflation  
pressure, will not increase the GVWR or  
GAWR limit of your vehicle.  
WARNING  
To avoid harm to yourself or damage  
to your vehicle or battery, follow the  
jump starting instructions in the  
“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section of  
this manual if it is necessary to jump  
start your vehicle.  
EXAMPLE  
WARNING  
Battery posts, terminals and related  
accessories contain lead and lead  
compounds. Wash hands after han-  
dling.  
60A269  
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery that  
requires infrequent maintenance. You will  
never have to add water. You should, how-  
ever, periodically check the battery, battery  
terminals and battery hold-down bracket  
for corrosion. Remove corrosion using a  
stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water,  
or baking soda mixed with water. After  
removing corrosion, rinse with clean water.  
WARNING  
Batteries produce flammable hydro-  
gen gas. Keep flames and sparks  
away from the battery or an explosion  
may occur. Never smoke when work-  
ing near the battery.  
WARNING  
The test indicator on the top of the battery  
provides information on the condition of  
the battery.  
When checking or servicing the bat-  
tery, disconnect the negative cable.  
Be careful not to cause a short circuit  
by allowing metal objects to contact  
the battery posts and the vehicle at  
the same time.  
If your vehicle is not going to be driven for  
a month or longer, disconnect the cable  
from the negative terminal of the battery to  
help prevent discharge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-35  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Main Fuse Box  
Fuses  
(11) 50A ABS 1  
(12) 20A FI  
ABS actuator fuse  
Main fuse  
Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as  
described below:  
(13)  
Blank  
Main Fuse – The main fuse takes current  
directly from the battery.  
Head light high beam  
fuse, left  
(14) 10A H/L L  
(15) 10A H/L R  
Primary Fuses – These fuses are between  
the main fuse and individual fuses, and are  
for electrical load groups.  
Head light high beam  
fuse, right  
(16) 10A H/L  
(17) 40A ST  
(18) 40A IGN  
Head light fuse  
Starter motor fuse  
Ignition fuse  
Individual Fuses – These fuses are for indi-  
vidual electrical circuits.  
For details on protected circuits, refer to  
the “FUSES AND PROTECTED CIR-  
CUITS” section in this manual.  
Head light low beam  
fuse, left  
(19) 15A H/L LO L  
(20) 15A H/L LO R  
64J157  
Head light low beam  
fuse, right  
Main Fuse / Primary Fuse  
(1) 15A CPRSR  
(2) 20A O2 HTR  
A/C compressor fuse  
The main fuse, primary fuses and some of  
the individual fuses are located in the  
engine compartment. If the main fuse  
blows, no electrical component will func-  
tion. If a primary fuse blows, no electrical  
component in the corresponding load  
group will function. When replacing the  
main fuse or a primary fuse, use a genuine  
SUZUKI replacement.  
O2 sensor heater  
fuse  
(3) 15A THR MOT Throttle motor fuse  
Automatic transmis-  
(4) 20A AT  
sion fuse  
(5) 25A RR DEF  
(6) 15A HORN  
(7) 20A FR FOG  
Rear defogger fuse  
Horn fuse  
Front fog light fuse  
(8) 20A MRR HTR Mirror heater fuse  
Front blower motor  
(9) 40A FR BLW  
fuse  
(10) 30A ABS 2  
ABS actuator fuse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-36  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Fuse under the Dash Board  
Fuse box  
(A) 15A STOP  
(B)  
Stop lamp fuse  
Blank  
PRIMARY  
INDIVIDUAL FUSE  
FUSE  
60A LAMP  
Head light, Accessory,  
Dome light, Sunroof,  
Hazard light, Door lock,  
Rear fog light, Stop  
lamp, Tail light  
Accessory socket  
fuse  
(C) 15A ACC 3  
(D) 10A CRUISE  
(E) 15A ACC 2  
(F) 20A WIP  
Cruise control fuse  
Cigar or Accessory  
socket fuse  
50A IGN 2  
40A 4WD  
Wiper/Washer, Power  
window, Seat heater  
Wiper fuse  
Ignition signal & Seat  
heater fuse  
4WD actuator  
(G) 15A IG2 SIG  
(H) 10A BACK  
(I) 10A ABS/ESP  
(J) 15A A/B  
30A RDTR 1 Radiator fan  
30A RDTR 2 Radiator fan  
Back lamp fuse  
ABS or ESP control-  
ler fuse  
64J192  
WARNING  
Air bag fuse  
Blank  
If a fuse in the main fuse box blows,  
be sure to have your vehicle  
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI  
dealer. Always use a genuine SUZUKI  
replacement. Never use a substitute  
such as a wire even for a temporary  
fix, or extensive electrical damage  
and a fire can result.  
(K)  
(L) 15A HAZ  
Hazard light fuse  
Starter signal fuse  
(J) (I) (H) (G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B) (A)  
(M) 7.5A ST SIG  
RR  
(N) 20A  
BLOW  
(K)  
(U) (T) (S) (R) (Q) (P) (O) (N) (M) (L)  
Blank  
(W)  
(V)  
(O) 25A S/R  
(P) 15A DOME  
(Q) 10A TAIL  
Sun roof motor fuse  
Dome lamp fuse  
Tail light fuse  
Door lock actuator  
fuse  
64J158  
(R) 20A D/L  
(S) 15A ACC  
Radio, Remote door  
mirror fuse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-37  
 
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
(T) 10A METER  
(U) 20A IG COIL  
(V) 20A P/W T  
(W) 30A P/W  
Meter fuse  
WARNING  
Ignition coil fuse  
Power window fuse  
Power window fuse  
Always be sure to replace a blown  
fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-  
age. Never use a substitute such as  
aluminum foil or wire to replace a  
blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and  
the new one blows in a short period  
of time, you may have a major electri-  
cal problem. Have your vehicle  
inspected immediately by your  
SUZUKI dealer.  
OK  
BLOWN  
NOTE:  
60A243  
Make sure that the fuse box cover always  
carries spare fuses.  
65D045  
The fuse box is located under the driver’s  
side of the dashboard. To remove a fuse,  
use the fuse puller provided in the fuse  
box.  
OK  
BLOWN  
81A283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-38  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Center Interior Light (if equipped)  
Headlight Aiming  
Since special procedures are required, we  
recommend you take your vehicle to your  
SUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment.  
Bulb Replacement  
WARNING  
• Light bulbs can be hot enough to  
burn your finger right after being  
turned off. This is true especially  
for halogen headlight bulbs.  
Replace the bulbs after they  
become cool enough.  
• The headlight bulbs are filled with  
pressurized halogen gas. They can  
burst and injure you if they are hit  
or dropped. Handle them carefully.  
64J159  
CAUTION  
Pull down the lens by using a plain screw  
driver covered with a soft cloth as shown.  
To install it, simply push it back in.  
The oils from your skin may cause a  
halogen bulb to overheat and burst  
when the lights are on. Grasp a new  
bulb with a clean cloth.  
The bulb can be removed by simply pulling  
it out. When replacing the bulb, make sure  
that the contact springs are holding the  
bulb securely.  
CAUTION  
Frequent replacement of a bulb indi-  
cates the need for an inspection of  
the electrical system. This should be  
carried out by your SUZUKI dealer.  
NOTE:  
If it is difficult to replace headlight bulbs or  
clearance light bulbs due to under-hood  
components trust this job to your dealer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-39  
       
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Headlights  
Rear Interior Light (if equipped)  
Spot Light (if equipped)  
Pull down the lens by using a plain screw  
driver covered with a soft cloth as shown.  
Low beam  
(Halogen headlamp)  
Ceiling-mount type (if equipped)  
64J160  
Pull down the lens by using a plain screw  
driver covered with a soft cloth as shown.  
To install it, simply push it back in.  
66J036  
66J010  
Remove the bulb holder by turning it coun-  
terclockwise. Pull out the bulb.  
The bulb can be removed by simply pulling  
it out.  
66J108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-40  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Open the engine hood. Disconnect the  
coupler. Remove the sealing rubber.  
Front Fog Light  
Other General Lights  
Bulb holder  
Push the retaining spring forward and  
unhook it. Then remove the bulb. Install a  
new bulb in the reverse order of removal.  
EXAMPLE  
High beam  
(2)  
(1)  
(2)  
(1)  
78F072  
Open the engine hood. Disconnect the  
coupler while pushing the lock release.  
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise to  
remove it.  
54G123  
(1) Removal  
(2) Installation  
To remove a bulb holder from a light hous-  
ing, turn the holder counterclockwise and  
pull it out. To install the holder, push the  
holder in and turn it clockwise.  
78F072  
Open the engine hood. Disconnect the  
coupler while pushing the lock release.  
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise to  
remove it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-41  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Bulb  
EXAMPLE  
Parking/Turn signal light  
License plate light  
(1)  
(3)  
(4)  
(2)  
54G124  
64J163  
75F087  
(3) Removal  
(4) Installation  
Trust this replacement job to your dealer as  
the front grille and the headlight housing  
must be removed for this job.  
Door illumination light  
There are two types of bulb, “Full glass  
type” (1) and “Glass/metal type” (2).  
Rear combination light  
EXAMPLE  
To remove and install a full glass type bulb  
(1), simply pull out or push in the bulb.  
To remove a glass metal type bulb (2) from  
a bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn it  
counterclockwise. To install a new bulb,  
push it in and turn it clockwise.  
You can access the individual bulb or bulb  
holders as follows.  
64J165  
64J164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-42  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Luggage compartment light  
High-mount stop light (if equipped)  
(1)  
64J182  
64J166  
64J181  
2) Release the claws of the light housing  
by the flat head etc. through the service  
holes as shown in the illustration.  
To remove a high-mounted stop light hous-  
ing the following procedure:  
1) Open the tailgate, and remove the trim  
(1) as shown in the illustration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-43  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Wiper Blades  
(2)  
64J183  
64J184  
3) Close the tailgate. Remove a high-  
mounted stop light housing (2) from the  
tailgate.  
4) Remove the each bulb.  
5) Replace the bulbs.  
54G129  
If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-  
aged, or make streaks when wiping,  
replace the wiper blades.  
To install a high-mounted stop light  
housing in the reverse order of removal.  
To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-  
cedures below.  
CAUTION  
To avoid scratching or breaking the  
window, do not let the wiper arm  
strike the window while replacing the  
wiper blade.  
NOTE:  
Some wiper blades may be different from  
the ones described here depending on  
vehicle specifications. If so, consult your  
SUZUKI dealer for proper replacement  
method.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-44  
   
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
For windshield wipers:  
52D102  
60A260  
70G119  
2) Squeeze lock lever (1) towards wiper  
arm (2) and remove the wiper frame  
from the arm as shown.  
3) Pull the locked end of the wiper blade  
firmly to unlock the blade and slide the  
blade out as shown.  
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-  
dow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-45  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Installation  
For rear wipers:  
52D124  
52D125  
(3) Retainer  
(4) Locked end  
4) If the new blade is provided without the  
two metal retainers, move them from  
the old blade to the new one.  
5) Install the new blade in the reverse  
order of removal, with the locked end  
positioned toward the wiper arm. Make  
sure the blade is properly retained by  
all the hooks. Grasp the blade near the  
locked end and pull in the direction of  
the arrows to lock the end into place.  
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making  
sure that the lock lever is snapped  
securely into the arm.  
80G146  
1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-  
dow.  
2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm  
as shown.  
3) Slide the blade out as shown.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-46  
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE  
Air Conditioning System  
If you do not use the air conditioner for a  
long period, such as during winter, it may  
not give the best performance when you  
start using it again. To help maintain opti-  
mum performance and durability of your air  
conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.  
Operate the air conditioner at least once a  
month for one minute with the engine  
idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil  
and helps protect the internal components.  
65D151  
54G135  
NOTE:  
(1) Retainer  
Do not flex the wiper blade frame end  
more than necessary. If you do, it can  
break off.  
4) If the new blade is provided without the  
two metal retainers, move them from  
the old blade to the new one.  
5) Install the new blade in the reverse  
order of removal.  
Make sure the blade is properly  
retained by all the hooks.  
6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the  
reverse order of removal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-47  
   
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 10-1  
Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 10-3  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle ................................................. 10-4  
If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 10-4  
If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 10-5  
If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 10-5  
If You Can Not Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift  
Lever Out of “P” (PARK) .................................................... 10-6  
60G411  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
Jacking Instructions  
(1)  
75F062  
64J194  
1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.  
2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift  
into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has an  
automatic transmission, or shift into “R”  
(Reverse) if your vehicle has a manual  
transmission.  
(1) Jacking point  
64J124  
3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if  
your vehicle is near traffic.  
4) Block the front and rear of the wheel  
diagonally opposite of the wheel being  
lifted.  
(2)  
(4)  
(3)  
5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel  
being lifted as shown in the illustration  
in case that the jack slips.  
64J250  
(2) Upper flat surface  
(3) Lower flat surface  
(4) flange of the body  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-1  
   
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
WARNING  
6) Position the upper flat surface (2) of the  
jack at the inside of the underbody  
flange as shown in the illustration.  
Rear  
• Use the jack only to change wheels  
on level, hard ground.  
• Never jack up the vehicle on an  
inclined surface.  
Front  
• Never raise the vehicle with the  
jack in a location other than the  
designated jacking point near the  
wheel to be changed.  
• Make sure that the jack is raised at  
least 51 mm (2 inches) before it  
contacts the flange. Use of the jack  
when it is within 51 mm (2 inches)  
of being fully collapsed may result  
in failure of the jack.  
(6)  
(5)  
64J252  
(7)  
7) Position the jack vertically and raise the  
jack by turning the jack handle clock-  
wise until the jack head recess fits  
around the flange at the designated  
jacking point as shown in the illustra-  
tion.  
8) Continue to raise the jack slowly and  
smoothly until the tire clears the  
ground. Do not raise the vehicle more  
than necessary.  
• Never get under the vehicle when it  
is supported by the jack.  
(8)  
64J251  
• Never run the engine when the  
vehicle is supported by the jack  
and never allow passengers to  
remain in the vehicle.  
(5) Designated jacking point  
(6) Jack handle  
(7) Raise  
(8) Lower  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2  
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except  
those necessary for safety reasons (for  
example, headlights or hazard lights).  
Jump Starting Instructions  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Your vehicle should not be started by  
pushing or towing. This starting  
method could result in permanent  
damage to the catalytic converter.  
Use jumper cables to start a vehicle  
with a weak or run-down battery.  
Engine Hook  
• Never attempt to jump start your  
vehicle if the battery appears to be  
frozen. Batteries in this condition  
may explode or rupture if jump  
starting is attempted.  
EXAMPLE  
• When making jumper cable con-  
nections, be certain that your  
hands and the jumper cables  
remain clear from pulleys, belts or  
fans.  
Discharged  
Battery  
When jump starting your vehicle, use  
the following procedure:  
12V BATTERY  
• Batteries  
produce  
flammable  
hydrogen gas. Keep flames and  
sparks away from the battery or an  
explosion may occur. Never smoke  
when working near the battery.  
• If the booster battery you use for  
jump starting is installed in another  
vehicle, make sure the two vehicles  
are not touching each other.  
Charged Battery  
60A270  
• If your battery discharges repeat-  
edly, for no apparent reason, have  
your vehicle inspected by an autho-  
rized SUZUKI dealer.  
• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-  
age to your vehicle or battery, fol-  
low the jump starting instructions  
below precisely and in order. If you  
are in doubt, call for qualified road  
service.  
60A269  
1) Use only a 12 volt battery to jump start  
your vehicle. Position the good 12V bat-  
tery close to your vehicle so that the  
jumper cables will reach both batteries.  
When using a battery installed on  
another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE  
VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking  
brakes fully on both vehicles.  
EXAMPLE  
52D129  
3) Make jumper cable connections as fol-  
lows:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-3  
   
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
1. Connect one end of the first jumper  
cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery (1).  
2. Connect the other end to the positive  
(+) terminal of the booster battery  
(2).  
3. Connect one end of the second  
jumper cable to the negative (–) ter-  
minal of the booster battery (2).  
4. Make the final connection to an  
unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.  
engine hook (3)) of the engine of the  
vehicle with the discharged battery  
(1).  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle  
If the Starter Does Not  
Operate  
Emergency Towing  
1) Try turning the ignition switch to the  
“START” position with the headlights  
turned on to determine the battery con-  
dition. If the headlights go excessively  
dim or go off, it usually means that  
either the battery has run down or bat-  
tery terminal contact is poor. Recharge  
the battery or correct battery terminal  
contact if necessary.  
If your vehicle is disabled, it may be towed  
by a tow truck using one of the following  
methods:  
1) Tow the vehicle with two wheels lifted  
by the tow truck and the other two  
wheels on a towing dolly.  
2) Use the appropriate towing method  
specified for your vehicle in the “Towing  
Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-  
tion, but with the wheels lifted by the  
tow truck instead of on a towing dolly.  
Be sure to carefully follow the specific  
instructions provided in the “Towing  
Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-  
tion.  
2) If the headlights remain bright, check  
the fuses. If the reason for failure of the  
starter is not obvious, there may be a  
major electrical problem. Have the vehi-  
cle inspected by your authorized  
SUZUKI dealer.  
WARNING  
Never connect the jumper cable  
directly to the negative (–) terminal of  
the discharged battery, or an explo-  
sion may occur.  
CAUTION  
If vehicle damage (such as steering  
or drivetrain damage, inability to  
operate free axle mechanism, etc.)  
prevent normal use of the towing pro-  
cedures for your vehicle described in  
the “Towing Your Vehicle (recre-  
ational towing)” section, have your  
vehicle towed with two wheels lifted  
by the tow truck and the other two  
wheels on a towing dolly.  
4) If the booster battery you are using is  
installed on another vehicle, start the  
engine of the vehicle with the booster  
battery. Run the engine at moderate  
speed.  
5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the  
discharged battery.  
6) Remove the jumper cables in the exact  
reverse order in which you connected  
them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-4  
       
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
If the temperature indication does not  
come down to within the normal, accept-  
able range:  
If the Engine is Flooded  
If the Engine Overheats  
If the engine is flooded with gasoline, it  
may be hard to start. If this happens, press  
the accelerator pedal all the way to the  
floor and hold it there while cranking the  
engine. (Do not operate the starter motor  
for more than 15 seconds).  
The engine could overheat temporarily  
under severe driving conditions. If the  
engine coolant temperature gauge indi-  
cates overheating during driving:  
1) Turn off the engine and check that the  
water pump belt and pulleys are not  
damaged or slipping. If any abnormality  
is found, correct it.  
2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.  
If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”  
line, look for leaks at the radiator, water  
pump and radiator and heater hoses. If  
you locate any leaks that may have  
caused the overheating, do not run the  
engine until these problems have been  
corrected.  
3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add  
coolant to the reservoir and then the  
radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine  
Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND  
MAINTENANCE” section.)  
1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.  
2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and  
park.  
3) Let the engine run at normal idle speed  
for a few minutes until the indicator is  
within the normal, acceptable tempera-  
ture range shown by the white band  
between “H” and “C”.  
WARNING  
If you see or hear escaping steam,  
stop the vehicle in a safe place and  
immediately turn off the engine to let  
it cool. Do not open the hood when  
steam is present. When the steam  
can no longer be seen or heard, open  
the hood to see if the coolant is still  
boiling. If it is, you must wait until it  
stops boiling before you proceed.  
Also, be careful not to touch hot  
engine parts (radiator, water hoses,  
engine etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-5  
       
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or  
“ACC” position.  
4) Remove the cover (1) on the hole.  
5) With inserting the key or the flat end rod  
into the slot in the hole, shift the gear-  
shift lever to the desired position.  
If You Can Not Shift  
Automatic Transmission  
Gearshift Lever Out of “P”  
(PARK)  
This procedure is for emergency use only.  
If repeated use of this procedure is neces-  
sary, or the procedure does not work as  
described, take the vehicle to your dealer  
for repair.  
(1)  
66J191  
WARNING  
• It is hazardous to remove the radia-  
tor cap when the water temperature  
is high, because scalding fluid and  
steam may be blown out under  
pressure. The cap should only be  
taken off when the coolant temper-  
ature has lowered.  
• To prevent personal injury, keep  
hands, tools and clothing away  
from the engine cooling fan and air-  
conditioner fan (if equipped). These  
electric fans can automatically turn  
on without warning.  
64J216  
Vehicles with an automatic transmission  
have an electrically operated park-lock fea-  
ture. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged,  
or there is some other electrical failure, the  
automatic transmission cannot be shifted  
out of Park in the normal way. Jump start-  
ing may correct the condition. If not, follow  
the procedure described below. This pro-  
cedure will permit shifting the transmission  
out of Park.  
1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly  
applied.  
2) If the engine is running, stop the  
engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-6  
   
EMERGENCY SERVICE  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-7  
APPEARANCE CARE  
APPEARANCE CARE  
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 11-1  
Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 11-3  
60G412  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
APPEARANCE CARE  
vehicle which are not well ventilated to  
permit quick drying.  
If you frequently drive on salted roads, your  
vehicle should be washed at least once a  
month during the winter. If you live near the  
ocean, your vehicle should be washed at  
least once a month throughout the year.  
Corrosion Prevention  
It is important to take good care of your  
vehicle to protect it from corrosion.  
Listed below are instructions for how to  
maintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion.  
Please read and follow these instructions  
carefully.  
Wash your vehicle immediately after using  
it off-road. For washing instructions, refer  
to the “Vehicle Cleaning” section.  
Important Information About Corro-  
sion  
Remove foreign material deposits  
Foreign material such as salts, chemicals,  
road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and  
industrial fall-out may damage the finish of  
your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.  
Remove these types of deposits as quickly  
as possible. If these deposits are difficult to  
wash off, an additional cleaner may be  
required. Be sure that any cleaner you use  
is not harmful to painted surfaces and is  
specifically intended for your purposes.  
Follow the manufacturer’s directions when  
using these special cleaners.  
Common causes of corrosion  
1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture  
or chemicals in hard to reach areas of  
the vehicle underbody or frame.  
2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to  
treated or painted metal surfaces  
resulting from minor accidents or  
impact from stones and gravel.  
52D151  
This information illustrates the necessity of  
keeping your vehicle (particularly the  
underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It  
is equally important to repair any damage  
to the paint or protective coatings as soon  
as possible.  
Environmental conditions which accel-  
erate corrosion  
1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea  
air or industrial pollution will all acceler-  
ate the corrosion of metal.  
2) High humidity will increase the rate of  
corrosion particularly when the temper-  
ature range is just above the freezing  
point.  
3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle  
for an extended period of time may pro-  
mote corrosion even though other body  
sections may be completely dry.  
WARNING  
How to Help Prevent Corrosion  
Foreign material can lodge between  
the fuel tank of your vehicle and the  
skid plate which covers it. You should  
periodically clean out any foreign  
material which has accumulated in  
this area, since it could create a fire  
hazard.  
Wash your vehicle frequently  
The best way to preserve the finish on your  
vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to  
keep it clean with frequent washing.  
Wash your vehicle at least once during the  
winter and once immediately after the win-  
ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the  
underside, as clean and dry as possible.  
4) High temperatures will cause an accel-  
erated rate of corrosion to parts of the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-1  
   
APPEARANCE CARE  
Repair finish damage  
authorized SUZUKI dealer for information  
on these shields.  
Cover your vehicle  
Carefully examine your vehicle for damage  
to the painted surfaces, especially if it is  
used off-road. Should you find any chips or  
scratches in the paint, touch them up  
immediately to prevent corrosion from  
starting. If the chips or scratches have  
gone through to the bare metal, have a  
qualified body shop make the repair.  
Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-  
lated area  
Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly  
ventilated area. If you often wash your  
vehicle in the garage or if you frequently  
drive it in when wet, your garage may be  
damp. The high humidity in the garage  
may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet  
vehicle may corrode even in a heated  
garage if the ventilation is poor.  
Keep passenger and cargo compart-  
ments clean  
Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate  
under the floor mats and may cause corro-  
sion. Occasionally, check under these  
mats to ensure that this area is clean and  
dry. More frequent checks are necessary if  
the vehicle is used off road or in wet  
weather.  
WARNING  
50G203  
Do not apply additional undercoating  
or rust preventive coating on or  
around exhaust system components  
such as the catalytic converter,  
exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be  
started if the undercoating substance  
becomes overheated.  
If you can not regularly park your vehicle in  
a garage, we recommend you use a vehi-  
cle cover. Years of exposure to midday sun  
can cause the colors in paint, plastic parts  
and fabrics to fade. Covering your vehicle  
with a high-quality, breathable” vehicle  
cover can help protect the finish from the  
harmful UV rays in sunlight, and can  
reduce the amount of dust and air pollution  
reaching the surface. Your SUZUKI dealer  
can help you select the right cover for your  
vehicle.  
Certain cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-  
ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-  
rosive by nature. These products should  
be transported in sealed containers. If a  
spill or leak does occur, clean and dry the  
area immediately.  
Use mud and gravel shields  
The use of mud and gravel shields will help  
protect your vehicle, especially if you fre-  
quently drive on gravel or salted roads.  
Full-size shields, which extend as close to  
the road as is practical, are the best. The  
fittings for such shields should also be cor-  
rosion resistant. Please check with your  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-2  
APPEARANCE CARE  
damp cloth to remove dirt and the soap  
solution. If some dirt still remains on the  
surface, repeat this procedure.  
help loosen dirt. After dirt is loosened,  
rinse the mat thoroughly with water and  
dry it in the shade.  
Vehicle Cleaning  
Fabric upholstery  
Carpets  
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Using a mild soap solution, rub stained  
areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove  
soap, rub the areas again with a cloth  
dampened with water. Repeat this until the  
stain is removed, or use a commercial fab-  
ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a  
fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-  
facturer’s instructions and precautions.  
Remove dirt and soil as much as possible  
with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap  
solution, rub stained areas with a clean  
damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas  
again with a cloth dampened with water.  
Repeat this until the stain is removed, or  
use  
a
commercial carpet cleaner for  
tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,  
carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-  
tions and precautions.  
Leather upholstery  
Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,  
wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.  
To remove soap, wipe the areas again with  
a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the  
areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this  
until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a  
commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt  
or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, care-  
fully follow the manufacture’s instructions  
and precautions. Do not use solvent type  
cleaners or abrasive cleaners.  
Instrument panel and console  
76G044S  
NOTE:  
Wipe up spills containing chemicals, alco-  
hol, etc., immediately with a soft, damp  
cloth. Use a mild soap solution if neces-  
sary. Do not use cleaners or polishes con-  
taining strong solvents or acidic solutions.  
These chemicals may stain and discolor  
the instrument panel and console.  
When cleaning the interior or exterior  
of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable  
solvents such lacquer thinners, gas-  
oline, benzene or cleaning materials  
such as bleaches and strong house-  
hold detergents. The materials could  
cause personal injury or damage to  
the vehicle.  
Cleaning the Exterior  
CAUTION  
Seat belts  
Clean seat belts with a mild soap and  
water. Do not use bleach or dye on the  
belts. They may weaken the fabric in the  
belts.  
Cleaning Interior  
It is important that your vehicle be  
kept clean and free from dirt. Failure  
to keep your vehicle clean may result  
in fading of the paint or corrosion to  
various parts of the vehicle body.  
Vinyl upholstery  
Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-  
gent mixed with warm water. Apply the  
solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft  
cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to  
loosen dirt. Rub the surface with a clean,  
Vinyl floor mats  
Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl  
with water or mild soap. Use a brush to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-3  
   
APPEARANCE CARE  
2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.  
Remove dirt and mud from the body  
exterior with running water. You may  
use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use  
hard materials which can scratch the  
paint or plastic. Remember that the  
headlight covers or lenses are made of  
plastic in many cases.  
6) Check carefully for damage to painted  
surfaces. If there is any damage,  
“touch-up” the damage following the  
procedure below:  
Washing  
WARNING  
• Never attempt to wash and wax  
your vehicle with the engine run-  
ning.  
• When cleaning the underside of the  
body and fender, where there may  
be sharp-edged parts, you should  
wear gloves and a long-sleeved  
shirt to protect your hands and  
arms from being cut.  
• After washing your vehicle, care-  
fully test the brakes before driving  
to make sure they have maintained  
their normal effectiveness.  
1. Clean all damaged spots and allow  
them to dry.  
2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the  
damaged spots lightly using a small  
brush.  
3. Allow the paint to dry completely.  
CAUTION  
To avoid damage to the paint or plas-  
tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off  
without ample water. Be sure to fol-  
low above procedure.  
Waxing  
3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild  
detergent or car wash soap using a  
sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or  
cloth should be frequently soaked in the  
soap solution.  
When washing the vehicle, follow the  
instructions below:  
1) Flush the underside of body and wheel  
housings with pressurized water to  
remove mud and debris. Use plenty of  
water.  
CAUTION  
When using a commercial car wash  
product, observe the cautions speci-  
fied by the manufacturer. Never use  
strong household detergents or  
soaps.  
CAUTION  
60B211S  
• When washing the vehicle, avoid  
directing steam or hot water of  
more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic  
parts.  
• To avoid damaging engine compo-  
nents, do not use pressurized  
water in the engine compartment.  
After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-  
ishing are recommended to further protect  
and beautify the paint.  
4) Once the dirt has been completely  
removed, rinse off the detergent with  
running water.  
5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body  
with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it  
to dry in the shade.  
• Only use waxes and polishes of good  
quality.  
• When using waxes and polishes,  
observe the precautions specified by the  
manufacturers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-4  
   
APPEARANCE CARE  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-5  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Identification Numbers ....................................................... 12-1  
Safety Certification Label ................................................... 12-2  
Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 12-2  
Warranties ............................................................................ 12-2  
On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data  
Recorders ............................................................................ 12-3  
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 12-4  
54G072  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GENERAL INFORMATION  
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
may be found in the two locations shown in  
the above illustrations. This number is  
used to register the vehicle. It is also used  
to assist your dealer when ordering parts  
or referring to special service information.  
Engine Serial Number  
Identification Numbers  
Vehicle Identification Number  
EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)  
66J160  
The engine serial number is stamped on  
the cylinder block as shown in the above  
illustration.  
60G152  
64J197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-1  
       
GENERAL INFORMATION  
Safety Certification Label  
Emission Compliance Label  
(for U.S.A.)  
Warranties  
The warranties covering your vehicle are  
explained in a separate New Vehicle War-  
ranty Information booklet given to you at  
the time of sale. Please read this booklet  
carefully so you can understand your rights  
and responsibilities.  
For U.S.A.  
The following warranties are provided with  
your vehicle:  
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
• Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or  
Accessories  
• Emission Components Defect Warranty  
• Emission Performance Warranty  
52D059  
This label contains important safety-  
related information about your vehicle. The  
label is located on the driver’s door lock pil-  
lar.  
60A412  
The EPA emission compliance label is  
located under the hood.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-2  
           
GENERAL INFORMATION  
operation of the vehicle. This stored In addition, once SUZUKI collects or  
information can assist technicians in receives data, SUZUKI may use the  
repairing the vehicle when malfunc- data for research conducted by  
tions occur. Other information is stored SUZUKI, make the data available for  
only in the event of crash, by computer outside research if need is shown and  
systems that are commonly called confidentiality is assured, or make  
On-Board Vehicle Computers  
and Event Data Recorders  
Your vehicle is equipped with on-board  
computer systems which monitor and  
control several aspects of vehicle per-  
formance, including the following:  
• Emission-related components and  
engine parameters such as engine  
speed and throttle position are moni-  
tored to provide emissions control  
and to provide optimum fuel econ-  
omy. Your vehicle also has an on-  
board diagnostic system which mon-  
itors and records information about  
emission-related malfunctions.  
Event Data Recorders (EDRs).  
summary data which does not identify  
specific vehicles available for outside  
research.  
In a crash event, EDRs such as the  
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Mod-  
ule (SDM) in your vehicle may record Others, such as law enforcement per-  
information about the condition of the sonnel, may have access to the spe-  
vehicle and how it was operated, such cial equipment that can read the  
as data related to airbag readiness, information if they have access to the  
airbag performance, safety belt usage, vehicle or storage device.  
and the severity of the collision. These  
data can help provide a better under-  
• Signals from various sensors are  
monitored to provide air bag deploy-  
ment.  
standing of the circumstances in which  
crashes and injuries occur and lead to  
the designing of safer vehicles. The  
• If your vehicle is equipped with  
antilock brakes, conditions such as  
vehicle speed and brake perfor-  
mance are monitored, so that the  
ABS system can provide effective  
antilock braking. If your vehicle has  
an Electronic Stability Program  
SDM in your vehicle does not collect  
or store personal information.  
To read the stored information, special  
equipment is needed and access to  
the vehicle or storage device is  
required. SUZUKI will not access infor-  
mation about a crash event or share it  
with others other than with the consent  
of the vehicle owner or lessee, in  
response to an official request from  
the police or similar government office,  
as part of SUZUKI’s defense of litiga-  
tion through the discovery process, or  
as required by law.  
®
(ESP ) system, conditions such as  
yaw rate, lateral acceleration, and  
brake fluid pressure are monitored,  
®
so that the ESP system can help  
the driver control the vehicle in diffi-  
cult driving situations.  
Some information may be stored by  
the on-board computers during normal  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-3  
   
GENERAL INFORMATION  
To contact American Suzuki, owners  
in the continental United States can  
call toll-free 1-800-934-0934, or write  
to:  
Reporting Safety Defects  
If you believe that your vehicle has a  
defect which could cause a crash or  
could cause injury or death, you  
should  
immediately  
inform  
the  
American Suzuki Motor Corporation  
Automotive Customer Relations  
3251 East Imperial Highway  
Brea, CA 92821-6795  
National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to  
notifying American Suzuki Motor Corp.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,  
it may open an investigation, and if it  
finds that a safety defect exists in a  
group of vehicles, it may order a recall  
and remedy campaign. However,  
NHTSA cannot become involved in  
individual problems between you, your  
dealer, or American Suzuki Motor  
Corp.  
For owners outside the continental  
United States, please refer to the dis-  
tributor’s address listed in your War-  
ranty Information booklet.  
For vehicles registered for use and  
principally operated in Canada please  
contact Suzuki Canada Inc. at 1-905-  
889-2677 extension 2254 or write to:  
Suzuki Canada Inc.  
Customer Relations  
100 East Beaver Creek Road  
Richmond Hill, On  
L4B 1J6  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the  
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-  
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);  
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write  
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Sev-  
enth Street, SW., Washington, D.C.  
20590. You can also obtain other infor-  
mation about motor vehicle safety  
from http://www.safercar.gov.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-4  
     
GENERAL INFORMATION  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12-5  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
64J157  
FUSES  
PROTECTED CIRCUIT  
No.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
COLOR (AMPS)  
BLUE (15)  
YELLOW (20)  
BLUE (15)  
YELLOW (20)  
CLEAR (25)  
BLUE (15)  
YELLOW (20)  
YELLOW (20)  
GREEN (40)  
PINK (30)  
CPRSR  
O2 HTR  
THR MOT  
AT  
RR DEF  
HORN  
FR FOG  
MRR HTR  
FR BLW  
ABS 2  
A/C compressor fuse  
O2 sensor heater fuse  
Throttle motor fuse  
Automatic transmission fuse  
Rear defogger fuse  
Horn fuse  
Front fog light fuse  
Mirror heater fuse  
Front blower motor fuse  
ABS actuator fuse  
MAIN FUSE  
BOX  
In engine  
compartment  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-1  
     
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
64J157  
FUSES  
PROTECTED CIRCUIT  
ABS actuator fuse  
No.  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
(19)  
(20)  
COLOR (AMPS)  
RED (50)  
YELLOW (20)  
RED (10)  
RED (10)  
ABS 1  
FI  
H/L L  
H/L R  
H/L  
ST MTR  
IGN  
Main fuse  
Blank  
Head light high beam fuse, left  
Head light high beam fuse, right  
Head light fuse  
Starter motor fuse  
Ignition fuse  
MAIN FUSE  
BOX  
In engine  
compartment  
RED (10)  
GREEN (40)  
GREEN (40)  
BLUE (15)  
BLUE (15)  
H/L LO L  
H/L LO R  
Head light low beam fuse, left  
Head light low beam fuse, right  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-2  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
(J) (I) (H) (G) (F) (E) (D) (C) (B) (A)  
(K)  
(U) (T) (S) (R) (Q) (P) (O) (N) (M) (L)  
(W)  
(V)  
64J158  
FUSES IN FUSE BOX  
FUSES IN FUSE BOX  
(A)  
(B)  
BLUE (15)  
STOP  
Stop lamp fuse  
(M) RED (7.5)  
ST SIG  
RR BLOW  
S/R  
Starter signal fuse  
Blank  
Blank  
(N) YELLOW (20)  
(O) CLEAR (25)  
(C) BLUE (15)  
(D) RED (10)  
ACC 3  
CRUISE  
ACC 2  
WIP  
Accessory socket fuse  
Cruise control fuse  
Cigar or Accessory socket fuse  
Wiper fuse  
Sun roof motor fuse  
Dome lamp fuse  
Tail light fuse  
(P)  
BLUE (15)  
DOME  
TAIL  
(E)  
(F)  
BLUE (15)  
(Q) RED (10)  
YELLOW (20)  
(R) YELLOW (20)  
D/L  
Door lock actuator fuse  
Radio, Remote door mirror fuse  
Meter fuse  
(G) BLUE (15)  
(H) RED (10)  
IG2 SIG  
BACK  
ABS/ESP  
A/B  
Ignition signal & Seat heater fuse  
Back lamp fuse  
(S)  
(T)  
BLUE (15)  
RED (10)  
ACC  
METER  
IG COIL  
P/W T  
P/W  
(I)  
(J)  
(K)  
(L)  
RED (10)  
BLUE (15)  
ABS or ESP controller fuse  
Air bag fuse  
(U) YELLOW (20)  
(V) YELLOW (20)  
(W) PINK (30)  
Ignition coil fuse  
Power window fuse  
Power window fuse  
Blank  
BLUE (15)  
HAZ  
Hazard light fuse  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-3  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-4  
SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS  
NOTE:  
Specifications are subject to change with-  
out notice.  
4WD: 4-wheel drive  
2WD: 2-wheel drive  
M/T: Manual transmission  
A/T: Automatic transmission  
ITEM: Dimensions  
Overall length  
Overall width  
UNIT: mm (in.)  
4470 (176.0)  
1810 (71.3)  
1695 (66.7)  
1683 (66.3)  
2640 (103.9)  
1540 (60.6)  
1560 (61.4)  
200 (7.9)  
Overall height  
4WD  
2WD  
Wheelbase  
Tread  
front  
rear  
Minimum running ground clearance  
4WD  
2WD  
188 (7.4)  
ITEM: Weight  
Gross axle weight rating  
Gross vehicle weight rating  
Vehicle capacity weight  
See the safety certification label and the tire information label which  
are located on the driver’s door lock pillar.  
ITEM: Engine  
Type  
H27A (24V DOHC)  
6
Number of cylinders  
Bore  
88.0 mm (3.46 in.)  
75.0 mm (2.95 in.)  
14  
Stroke  
3
Piston displacement  
Compression ratio  
2736 cm (167.1 cu.in, 2736 cc)  
9.5 : 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-1  
     
SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM: Electrical  
Ignition timing  
Standard spark plug  
Battery  
5° B.T.D.C.  
DENSO SK20PR11 or NGK IFR6J11 (highly recommended)  
12V GP24  
Fuses  
See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” and “FUSES AND PRO-  
TECTED CIRCUITS” sections  
ITEM: Lights  
WATTAGE  
12V 55W  
12V 60W  
12V 55W  
12V 21W  
12V 21W  
12V 5W  
BULB No.  
H7  
Headlight  
Low beam  
High beam  
Halogen  
HB3  
H11  
Front fog light  
Turn signal light  
front  
rear  
WY21W  
WY21W  
WY5W  
7443  
W5W  
7440  
W5W  
Parking light  
Brake/tail light  
12V 21/5W  
12V 5W  
License plate light  
Reversing light  
High mount stop light  
Door illumination light  
Dome light  
12V 21W  
12V 5W  
12V 5W  
Spot light  
Center light  
Rear light  
12V 8W  
12V 10W  
12V 10W  
12V 5W  
Luggage compartment light  
W5W  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-2  
SPECIFICATIONS  
ITEM: Wheel  
Tire size, front and rear  
Tire pressure  
P225/70R16, P225/65R17  
For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located  
on the driver’s door lock pillar.  
ITEM: Steering  
Toe-in  
front  
rear  
front  
rear  
front  
0
6
2 mm (0 0.08 in.)  
2 mm (0.24 0.08 in.)  
Camber angle  
Caster angle  
0° 00’  
–1° 15’ 30’  
2° 30’  
ITEM: Capacities (approx.)  
Coolant  
8.2 L (17.3 US pt)  
66 L (17.4 US gal)  
4.8 L (10.1 US pt)  
1.9 L (4.0 US pt)  
Fuel tank  
Engine oil (replaced with filter)  
Transmission oil  
M/T  
A/T  
2.5 L (5.2 US pt) (when drained)  
0.95 L (2.0 US pt)  
0.9 L (1.9 US pt)  
Differential gear oil  
front  
2WD  
4WD  
rear  
0.8 L (1.7 US pt)  
Transfer gear box oil  
Extension case oil  
with a transfer switch  
1.5 L (3.2 US pt)  
without a transfer switch  
1.6 L (3.4 US pt)  
0.47 L (1.0 US pt)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-3  
SPECIFICATIONS  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14-4  
INDEX  
INDEX  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .................................. 2-22  
Automatic Transmission Fluid .......................................... 9-15  
Auto-On Headlight System ................................................ 3-6  
B
Symbols  
“AIR BAG” Light ..................................................................4-8  
“CRUISE” Indicator Light ...................................................4-9  
“ESP OFF” Indicator Light ..........................................4-6, 6-20  
“ESP OFF” Switch ...............................................................4-16  
“ESP” (Electronic Stability Program) Warning Light .......4-6  
“ESP” Warning Light ...........................................................6-20  
“PASS AIR BAG OFF” Indicator .........................................4-14  
“SET” Indicator Light ..........................................................4-9  
Numerics  
Basic Operations ................................................................ 4-31  
Battery .................................................................................. 9-35  
Brake Assist System .......................................................... 6-16  
Brake Fluid .......................................................................... 9-21  
Brake Pedal ..................................................................5-2, 9-22  
Brake System Warning Light ............................................. 4-5  
Brakes .................................................................................. 9-21  
Braking ................................................................................. 6-15  
Break-In ................................................................................ 6-25  
Brightness Control ............................................................. 4-11  
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 9-39  
C
Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 6-25  
Changing Engine Oil and Filter ......................................... 9-11  
Changing Wheels ................................................................ 9-30  
Charging Light .................................................................... 4-7  
Child Lock System (rear doors) ......................................... 2-13  
Child Restraint Systems ..................................................... 2-27  
Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray ........................................... 5-17  
Clock .................................................................................... 4-18  
Clutch Pedal .................................................................5-2, 9-24  
Coat Hooks .......................................................................... 5-11  
Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 11-1  
Cruise Control ..................................................................... 3-10  
5-Speed Automatic Transmission ......................................6-5  
A
A/T Selector Position Indicator ..........................................4-11  
Accelerator Pedal ................................................................5-2  
Accessory Socket ................................................................5-16  
Adding Engine Coolant .......................................................9-17  
Adjusting Seat Position ......................................................2-18  
Adjusting Seatbacks ...........................................................2-18  
Air Cleaner ...........................................................................9-20  
Air Conditioning System .....................................................9-47  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..........................................6-16  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .................4-5  
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) .......................................6-19  
Armrest .................................................................................5-7  
Assist Grips .........................................................................5-10  
Audio Systems .....................................................................4-28  
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System  
(Climate Control) .................................................................4-21  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-1  
   
INDEX  
Cup Holder and Storage Bin ...............................................5-14  
D
Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-3  
Fuel Gauge .......................................................................... 4-13  
Fuel Pump Labeling ............................................................ 1-1  
Fuel Recommendation ....................................................... 1-1  
Fuse under the Dash Board ............................................... 9-37  
Fuses .................................................................................... 9-36  
FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS ................................ 13-1  
G
Gasoline Containing MTBE ................................................ 1-1  
Gasoline/Ethanol blends .................................................... 1-1  
Gasoline/Methanol blends ................................................. 1-1  
Gear Oil ................................................................................ 9-13  
Gear Oil Level Check .......................................................... 9-14  
Gear Oil Replacement ......................................................... 9-15  
Gearshift Lever .................................................................... 5-2  
GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY ............................... 9-32  
Glove Box ............................................................................ 4-17  
H
Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 4-15  
Head Restraints ................................................................... 2-19  
Headlight Aiming ................................................................ 9-39  
High Beam Indicator Light ................................................. 4-10  
HomeLink® .......................................................................... 5-25  
Horn ...................................................................................... 3-12  
I
Identification Numbers ....................................................... 12-1  
If the Engine is Flooded ..................................................... 10-5  
If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 10-5  
If the Starter Does Not Operate ......................................... 10-4  
If You Can Not Shift Automatic Transmission Gearshift  
Lever Out of “P” (PARK) .................................................... 10-6  
Daily Inspection Checklist ..................................................6-2  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Indicator Light ...............4-10  
Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) System ............................3-7  
Door Locks ...........................................................................2-2  
Drive Belt ..............................................................................9-9  
Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light .....................................4-7  
E
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) .................................6-18  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .................................2-22  
Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ...........................12-2  
Engine Block Heater ............................................................6-4  
Engine Coolant ....................................................................9-17  
Engine Coolant Level Check ..............................................9-17  
Engine Coolant Replacement .............................................9-18  
Engine Hood ........................................................................5-13  
Engine Oil and Filter ............................................................9-9  
Engine Serial Number .........................................................12-1  
Exhaust Gas Warning .........................................................6-1  
F
Fluid Level Check ................................................................9-15  
Folding Rear Seats ..............................................................5-4  
Folding Seats .......................................................................5-4  
Frame Hooks ........................................................................5-17  
Front Air Bags ......................................................................2-39  
Front Fog Light Switch .......................................................4-16  
Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light ...................4-3  
Front Seat Back Pocket ......................................................5-19  
Front Seat Heater .................................................................5-9  
Fuel Consumption and Driving Range ..............................4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-2  
INDEX  
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ..................................................7-4  
Ignition Key Reminder ........................................................2-1  
Ignition Switch .....................................................................3-1  
Illumination Indicator Light ................................................4-10  
Important Vehicle Design Features To Know ...................7-1  
Improving Fuel Economy ....................................................6-26  
Information Display .............................................................4-17  
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................................................2-16  
Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts  
(Child Restraint with No Top Strap) ...................................2-29  
Installation with the LATCH System ..................................2-32  
Installation-Child Restraint with Top Strap .......................2-34  
Instrument Cluster ...............................................................4-2  
Instrument Panel .................................................................4-1  
Interior Light Switch ............................................................5-7  
J
Jacking Instructions ............................................................10-1  
Jump Starting Instructions .................................................10-3  
K
Keyless Entry System Transmitter (Type B) .....................2-10  
Keyless Start System Indicator Light ................................4-9  
Keyless Start System Remote Controller (Type A) ..........2-3  
Keyless Start System Remote Controller/  
Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer  
(Option) ................................................................................ 4-46  
Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option) ....................... 4-43  
Listening to Audio for AUX (Option) ................................. 4-45  
Listening to the Radio ........................................................ 4-33  
Low Fuel Warning Light ..................................................... 4-8  
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ...............................4-3, 6-21  
Luggage Compartment Cover ........................................... 5-20  
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................. 5-9  
Luggage Restraint Loops ................................................... 5-19  
M
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving  
Conditions ........................................................................... 9-7  
Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 9-2  
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................................ 4-8  
Manual Transmission ......................................................... 6-7  
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-16  
N
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) ............................................................................... 12-4  
O
Odometer ............................................................................. 4-11  
Off-Road Driving ................................................................. 7-4  
Oil Level Check ................................................................... 9-10  
Oil Pressure Light ............................................................... 4-7  
On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data  
Keyless Entry System Transmitter ....................................2-3  
Keys ......................................................................................2-1  
L
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................................................2-22  
Lighting Operation ..............................................................3-6  
Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever ...................................3-5  
Lights “On” reminder ..........................................................3-7  
Listening to a CD .................................................................4-35  
Recorders ............................................................................ 12-3  
On-Pavement Driving ......................................................... 7-2  
Open Door Warning Light .................................................. 4-9  
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................................. 2-17  
Overhead Console Box ...................................................... 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-3  
INDEX  
Shoulder anchor height adjuster ....................................... 2-26  
Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags ......................... 2-40  
Side Door Locks .................................................................. 2-2  
SLIP Indicator Light .....................................................4-6, 6-19  
Snow Tires ........................................................................... 9-32  
Spare Tire Nut Lock ............................................................ 2-1  
Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 9-20  
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 14-1  
Specified Fluid .................................................................... 9-15  
Specified Gear Oil ............................................................... 9-13  
Specified Oil ........................................................................ 9-9  
Speedometer ....................................................................... 4-11  
Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-8  
Stability Control System .................................................... 6-18  
Starting the Engine ............................................................. 6-2  
Steering Wheel .................................................................... 9-23  
Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-7  
Sunroof ................................................................................ 5-11  
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-37  
T
Tachometer .......................................................................... 4-13  
Tailgate ................................................................................ 2-14  
Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 4-14  
Theft Deterrent Light .......................................................... 4-21  
Thermometer ....................................................................... 4-18  
Tilt Steering Lock Lever ..................................................... 3-10  
Tire Chains .......................................................................... 7-5  
Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 5-18  
Tire Inflation Pressure ........................................................ 9-26  
Tire Inspection .................................................................... 9-27  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........................ 6-21  
P
Parking Brake Lever ....................................................5-1, 9-23  
Pedals ...................................................................................5-1  
Periodic Maintenance Schedule .........................................9-3  
Power Assisted Brakes .......................................................6-16  
Power Door Locking System ..............................................2-2  
Power Mirror Control ...........................................................2-17  
Power Steering ....................................................................9-24  
Power Steering Fluid ...........................................................9-24  
Power Window Controls .....................................................2-14  
R
Radio Antenna .....................................................................4-35  
Rear Window Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirrors  
Defroster Switch ..................................................................4-15  
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch ..................................3-9  
Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks ....................................9-12  
Remote Audio Controls ............................................3-12, 4-49  
Replace the Oil Filter ...........................................................9-11  
Replacing Tires and/or Wheels ..........................................6-24  
Reporting Safety Defects ....................................................12-4  
Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors ......................................5-23  
S
Safety Certification Label ...................................................12-2  
Seat Adjustment ..................................................................2-17  
Seat Belt Extender ...............................................................2-35  
Seat Belt Inspection ............................................................2-27  
Seat Belt Pretensioner System ..........................................2-36  
Seat Belt Reminder ..............................................................2-24  
Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ...........................2-20  
Selection of Coolant ............................................................9-17  
Shopping Hook ....................................................................5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-4  
INDEX  
Tire Rotation ........................................................................9-29  
Tire Sidewall Labeling .........................................................9-24  
Tire Size ................................................................................9-25  
Tires ......................................................................................9-24  
Towing a Disabled Vehicle .................................................10-4  
Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) .......................8-7  
Traction Control System .....................................................6-18  
Trailer Towing ......................................................................8-2  
Transfer Position Indicator Light .......................................4-10  
Transfer Switch ....................................................................4-17  
Tripmeter ..............................................................................4-11  
Troubleshooting ..................................................................4-53  
Turn Signal Indicators .........................................................4-9  
Turn Signal Operation .........................................................3-7  
U
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 9-19  
Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 3-8  
Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 9-44  
Underfloor Bins ...................................................................5-23  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .............................................9-28  
Using the Transfer Switch ..................................................6-7  
Using the Transmission ......................................................6-5  
V
Vehicle Cleaning ..................................................................11-3  
Vehicle Identification Number ............................................12-1  
Vehicle Loading ...........................................................8-1, 9-33  
Vehicle With Keyless Start System ............................3-2, 6-3  
Vehicle Without Keyless Start System ..............................3-1  
W
Warning and Indicator Lights .............................................4-3  
Warranties ............................................................................12-2  
Washing ................................................................................11-4  
Waxing ..................................................................................11-4  
Windows ...............................................................................2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-5  
INDEX  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-6  
Prepared by  
June, 2007  
Part No. 99011-66J22-03E  
Printed in Japan  
TP286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION  
Fuel recommendation:  
Brake and clutch fluid:  
See page 1-1  
DOT3  
Engine oil recommendation:  
Automatic transmission fluid:  
Engine oil with “Starburst” symbol  
SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309  
For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the  
“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.  
Tire cold pressure:  
See the “Tire Information Label” located on the  
driver’s door lock pillar.  
Made from 100% recycled paper,  
except for cover.  
Printed in Japan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp Computer Monitor LL M17W1 User Manual
Silvercrest Waffle Iron SZW 1000 A1 User Manual
Sony Cell Phone D5303 D5306 User Manual
Sony DVR SVR S500 User Manual
Sony Ericsson Cell Phone J132A User Manual
Sony Home Theater System DAV LF1 User Manual
Sony Microcassette Recorder 4 156 541 831 User Manual
Sony Portable CD Player D E200 User Manual
Sterling Saw D48160s User Manual
Swann Security Camera SW223 CBB User Manual